Connection Conditions Bosch CC220

Antriebs- und Steuerungstechnik
CC 220
Connection Conditions
Part 1 and Part 2
Version
103
Automationstechnik
CC 220
Connection Conditions
Part 1 and Part 2
1070 073 301-103 (95.05) GB
(Z25 WJ and D25 GJ)
1995
by Robert Bosch GmbH,

All rights reserved, including applications for protective rights.
Reproduction or handing over to third parties are subject to our written permission.
Discretionary charge
40. DM
Contents
CC220
Connectionconditions
Contents
New or amended modules/sections (in relation to the previous edition of the manual) are identified with a ". In
the manual itself such changes are identified by means of correction bars in the margin.
Connection conditions part 1

Page
Safety notes
Foreword
1.
System configuration
1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.5.6
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
1.6.6
1.6.7
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1
Card rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4
NC card rack 1.05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5
NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6
NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6
Slot variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7
Operating panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 14
14" standard colour panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 14
12" monochrome panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 25
14" special colour panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 34
Extended modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 51
MTB1 I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 51
Handwheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 59
ASCII keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 59
DNC interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 60
PLC couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 69
PIC 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 70
CL 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 72
PC 600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 73
Limits to PLC program generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 76
Possible PLC couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 78
PLC modules (AG/NC3S, AG/ZS, E24/DC 95way) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 81
External expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 87
DCR cassette player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 87
MiniCass cassette player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 89
Punched tape reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 91
Diskette unit CC disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 95
PG4 programming unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 96
XTRANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 96
Biburn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 96
Contents1
Contents
CC220
2.
Dimensions, installation and connection conditions
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
2.7.6
2.8
2.9
Dimensions card rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1

NC card rack 1.05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1
NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 and NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2
Dimensions operating panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3
12" monochrome panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3
14" colour panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4
Dimensions MTB1 I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 5
Dimensions ASCII keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 5
Dimensions handwheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 7
Operating panel installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 7
Installing drawer with keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 8
Installing the MTB1 I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 9
Installing the electronic handwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 9
Installing the card rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 10
Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 12
General data for power supply(ies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 12
24 V power supply modules for load and logic supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 13
PE conductor and screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 14
Interference suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15
Voltage connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 17
Notes on switch cabinet construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 21
Field service conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 22
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 24
3.
Plugin modules
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
CP/MEM5 computer/memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2

SERVOi servo loop interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 10
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 10
Measuring system inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 12
8way analog input, high Speed I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 22
Probe inputs / 5 V probe power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 26
Analog setpoint outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 29
I/O 24/0.2 module with PIC 250 (digital I/O with integrated PLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 31
NCPLCbit module (bit coupler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 39
NCPLCWord3 module (word coupler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 42
SCP2 module (serial couple processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 45
PCI/OS module with intigratet PIC 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 50
PS 75 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 53
Contents2
Contents
CC220
Connection conditions part 2

Page
4.
Digital interface
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
Interface tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1
Signals from PLC to CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2
Signals from CNC to PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8
PLC input addresses of the MTB1 I/O inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 14
PLC output addresses of the MTB1 I/O outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 16
Signals to the machine (PIC 250 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 17
Signals from the machine (PIC 250 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 18
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
Signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 20
Control inputs (PLC outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 22
Control outputs (PLC inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 92
4.3
Other signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ready2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTB I/O inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HighSpeed I/O of the SERVOi control loop card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4
Signal register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 150
Parts list
Glossary
Contents3
4 144
4 144
4 144
4 145
Contents
Contents4
CC220
Safetynotes
CC220
Safety notes
Pictograph and symbol explanations
The following warning stickers can be attached to control units themselves to
draw attention to certain points:
Danger of electrocution!
Danger of battery leakage!
Danger: electrostatic components!
Remove plug before opening!
Bolts only for PE conductor connection!
Only for cable screen connection!
Symbols used in the manual:

To draw attention to particular points:
IMPORTANT
(Under this heading are contained supplementary explanations, recommenda
tions, information and tips)
To draw your attention to particular safetycritical points or instructions:

CAUTION
(Damage to equipment can result if instructions are not observed! For example,
files can be erased or modules can be damaged. Failure to observe instructions will
invalidate the guarantee.)
CAUTION
(Damage to equipment or even personal injury can result if instructions are not
observed.)
Safetynotes
CC220
READY2 signal
Owing to the particular, safetycritical significance with regard to drive movements
or the evaluation of CNC digital I/Os, we draw your attention to the control signal
READY2 (for relay contact, see section PS 75 in this manual; also the Other sig
nals" section of the chapter Digital interface" in the manual Connection condi
tions part 2").
CAUTION
The READY2 contact must be networked to the emergency stop circuit!

The control is not ready if the READY2 contact is open! For this reason all dan
gerous functions must be made safe immediately after opening the contact!
System components / plugin modules

CAUTION
All plugin modules may only be inserted or removed when the control is
switched off!
Unauthorised opening or removal of CNC components or improperly carried
out repairs can result in death, physical injury or serious damage to equip
ment!
After removal or opening of casing or protective guards, or after opening the
switch cabinet it is possible that certain system components will be exposed
which are live and dangerous!
Repairs or maintenance of CNC components may only be carried out by the
Bosch Service Department or by maintenance centres authorised by Bosch.
The modules contain components which can be destroyed by static dis
charges! For this reason, ensure equipotential bonding before touching a
module or components of the module.
Plugin modules should only be transported in antistatic packaging!
Do not place plugin modules on conductive surfaces, as this can result in
buffered data being lost!
Screen connection / PE conductor connection

CAUTION
Screen connections on the front side of the plugin modules can only be used
for connecting cable screening and not for connecting a protective earth
(PE)!
Cable screening must have largesurface contact with the strainrelief clamp
in the case of conductive plug housing. If no metallic/conductive plug hous
ing can be used, the cable screening of the screen connection must be con
nected to the respective module (taper pin)! Conductive plug housing is rec
ommended.
Safetynotes
CC220
Interfaces / interface modules

CAUTION
Inadequate screening reduces immunity to interference and can lead to sys

tem faults! Refer to the section PE conductors and screening" in the chapter
Dimensions, installation and connection conditions", and to the respective
pin assignment plans and diagrams given!
Incorrect assignment of interface leads can destroy the interface chips! For
this reason, check that the pin assignment is correct before using the inter
face leads.
Static discharges can destroy interface chips! For this reason, ensure equi
potential bonding before touching the module/interface.
In the case of interfaces which link together units in different locations (re
gardless of the distance or supply system), the user must ensure absolute
equipotential bonding between the units to be linked before the initial
startup! Data terminal units to be coupled must be connected to the net
work.
Observe the connection conditions of the data terminal unit! If the data ter
minal unit does not allow the interface cable to be connected or discon
nected when voltage is applied, then the panel/CNC and the data terminal
unit must also be switched off! Recommendation: only connect or discon
nect connection cables when voltage is not applied.
Safetynotes
CC220
Foreword
CC220
Foreword
This manual describes software version Z25 WJ" for control unit CC 220 M and
D25 GJ" for control unit CC 220 T.
IMPORTANT
The group operating mode DIAGNOSIS contains instructions for the current con
trol unit software version which may be accessed via the softkey DIAGNOSTIC
CONTROL or SOFTWARE VERSION.
As the title suggests, this manual contains information required for normal oper
ation of the control unit. For reasons of clarity, however, not every detail of every
possible control variant can be included. Similarly, as the control unit is usually only
part of a larger installation or system, not every conceivable aspect of integration,
operation or maintenance is covered.
Your Bosch service branch or customer advisory service will be pleased to help you
if you require more detailed information. Please contact them also if problems with
the control unit should arise which are not sufficiently dealt with in this manual.
This manual is intended for technically qualified personnel.

CAUTION
Configuration, commissioning or maintenance may only be carried out by suitably

qualified personnel! Such personnel must be able to recognise the dangers which
can be caused by mechanical, electrical or electronic equipment.
Please consult our comprehensive training program. An overview of courses may
be found on the inside front cover of this manual. Our training centre will be pleased
to provide you with further information (Tel: 06062/78258).
Foreword
CC220
Systemconfiguration
General
1.
1.1
General
CC220
The CC 220 is a modular system, i.e. the various functional areas such as com
puter, control loops etc. are located on separate plugin modules.
The card rack is provided to accommodate all the required plugin modules. It
combines the individual modules to form a single electrical and mechanical entity
(logic section). Three different types of card rack are available (NC card rack 1.05,
NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 and NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7).
The control and the operator communicate (displays, inputs) via the operating
panel. The panel is available as a 12" monochrome version (with grey tones) or as
a 14" colour version.
Module MTB1 I/O is available as an additional module to the panel. Here signal
cables can be connected to and from the machine panel, e.g. pushbuttons, lamps,
handwheels, potentiometers, etc. These signals are then transmitted to the PLC via
the CNC.
The ASCII keyboard is available also as an additional panel module for easy input
(e.g. when programming the machine or using the CC 220 as a programming sta
tion). A dropdown drawer is available for spacesaving installation of the key
board on the machine.
CARDRACK
PLC
COUPLING
(Bitor
word)
PANEL
ext.
DNC
computer
ASCII
keyboard
MTB1I/O
CNCsystemconfiguration:overview
11
External
addon
units
(serial)
Systemconfiguration
General
CC220
System configuration CC 220
X21
I/O
Example:
NC card rack
containing CP/MEM5 Servo i, I/O
24/0.2 and PS 75
and monochrome or colour panel
PS75
BLANKPANEL
CP/MEM5
SERVOi
X22
X22
X22
X21
X62
X61
X71
X62
X61

12"
monochrome
paper white
(order no. 063
547)
or
X62
X61
X62
X61
X71
MTB1I/O
14"
colour
(order no. 063 554)
MTB1I/O
ASCIIkeyboard
ASCIIkeyboard

12
Systemconfiguration
General
CC220
System configuration CC 220 with special

colour panel for integrating a PC
X21
A further PC apart from the CNC can be con

nected to the special colour panel (order no.
071339) with this configuration.
I/O
PS75
BLANKPANEL
CP/MEM5
SERVOi
An MF2 keyboard is coupled to the panel in

stead of the CNC ASCII keyboard.
The panel can be connected to either the CNC
or the PC by changing over via an interface sig
nal.
X22
PC without monitor
Keyboard cable (max. 25m)
VGA cable (max. 25m)
X22
X21
X33
X23

14"
colour
(order no. 071 339)
X32
X62
X61
X71
X62
X31
X12
X61
MTB1I/O
MF2keyboard

13
Systemconfiguration
Cardrack
1.2
CC220
Card rack
Three different card rack versions are available for the CC 220:
NC card rack 1.05

NC logic section with max. 5 plugin modules.
NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8

NCPLC I/O logic section with max. 5 plugin modules and 8 PLC I/O
modules.
NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7

NCPLC I/O logic section with max. 5 plugin modules and the
CL300 modules: power supply module NT301/300, central processing unit
ZE300 and 5 PLC modules (permissible combinations according to the
basic unit GG300K).
CAUTION
The card rack must be connected using the earthing stud on the PE conductor sys
tem. The earthing stud is located on the inside of the card rack, directly next to the
left cable bushing opening (facing the front).
The individual plugin modules contain components which can be destroyed by
static discharges! For this reason, ensure equipotential bonding before touching
the modules or components of the modules.
Please refer to the chapter Dimensions, installation and connection conditions"

for information on dimensions and instructions for installation, electrical connec
tions and maintenance.
The section PLC couplings" gives possible PLC couplings to the CNC.
14
Systemconfiguration
Cardrack
1.2.1
CC220
NC card rack 1.05

This rack is designed to accommodate a maximum of 5 CNC plugin modules.
The fan unit beneath the switch group is driven with 24 VDC.
O
I
Example:
NC card rack fitted with the modules CP/MEM5, Servo icard
I/O 24/0.2 and PS 75
Ordering information
Type
No.
NC card rack 1.05

Fan unit 242
065 610
054 092
15
Systemconfiguration
Cardrack
1.2.2
CC220

The CNC section is enlarged to accommodate PLC I/O modules. A total of 8 slots
are available for PLC I/O modules.
The ventilation unit beneath the PLC switch groups (24 VDC) is prewired to the fan
unit.
PS75
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
BLANKPANEL
PCI/OS
BLANKPANEL
CP/MEM5
SERVOi
I/OBUS
Example:
NC/PLC card rack fitted with the modules CP/MEM5, Servo icard,
PCI/OS, PS 75 and PLC I/O cards

The ventilation unit beneath the PLC switch groups (24 VDC) is prewired to the fan
unit.
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
ZE300
NT300
BLANKPANEL
PS75
NCPLCBIT
BLANKPANEL
SERVOi
CP/MEM5
1.2.3
I/OBUS
Example:
NC/CL3 card rack fitted with the modules CP/MEM5, Servo icard,
NCPLC bit coupler, PS 75 and CL 300
Type
No.

incl. fan unit
066 750

incl. fan unit
066 860
16
Systemconfiguration
Cardrack
1.2.4
CC220
Slot variations
The diagrams schematically depict the possible slot variations for the NC card
rack 1.05, the NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 and the NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7 re
spectively.
NC card rack 1.05
CP/MEM5, computer/memory module

Max. 512 kByte RAM (user memory)
Max. 1 MByte EPROM (customer EPROM)
Max. 128 kByte EEPROM
Power supply module PS 75

The power supply module supplies the internal voltages for the logic circuits
of all plugin modules.
1.
5.
CP/
MEM5
Slot
PS75
Slot 1 and 5
In all card racks, slots 1 and 5 are reserved for modules CP/MEM5 and PS75.
17
Systemconfiguration
Cardrack
CC220
Servotypes, servo loop modules (servo cards)

Servo 4i with 4 analog setpoint outputs and 3 measuring system inputs
Servo i EXE3/S with 3 integrated EXEs.
If no SCP2 cards are used, or a second I/O card is used, then 2
Servo icards may be connected.
Note that the total number of system axes is limited to 8!
2.
3.
Slot
BLANK
PANEL
Second
I/O
SERVO
CARD
SERVO
CARD
SCP2
Slot 2
Slot 2 is provided for the first Servo icard respectively in all card rack versions
(Servo 4i, Servo 6i, Servo i EXE3).
Slot 3
Slot 3 is provided for either a second servo card (Servo 4i, Servo 6i, Servo i EXE3), a
second I/O card (without PIC250) or one SCP2 card. The fitting of slots 2 and 4 is
decisive. A dummy cover is used instead of a second servo or I/O card or the SCP
card.
18
Systemconfiguration
Cardrack
CC220
PLC alternatives
I/O 24/0.2 with PIC 250
I/O card with 64 inputs and 40 outputs and internal PLC (PIC 250).
A second I/O card (without PIC 250) can be fitted.
Bit coupling
NCPLC bit coupler, connection module to external PLC
(PC600, CL300).
Word coupling
NCPLC word coupler (WK3); Connection module to external PLC
(PC600). Used only with CC 220 M.
PCI/OS coupling
Direct coupling with PLC I/O cards housed in the combination rack or
an external rack.
DNC versions
EDNC (additional card available for modules I/O 24/0.2 with PIC250,
PCI/OS, NCPLC bit and NCPLC word3)
LSV2DNC (as for EDNC)
LSV2DNC with SCP2 (only if no second servo card or second I/O card
is fitted)
3.
4.
BLANK
PANEL
I/O
24/0.2
Second
I/O
NCPLC
BIT
SERVO
card
NCPLC
WORD*)
SCP2
PC
I/OS
Slot
*)CC220Monly
Slot 3
Slot 3 is provided for either a second I/O card (without PIC250), a second servo
card (Servo 4i, Servo 6i, Servo i EXE3) or one SCP card. The fitting of slots 2 and 4 is
decisive. If the slot is not fitted, it is covered with a dummy cover.
Slot 4
This slot is provided for either an I/O card (with PIC250), the NCPLC bit coupling
card, the NCPLC word3 (CC 220 M only) or the PCI/OS coupling card.
The section PLC couplings" gives information on the possible individual PLC
couplings.
19
Systemconfiguration
Cardrack
CC220
NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 or NC/CL3 card rack
CP/MEM5 computer/memory module

Max. 512 kByte RAM (user memory)
Max. 1 MByte EPROM (customer EPROM)
Max. 128 kByte EEPROM
Power supply module PS 75 or PS 200

The power supply module supplies the internal voltages for the logic circuits
of all plugin modules.
1.
5.
6.
PS75
BLANK
PANEL
Slot
PLCsection
CP/
MEM5
PS200
In addition, slot 6 is provided with a dummy cover for NC/PLC card rack and NC/
CL3 card rack. This makes it possible in the case of both racks to use the more
powerful power supply module (which requires slots 5 + 6) instead of the PS75 at
slot 5 and the dummy cover at slot 6.
110
Systemconfiguration
Cardrack
CC220
Servotypes, servo loop modules (servo cards)

Servo i EXE3/S with 3 integrated EXEs
If no SCP2 cards are used, or a second I/O card is used, then 2
Servo icards may be connected.
Note that the total number of system axes is limited to 8!
2.
3.
BLANK
PANEL
Slot
PLCsection
SERVO
card
SERVO
card
Slot 3
Slot 3 is provided for either a second Servo icard (Servo 4i, Servo 6i, Servo i EXE3)
or a dummy cover.
111
Systemconfiguration
Cardrack
CC220
PLC alternatives
Bit coupling
NCPLC bit coupler, connection module to external PLC
(PC600, CL300).
PCI/OS coupling (NCPLC card rack 1.05/8 only)
Direct coupling with PLC I/O cards housed in the combination rack or
an external rack.
DNC versions
EDNC (with additional card for modules PCI/OS and NCPLC bit)
LSV2DNC (as for EDNC)
For NCPLC card rack 1.05/8:

3.
4.
BLANK
PANEL
PC
I/OS
SERVO
card
NCPLC
BIT
6.
Slot
PLCsection
Slot 3
Slot for a second servo card (Servo 4i, Servo 6i, Servo i EXE3). If the slot is not fitted
it is covered with a dummy cover.
Slot 4
This slot is provided for PCI/OS or NCPLCbit coupling card. The connection be
tween the NC and the PLCI/O modules is created internally via the backplane. The
section PLC couplings" gives information on possible PLC couplings.
For NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7:

3.
4.
BLANK
PANEL
6.
Slot
PLCsection
NCPLC
BIT
SERVO
card
112
Systemconfiguration
Cardrack
CC220
Slot 3
Slot for a second servo card (Servo 4i, Servo 6i, Servo i EXE3). If the slot is not fitted
it is covered with a dummy cover.
Slot 4
Slot for the NCPLC bit coupling card. The connection between the NC and the
CL300 modules is created internally via the backplane. In addition, one PLC expan
sion unit with digital I/O modules can be connected via socket X11 of the NCPLC
bit. No switch groups which may interrupt other units or which are addressed on
the extended field (EI/EO) may be used in this expansion unit!
The section PLC couplings" gives information on possible PLC couplings.
113
Operating panels
14" standard colour panel
1.3
CC220
Operating panels

12" monochrome panel with grey tones
14" special colour panel for additional connection to PCs

1.3.1

The 14" operating panel has graphics capabilities. The colour can be modified by
machine parameters and within CPL programs.
Type
No.
Colour panel 1.014"
063 554
The interfaces for connecting the ASCII keyboard, MTB1 I/O and CP/MEM5, an
LED and a fuse may be found on the backplane of the panel. A brightness potentio
meter is located on the front panel, to the left of the monitor. This is operated with a
screwdriver.
Electrical connections and controls

Connection cable
RGB cable
X22
14"
colour
panel
X71
CP/MEM5
max.25mcablelength
X21
X61
Brightness
potentiometer
Mains connection
230 VAC
X62
max.2m
cablelength
max.1,5m
cablelength
MTB1I/O
64inputs
32outputs
Connectionfor
3or2potentiometers
1digitalhandwheel
ASCIIkeyboard
Controls and ports at a glance

Brightness potentiometer
Potentiometer for adjusting screen brightness. Screen brightness can be suited to
the local lighting conditions. Light filters should be used to prevent glare if necess
ary.
CAUTION
Excessive brightness causes premature ageing" and burning" of the picture
tube. This invalidates the guarantee!
114
Operating panels
CC220
Interface section of the colour panel

Fuse (M 4 A)
LED, green
ASCII keyboard
Socket X71, SubD, 25 pin
MTB1 I/O
MTB1 I/O
CP/MEM4
Connector X21, RGB interface
SubD, 15 pin
CP/MEM4
Connector X22, SubD, 20 pin
incl. BNC socket (video signal)
Colour panel rear view

(interface strip only)
Fuse (M 4 A)
Protects the 24 V= input voltage to X22.
CAUTION
Only use the fuse type recommended. Jumpering the fuse is not permitted.
LED
The green LED indicates that the 24 V= supply voltage from the CP/MEM4 is on.
115
Operating panels
CC220
Panel CP/MEM4
The panel is connected to the CP/MEM4 by means of the cables X21 and X22.
Cable X22 contains the leads for the 24 V supply voltage for the panel, analog sig
nals (potentiometers) and keyboard signals. The video sync signal is transmitted
down an internal coax lead. RGB video signals are carried by cable X21.
Connector X22
20 pin subD connector of special design with additional BNC socket for video sync
signal transmission.
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
A1
AVCC
AGND
VREF
IN3
IN1
IN4
RESERVE1
RESERVE2
GND(PHGinterface)
+12VP(CPinterface)
AGND
+24V
PGND
IN2
IN0
PGND
+12V(PHGinterface)
TX+
RX+
RS+
CSYNC
Connector X21
Video interface for transmission of RGB video signals and colour monitor identifica
tion. Cable assignment:
SocketX21
Pin
ConnectorX21
Pin
Core colour
Signal
8
15
8
15
red
Screen(red)
Red
Groundred
14
7
14
7
gn
Screen(gn)
Green
Groundgn
6
13
6
13
bl
Screen(bl)
Blue
Groundbl
5
12
black
Bridge
Coreno.7
4
11
black
Bridge
Coreno.8
116
Operating panels
CC220
Special socket, SubD, 20pin

to panel
Special connector, SubD, 20pin

to CP/MEM4
max. 25 m
Screened cable
2 x 8 x 0.14
1 x 4 x 0.31
1 x mini coax section
Cablediameter:
11+/0,5mm
Bending radius:
single: 55 mm
multiple: 110 mm
Screen attachment: metal bracket from

body (screen is located in between)
tightened evenly left and right.
screen
Connection cable X22 panel CP/MEM
Type
No.
Length
Connection cable X22
048 028
052 265
048 029
048 668
065 617
2.5
5
10
20
25

to panel
m
m
m
m
m

to CP/MEM4
max. 25 m
Screened cable
Cablediameter:
9,1+/0,5mm

Connection cable X21 panel CP/MEM 4

Type
No.
Length
RGB cable X21
065 620
065 622
065 624
2.5 m
10 m
25 m
117
Screen
Operating panels
CC220
Connecting pushbuttons and switches to the panel (systems without MTB1 I/O)
Up to 64 switching elements (make/break contact elements and pushbuttons) can
be connected to panel interface X61. Pushbuttons and switches must be suited to a
switched current of approx. 3 mA (gold contacts).
Required minimum conductor cross section: 0.14 mm2. Screened cables must be
used.
CAUTION
Signals SCAN8 to SCAN15 are LOW active!
Connection of input signals to X61:

from X61 to switching element
max. 2.5 m
Panel X61
Data0
Data1
Data2
Data3
Data4
Data5
Data6
Data7
All diodes: Type 1 N 4148

AddressE32.0
AddressE32.1
AddressE32.2
AddressE32.3
AddressE32.4
AddressE32.5
AddressE32.6
AddressE32.7
21
20
2
1
3
22
4
23
ByteE33
ByteE34
Scan8
Scan9
Scan10
Scan11
Scan12
Scan13
Scan14
Scan15
27
8
7
5
6
Addresses35.035.7
Addresses36.036.7
Addresses37.037.7
Addresses38.038.7
Addresses39.039.7
24
25
26
118
Operating panels
CC220
Connecting output elements to the panel (systems without MTB1 I/O)

Up to 32 output elements can be connected to the panel interfaces X61 and X62.
The LOW active outputs OUT1 and OUT2 are specially designed for the connec
tion of filament lamps (12 V, max.100 mA, not short circuitproof!).
LEDs or amplifiers can be connected to the LOW active outputs OUT3 to OUT32
(short circuitproof, internal resistance: 511 W).
used.
Connecting output elements to X61 and X62:
from X61/X62 to output element
max. 2.5 m
Panel X61
+12Vout
13
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
Imax = 800 mA
AddressA32.0
AddressA32.1
AddressA32.2
AddressA32.3
AddressA32.4
AddressA32.5
AddressA32.6
AddressA32.7
28
10
29
11
30
12
31
Panel X62
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT31
OUT32
23
AddressA33.0
AddressA33.1
AddressA33.2
AddressA33.3
2
3
4
.
.
.
.
AddressA35.6
AddressA35.7
25
CAUTION
OUT1 and OUT2:
Imax = 100 mA per output
OUT3 to OUT32:
Signals OUT1 to OUT32 are LOW active!
119
Operating panels
CC220
Connecting potentiometers to the panel (systems without MTB1 I/O)

A total of 5 potentiometers (1kW) can be connected to X61.
3 potentiometer inputs (IN0, IN1, IN4) are evaluated absolutely, i.e. the resistance
value determines the correcting quantity ( = potentiometer setting. Suitable for,
e.g. rapid, feed and spindle override).
2 potentiometer inputs (IN2, IN3) are evaluated incrementally, i.e. changes in re
sistance determine the correcting quantity ( = potentiometer turning speed. Suit
able for e.g. connecting an analog handwheel or endless potentiometer).
Max. cable length per potentiometer connection = 5 m. Use a screened 3core
lead (minimum conductor cross section: 0.14 mm2) for each potentiometer. Avoid
open leads. The connection diagram is as shown:
Panel X61
max. 5 m
AVCC
IN0
AGND
IN1
19
33
1 kOhm
P1
1 kOhm
P2
1 kOhm
P3
1 kOhm
P5
1 kOhm
P6
Analog
handwheel
36
15
35
IN4
IN2
34
16
IN3
Screenvia
metalcover
tohousing
Screened cable 3 x 0.14
Both ends of the screen must be connected to the casing.
Connection of potentiometer directly to X61
120
Operating panels
CC220
Connection panel MTB1 I/O

Connection is by means of two subD sockets X61 and X62.
Socket X61, subD, 37 pin
Pin configuration, socket X61 (37 pin)
Pin
Assignment
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DATA3
DATA2
DATA4
DATA6
SCAN11
SCAN12
SCAN10
SCAN9
OUT1
OUT3
OUT5
OUT7
+12VOUT
SCAN5
IN1
IN3
24VOK
MTB1on
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
AVCC
DATA1
DATA0
DATA5
DATA7
SCAN13
SCAN14
SCAN15
SCAN8
OUT2
OUT4
OUT6
OUT8
PGND
IN0
IN2
IN4
AGND
37

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Assignment
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
OUT17
OUT18
OUT19
OUT20
OUT21
121
Pin
Assignment
14
15
16
17
18
OUT22
OUT23
OUT24
OUT25
OUT26
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
OUT27
OUT28
OUT29
OUT30
OUT31
PGND
OUT32
Operating panels
CC220
Connector, subD, to panel
Socket, subD, to MTB1 I/O

max. 2 m
Screened cable
36 x 0.14
or
25 x 0.14
Cablediameter:
X61:11mm
X62:9,5mm

Connection cable X61 panel MTB1 I/O

Screen
Type
Cable
Cable
X61
X62
No.
Length
065 619
065 618
2m
2m
Connection panel ASCII keyboard

Connection is by means of a 25 pin subD socket.
Pin configuration, socket X71
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Pin
Assignment
14
15
16
17
18
GND
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
STRB
VCC
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Assignment
GND
VCC
Type
No.
ASCII keyboard
Cyrillic ASCII keyboard
050 461
062 521
122
Connection cable
Length
1.5 m
1.5 m
Operating panels
CC220
Power supply connection 230 VAC

with integrated fuse: 2 x M2A
PEterminal
Ventilationinlets
Rear view colour panel (interface strip with power supply connection only)
230 VAC power supply input (nonheating unit socket with integrated fuse holders).
Fuses: 2 x M 2 A.
CAUTION
Only use the fuse type recommended. Jumpering the fuses is not permitted.
The operating panel must always be switched on together with the control (logic
section)!
Remove mains plug before opening the panel casing!
The 14" colour panel is equipped with an automatic ventilation unit on the rear side,
within the casing. The ventilation unit switches on automatically if the ambient tem
perature within the casing is greater than or equal to 45C (5C). The ventilation
unit switches off again if the temperature drops below <35C (5C).
Danger of injury!
Never place your hands inside the fan impeller in case it switches on suddenly. Do
not place any objects in the fan impeller!
Specifications
Ambient temperature
+ 5C to + 55C
Storage temperature
25C to + 70C
Humidity class
Class F to DIN 40040
Moisture condensation is not permitted
The surrounding air must be free from high levels of dust, acid, caustics, corrosive agents, salts, me
tallic vapours and other conductive impurities.
Mechanical strength
Air pressure
to IEC 6826/IEC 68227

max. 1000 m above sea level
Protection standard to DIN 40050 Front panel IP 54, otherwise IP 20

Power supply
230 V a.c.; +6% / 10%
123
Operating panels
CC220
Power circuit breaker

2 x M2A
(integrated in nonheating unit socket)
Frequency
50 ... 60Hz 1%
Power input
max. 80 W
Screen diagonal
Screen resolution
Horizontal deflection frequency
Vertical deflection frequency
Xray radiation
124
14"
27 lines, 64 characters
512 x 384 pixels
20.6 kHz
50 Hz
conforms to Xray regulations
(BGBI. I S. 114) dated 8 Jan. 87
5, section (2)
Operating panels
12" monochrome panel
1.3.2
CC220

The 12" monochrome panel has graphics capabilities. The user is able to set 7 grey
tones with background colour for all screen areas using machine parameters (P
3600 grey tone settings).
Type
No.
Monochrome 1.012"
063 547
The interfaces for connecting the ASCII keyboard, MTB1 I/O and CP/MEM5, an
LED and a fuse may be found on the backplane of the panel. A brightness potentio
meter is located on the front panel, to the left of the monitor. This is operated with a
screwdriver.

Connectioncable,max.25m
CP/MEM5
X22
12"
Monochrome
panel
X71
Brightness potentio
meter
X61
X62
max.2m
cablelength
max.1,5m
cablelength
MTB1I/O
64inputs
32outputs
Connectionfor
3or2potentiometers
1digitalhandwheel
ASCIIkeyboard
ary (particularly with white background).
CAUTION
125
Operating panels
CC220
Interface section of the 12" monochrome panel

Fuse (F1)
LED, green
ASCII keyboard
MTB1 I/O
MTB1 I/O
CP/MEM5
Connector X22, SubD, 20 pin
incl. BNC socket (video signal)
Rear side
Monochrome panel
Fuse (F1)
Fuse (M 4 A) to protect the 24 V= input voltage to X22.
CAUTION
LED
The green LED indicates that the 24 V= supply voltage from the CP/MEM5 to X22 is
on.
126
Operating panels
CC220
Panel CP/MEM5
The 12" monochrome panel is connected to the CP/MEM5 in the card rack of the
NC by one special cable (two in the case of colour panels). The cable contains the
leads for the 24 V supply voltage for the panel, analog signals (potentiometers) and
keyboard signals. The video sync signal is transmitted down an integrated coax
lead.
Connector X22
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Pin
Assignment
Assignment
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
A1
AVCC
AGND
VREF
IN3
IN1
IN4
RESERVE1
RESERVE2
GND(PHGinterface)
+12VP(CPinterface)

to panel
AGND
+24V
PGND
IN2
IN0
PGND
+12V(PHinterface)
TX+
RX+
RS+

to CP/MEM5
max. 25 m
Screened cable
2 x 8 x 0.14
1 x 4 x 0.31
Cablediameter:
11+/0,5mm
Bending radius:
single: 55 mm
multiple: 110 mm

Screen
Connection cable X22 panel CP/MEM
Type
No.
Length
048 028
052 265
048 029
046 668
065 617
2.5
5
10
20
25
127
m
m
m
m
m
Operating panels
CC220
Up to 64 switching elements (make/break contact elements and pushbuttons) can
be connected to panel interface X61. Pushbuttons and switches must be suited to a
switched current of approx. 3 mA (gold contacts).
used.
CAUTION

max. 2.5 m
Panel X61
Data0
Data1
Data2
Data3
Data4
Data5
Data6
Data7

AddressE32.0
AddressE32.1
AddressE32.2
AddressE32.3
AddressE32.4
AddressE32.5
AddressE32.6
AddressE32.7
21
20
2
1
3
22
4
23
ByteE33
ByteE34
Scan8
Scan9
Scan10
Scan11
Scan12
Scan13
Scan14
Scan15
27
8
7
5
6
Addresses35.035.7
Addresses36.036.7
Addresses37.037.7
Addresses38.038.7
Addresses39.039.7
24
25
26
128
Operating panels
CC220

used.
max. 2.5 m
Panel X61
+12Vout
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
Imax = 800 mA
13
9
AddressA32.0
AddressA32.1
AddressA32.2
AddressA32.3
AddressA32.4
AddressA32.5
AddressA32.6
AddressA32.7
28
10
29
11
30
12
31
Panel X62
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT31
OUT32
23
AddressA33.0
AddressA33.1
AddressA33.2
AddressA33.3
2
3
4
.
.
.
.
AddressA35.6
AddressA35.7
25
CAUTION
OUT1 and OUT2:
OUT3 to OUT32:
129
Operating panels
CC220

A total of 5 potentiometers (1kW) can be connected to X61.
Max. cable length per potentiometer connection = 5m. Use a screened 3core lead
(minimum conductor cross section: 0.14 mm2) for each potentiometer. Avoid open
leads. The connection diagram is as shown:
Panel X61
max. 5 m
AVCC
IN0
AGND
IN1
19
33
1 kOhm
P1
1 kOhm
P2
1 kOhm
P3
1 kOhm
P5
1 kOhm
P6
Analog
handwheel
36
15
35
IN4
IN2
34
16
IN3
Screenvia
metalcover
tohousing
130
Operating panels
CC220
Connection panel MTB1 I/O

Pin
Assignment
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DATA3
DATA2
DATA4
DATA6
SCAN11
SCAN12
SCAN10
SCAN9
OUT1
OUT3
OUT5
OUT7
+12VOUT
SCAN5
IN1
IN3
24VOK
MTB1on
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
AVCC
DATA1
DATA0
DATA5
DATA7
SCAN13
SCAN14
SCAN15
SCAN8
OUT2
OUT4
OUT6
OUT8
PGND
IN0
IN2
IN4
AGND
37

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Assignment
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
OUT17
OUT18
OUT19
OUT20
OUT21
131
Pin
Assignment
14
15
16
17
18
OUT22
OUT23
OUT24
OUT25
OUT26
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
OUT27
OUT28
OUT29
OUT30
OUT31
PGND
OUT32
Operating panels
CC220

max. 2 m
Screened cable
36 x 0.14
or
25 x 0.14
Cablediameter:
X61=11mm
X62=9,5mm


Screen
Type
Cable
Cable
X61
X62
No.
Length
065 619
065 618
2m
2m
Connection panel ASCII keyboard

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Pin
Assignment
14
15
16
17
18
GND
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
STRB
VCC
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Assignment
GND
VCC
Type
No.
ASCII keyboard
050 461
062 521
132
Connection cable
Length
1.5 m
1.5 m
Operating panels
CC220
Specifications
Ambient temperature
+ 5C to + 55C
Storage temperature
25C to + 70C
Air humidity
Humidity class F to DIN 40040
Mechanical strength
Air pressure
to IEC 6826/IEC 68227

Protection standard to DIN 40050 Front panel IP 54, otherwise IP 20

Power supply
Fuse F1
24 V=
M4A
Screen diagonal
Screen resolution
12"
27 lines, 64 characters
512 x 384 pixels
20.6 kHz
50 Hz
conforms to Xray regulations
(BGBI. I S. 114) dated 8. Jan. 87
5, section (2)

Xray radiation
133
Operating panels
14" special colour panel
1.3.3
CC220
14" special colour panel (colour PL114"2F)

Type
No.
Colour panel colour PL114"2F
071 339
Both the CNC and an external PC may be operated using this panel. The panel can
be set to either NC mode" (A35.7=LOW) or to PC mode" (A35.7=HIGH) by
switching over the NC/PLC output signal. Address for word coupling = A251.7.
If NC mode is selected, the panel behaves as a standard colour panel and is active
exclusively as an NC panel.
An MF2 keyboard is used in NC mode instead of the NC ASCII keyboard so far
used. It is no longer possible then to connect an additional NC ASCII keyboard to
X71.
If PC mode is active, the panel conveys data from the MF2 keyboard to the PC or
from the PC to the keyboard. The VGA video signals of the PC are displayed on the
panel.
Transmission of MTB1 data between the panel and the logic section of the CNC is
not affected by the NC/PC changeover.
Starting/stopping sequence for CNC and PC

A keyboard test, amongst other things, is performed by PC systems during system
startup. If the PC does not recognise a keyboard during this test, further procedure
is dependent on the relevant PCBIOS. Some of the systems continue the startup
without initialisation of the keyboard; others stop the test program at this point and
require a keyboard input. The startup is continued only when a keyboard is con
nected and a key is pressed.
If a PC startup is performed with keyboard initialisation, the following points must
be taken into account when switching on:
The PC may only be switched on when the NC and panel startup in NC mode are
complete. This is ensured when the signal CCMZA1 is output to the NC digital inter
face for the first time.
1. Switch on CNC and panel and perform initialisation (selftest)
2. Switch panel to PC mode
3. Switch on PC
Similarly, a certain sequence must be observed when switching off:
1. Switch off PC
2. Switch off CNC and panel
CAUTION
If the switchingon sequence is not observed, the PC cannot initialise the keyboard
correctly. This can lead to malfunctioning between the PC and the keyboard!
If the switchingoff sequence is not observed, it is possible that the PC may recogn
ise an unwanted keyboard input or a keyboard error!
134
Operating panels
CC220

Several extensions are available in addition to the interfaces provided on the 14"
standard colour panel:
X11:
X12:
X23:
X31:
X32:
X33:
Video out connection for colour panel multifrequency monitor

currently unused
VGA IN connection for VGA video interface of PC
currently unused
MF2KB connection of MF2 keyboard
PCKB connection of MF2 keyboard interface of PC
CAUTION
Refer to the safety information regarding interfaces in the chapter Safety notes" at
the front of this manual!
Connection cable
Brightness po
tentiometer
(max.25m)
RGB cable
X22
X21
14" special
colour panel
(max.25m)
CP/MEM5
X33
Keyboard cable
X23
(max.25m)
VGA cable
(max.25m)
PC
Mains connection
230 VAC
X32
max.1,5m
cablelength
X61
X31 X12
X71
X62
max.2m
cablelength
ASCIIkeyboard
MF2keyboard
(onlyifnoPCandnoMF2
keyboardareused)
MTB1I/O
6424V_inputs
3224V_/0.1Aoutputs
Connectionfor
Potentiometers:
3 x absolute
1 x incremental
1digitalhandwheel
ary.
CAUTION
Interface plugs may only be connected or removed when all units are switched off!
135
Operating panels
CC220
Interface section of the colour panel
PCKB
DIN connector X33, 5 pin
Fuse (M 4 A)
LED, green
MF2KB
DIN socket X32, 5 pin
DATA PNL2
currently unused
ASCII keyboard
VIDEO OUT PNL2

HD socket X12, 15 pin
currently unused
MTB1 I/O
VIDEO OUT
Adjust VGA
MTB1 I/O
VGA IN
Adjust NC
CP/MEM4
Connector X21, RGB interface
subD, 15 pin
CP/MEM5
Connector X22, subD, 20 pin
incl. BNC socket (CSYNC)
Colour panel rear view

Fuse (M 4 A)
Fuse to protect the 24 V_/ input voltage to X22.
CAUTION
LED
The green LED indicates that the internal voltage is present.
ADJUST NC / ADJUST VGA
Using these two potentiometers, the video signal input levels from the NC and the
VGA may be adjusted in such a way that the brightness of both displays is equal.
136
Operating panels
CC220
Panel CP/MEM5
The panel is connected to the CP/MEM5 by means of the cables X21 and X22.
Cable X22 contains the leads for the 24V supply voltage for the panel, analog sig
nals (potentiometers) and keyboard signals. The video sync signal is transmitted
down an internal coax lead. RGB video signals are carried by cable X21.
Connector X22
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
A1
AVCC
AGND
VREF
IN3
IN1
IN4
RESERVE1
RESERVE2
GND(PHGinterface)
+12VP(CPinterface)
AGND
+24V
PGND
IN2
IN0
PGND
+12V(PHGinterface)
TX+
RX+
RS+
CSYNC
Connector X21
Video interface for transmission of RGB video signals and colour monitor identifica
tion. Cable assignment:
SocketX21
Pin
ConnectorX21
Pin
Core colour
Signal
8
15
8
15
red
Screen(red)
Red
Groundred
14
7
14
7
gn
Screen(gn)
Green
Groundgn
6
13
6
13
blue
Screen(bl)
Blue
Groundbl
5
12
black
Bridge
Coreno.7
4
11
black
Bridge
Coreno.8
137
Operating panels
CC220
Special socket, subD, 20pin

to panel
Special connector, subD, 20pin

to CP/MEM5
max. 25 m
Screened cable
2 x 8 x 0.14
1 x 4 x 0.31
Cablediameter:
11+/0,5mm
Bending radius:
single: 55 mm
multiple: 110 mm
Screen
Connection cable X22 panel CP/MEM5
Type
No.
Length
048 028
052 265
048 029
048 668
065 617
2.5
5
10
20
25
Special socket, subD, 15pin

to panel
m
m
m
m
m
Special connector, subD, 15pin

to CP/MEM5
max. 25 m
Screened cable
Cablediameter:
9,1+/0,5mm

Connection cable X21 panel CP/MEM5
Type
No.
Length
RGB cable X21
065 620
065 621
065 622
065 623
065 624
2.5 m
5m
10 m
20 m
25 m
138
Screen
Operating panels
CC220
Up to 64 switching elements (make/break contact elements and pushbuttons) can be
connected to panel interface X61. Pushbuttons and switches must be suited to a
switched current of approx. 2 mA and a switching voltage of 9 V (gold contacts).
used.
CAUTION

max. 2.5 m
Panel X61
Data0
Data1
Data2
Data3
Data4
Data5
Data6
Data7

AddressE32.0
AddressE32.1
AddressE32.2
AddressE32.3
AddressE32.4
AddressE32.5
AddressE32.6
AddressE32.7
21
20
2
1
3
22
4
23
ByteE33
ByteE34
Scan8
Scan9
Scan10
Scan11
Scan12
Scan13
Scan14
Scan15
27
8
7
5
6
Addresses35.035.7
Addresses36.036.7
Addresses37.037.7
Addresses38.038.7
Addresses39.039.7
24
25
26
139
Operating panels
CC220

used.
Note
The panel can be set to either NC mode" (A35.7=LOW) or to PC mode"
(A35.7=HIGH) by switching over the NC/PLC output signal A35.7 (OUT32).

max. 2.5 m
Imax = 800 mA
Panel X61
+12Vout
13
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
9
28
10
Rv
29
11
Rv
30
12
31
Rv
Rv
Rv
Rv
Rv
Rv
Rv
23
Rv
25
Rv
Rv
AddressA32.0
AddressA32.1
AddressA32.2
AddressA32.3
AddressA32.4
AddressA32.5
AddressA32.6
AddressA32.7
Panel X62
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
.
.
OUT31
OUT32
CAUTION
OUT1 and OUT2:
OUT3 to OUT32:
Calculation of Rv
12VUF
Rv =
500 W
IF
UF = LED conductingstate voltage
IF = LED conductingstate current
140
AddressA33.0
AddressA33.1
AddressA33.2
AddressA33.3
.
.
AddressA35.6
AddressA35.7
Operating panels
CC220

A total of 5 potentiometers (1 kW) can be connected to X61.
Max. cable length per potentiometer connection = 5 m. Use a screened 3core
lead (minimum conductor cross section: 0.14 mm2) for each potentiometer. Avoid
open leads. The connection diagram is as shown:
Panel X61
max. 5 m
AVCC
IN0
AGND
IN1
19
33
1 kOhm
P1
1 kOhm
P2
1 kOhm
P3
1 kOhm
P5
1 kOhm
P6
Analog
handwheel
36
15
35
IN4
IN2
34
16
IN3
Screenvia
metalcover
tohousing
141
Operating panels
CC220
Connection panel MTB1 I/O (MTB1 I/O X61 and MTB1 I/O X62)
Pin
Assignment
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DATA3
DATA2
DATA4
DATA6
SCAN11
SCAN12
SCAN10
SCAN9
OUT1
OUT3
OUT5
OUT7
+12VOUT
SCAN5
IN1
IN3
24VOK
MTB1on
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
AVCC
DATA1
DATA0
DATA5
DATA7
SCAN13
SCAN14
SCAN15
SCAN8
OUT2
OUT4
OUT6
OUT8
PGND
IN0
IN2
IN4
AGND
37

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Assignment
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
OUT17
OUT18
OUT19
OUT20
OUT21
142
Pin
Assignment
14
15
16
17
18
OUT22
OUT23
OUT24
OUT25
OUT26
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
OUT27
OUT28
OUT29
OUT30
OUT31
PGND
OUT32
Operating panels
CC220

max. 2 m
Screened cable
36 x 0.14
or
25 x 0.14
Cablediameter:
X61:11mm
X62:9,5mm


Screen
Type
Cable
Cable
X61
X62
143
No.
Length
065 619
065 618
2m
2m
Operating panels
CC220
Connection panel ASCII keyboard (ASCIIKB)

CAUTION
This interface may only be used when no PC and MF2 keyboard are in operation!
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Pin
Assignment
14
15
16
17
18
GND
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
STRB
VCC
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Assignment
GND
VCC
Type
No.
ASCII keyboard
050 461
062 521
144
Connection cable
Length
1.5 m
1.5 m
Operating panels
CC220
Connection panel MF2 keyboard (MF2KB)

Socket X32, DIN, 5 pin
Connection is by means of a 5 pin DIN socket.
Interfaces are operated synchronously in series. All signal leads have TTL level.
Data outputs are connected as opendrain. Idle state of CLOCK and DATA signal
leads: HIGH.
CAUTION
A German MF2 keyboard with 102 keys and SCANSet2 must be used to oper
ate the CNC!
The IBMMF2 compatible Cherry keyboard G801800 HAD is recommended as the
input keyboard.
Using a different keyboard can lead to transmission problems which result in key
board entries being unrecognised.
If this occurs, the PC and the panel must be reset.Interface X32 may then be used
only if no NC ASCII keyboard is connected to X71!
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
Assignment
KEYBOARDCLOCK
KEYBOARDDATA
KEYBOARDGROUND
KEYBOARD5V
Note
In NC mode, CNCspecific functions on the MF2 keyboard (group operating
modes, softkeys, etc.) are assigned to different keys from the NC ASCII keyboard!
Operating manuals prod. no. 4181 (CC220/320M) and prod. no. 4243 (CC220T)
contain the relevant keyboard assignment diagrams.
In PC mode, keyboard signals from and to the connected PC (on interface PCKB,
X33) are transmitted 1:1.
Connection panel PC keyboard interface (PCKB)

Connector X33, DIN, 5 pin
Connection to the PC keyboard interface is by means of a 5 pin DIN plug. Cable
length to PC: max. 25 m
Assignment, connector X33
Pin
Ordering information:
Assignment
1
2
3
4
PC
PC
PC
PC
Type
No.
Cable MF2 X33
916 834
145
Connection cable
Length
6m
Operating panels
CC220
Connection panel multifrequency monitor (VIDEO OUT)

Socket X11, HD, 15 pin
All signals for connecting the multifrequency monitor are available at X11. BL1_OUT
(blue) are in the range 0 to 0.7 V. The level 0 V corresponds to a dark display.
Synchronisation signals have TTL level with frequencies
HSYNC:
20.6 kHz to 31.5 kHz
VSYNC:
50 Hz to 70 Hz.
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Assignment
RD1_OUT
GN1_OUT
BL1_OUT
RD1_OUT_SH
GN1_OUT_SH
BL1_OUT_SH
Pin
Assignment
9
10
11
12
13
V_GND1
V_GND1
HSYNC1
14
15
VSYNC1
Connection panel PCVGA interface (VGA IN)

Socket X23, HD, 15 pin
The interface recieves the VGA video signals of the connected PC (cable length to
PC: max. 25 m only with special cable)
Analog signals with levels between 0 and 0.7 V are permissible for colour signal
inputs RED_VGA, GRN_VGA and BLUE_VGA. For synchronisation signals, TTL le
vels with frequencies
HSYNC
31.5 kHz and
VSYNC
50 Hz to 70 Hz are permissible.
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Assignment
RED_VGA
GRN_VGA
BLUE_VGA
RED_VGA_SH
GRN_VGA_SH
BLUE_VGA_SH
Pin
Assignment
9
10
11
12
13
V_GND3
V_GND3
HSYNC_VGA
14
15
VSYNC_VGA
Note
The potentiometers ADJUST NC and ADJUST VGA may be used to adjust the CNC
and VGA video levels to the same brightness.
146
Operating panels
CC220

with integrated fuse: 1 x T 4 A
PEterminal
Ventilationinlets
Rear view colour panel (interface strip with power supply connection only)
230 VAC power supply input (nonheating unit socket with integrated fuse holders).
Fuses: 1 x T 4 A
CAUTION
Only use the fuse type recommended. Jumpering the fuses is not permitted.
The operating panel must always be switched on together with the control (logic
section)!
Remove mains plug before opening the panel casing!
The 14" colour panel is equipped with an automatic ventilation unit within the cas
ing. The ventilation unit switches on automatically if the ambient temperature within
the casing reaches approx. 48C.
Danger of injury!
Never place your hands inside the fan impeller in case it switches on suddenly. Do
not place any objects in the fan impeller!
Specifications
Ambient temperature
+5C to +50C
Storage temperature
Humidity class
25C to +70C
Class F to DIN 40040
The surrounding air must be free from high levels of dust,
acid, caustics, corrosive agents, salts, metallic vapours
and other conductive impurities.
to IEC 6826/IEC 68227
Front panel IP 54, otherwise IP 20
230 V AC; +6% / 15%
Mechanical strength
Air pressure
Protection standard to DIN 40050
Power supply
Power circuit breaker (integrated in nonheating unit socket) 1 x T 4 A

Frequency
50 / 60 Hz +
1%
Power input
max. 80 W
Screen diagonal
Xray radiation
14"
20.6 31.5 kHz
50 70 Hz
conforms to Xray regulations (BGBI. I S. 114)
dated 8. Jan. 87 5, section (2)
147
Operating panels
CC220
Multifrequency monitor
The monitor
can store and recognise up to 13 different screen formats.
processes analog RGB signals in line frequency range 15 to 36 kHz; 45 to 120

display images per second can be output, according to the number of lines.
is capable of displaying alphanumeric characters and graphics in colour.
can be synchronised to green, separate CSYNC, or H and VSYNC via

CSYNC.
is designed for use in the northern hemisphere

(if used south of the equator, colour purity and convergence errors can arise
which are outside of the specified values).
Use of the unit

The unit may be used only for the transmission of analog RGB signals from video
sources with max. 1.0 V video signal at 75 W.
CAUTION
Do not open the unit
Certain components within the unit carry high voltage!
Touching these components is highly dangerous.
Use a mains cable in good condition
A damaged mains cable can cause fire or electrocution.
Only touch the connector when connecting or removing the mains cable.
Ensure sufficient heat dissipation
The ventilation outlets fitted on the unit must not be obscured.
Ensure sufficient air circulation.
Do not place any objects in the unit
Objects placed in the unit can cause damage to the unit or personal injury.
Do not place any objects on top of the unit
Any fluids entering the unit can cause fire or electrocution.
Avoid unnecessary shaking of the unit
Only use the original packaging when transporting.
Take particular care to protect the picture tubes from jolts or knocks.
148
Operating panels
CC220
Image distortion through magnetic interference fields

Sufficient distance from magnetic interference field generators (e.g. motors, con
tactors) must be ensured when the unit is installed.
Even interferencefield strengths of Hss = 1 A/m can cause image shaking, ge
ometry distortion and/or movement of the display.
If units are installed next to each other, a mutual clearance of at least 30 cm must be
maintained.
When installing or assembling units on steel bases (tables, shelves etc.), note that
magnetisation can in time lead to colour distortion and convergence errors.
The colour purity of the picture tube can be negatively affected by the earths mag
netic field if the unit is turned or tilted when switched on.
As the builtin demagnetisation device is only effective when the unit is switched on
when cold, a delay of approx. 10 minutes should be left between switchons to
allow the demagnetisation to become effective again.
Brightness
Brightness at the site of installation should not exceed 300 lux. Glare suppression is
effective only if the screen surface is free from dust and grease.
Units should be installed in such a way that the screen does not reflect any lights,
shiny surfaces or light wall surfaces.
A display which is adjusted too light reduces the service life of the picture tube.
CAUTION
The unit may be operated only on earthed power supplies or mains connectors
with PE conductors and only when properly installed.
Operation on IT systems, i.e. systems without earthed conductors is not permitted.
Storing picture setting data

Note
These units are equipped with multistandard monitors capable of storing picture
setting data from a maximum of 13 video sources. Once stored, the image belong
ing to the video source appears on the screen always in the right size and position.
Apply video signal and switch on the unit.
The position, size and geometry of the display can be adjusted and stored
using the builtin rotary switch and the +/ store keys.
The rotary switch and the keys are situated on the backplane beneath a small
cover.
If all adjustments are carried out, they can be transferred to the EEPROM of
the monitor by pressing the store key.
The store key must be held down until the builtin red LED lights up and goes
out again.
This indicates that storage has been completed successfully.
149
Operating panels
Rotary switch pos. 1

0
CC220
Picture height
The required picture height may be ad

justed by using the +/ keys alternately.
Picture width
The required picture width may be ad

Vertical hold
The required vertical hold may be ad

Horizontal hold
The required horizontal hold may be ad

4
Pincushion distortion
The required pincushion distortion may

be adjusted by using the +/ keys alter
nately.
5
Settings 1 5 may be carried out in any sequence and as often as desired.
Note
When storing, the rotary switch must be set to one of the positions 15.
If the rotary switch is set to position 0, storing will not be carried out.
When storing is completed, the rotary switch should be returned to position 0
(operation" setting).
The +/ and store keys then have no function; the red LED shines con
stantly.
150
CC220
MTB1I/O
1.4
Extended modules
1.4.1
MTB1 I/O
The MTB1 I/O is an extended module for connection to the 12" or 14" panel. It trans
mits signals between the machine panel and the PLC, and is connected to the 12"
or 14" panel by means of two 2 m long cables.
CAUTION
Timecritical signals (e.g. Mstrobe) must not be passed across the MTB1 I/O.
All inputs that are signalled via the MTB1 I/O to the PLC must be present for
at least 2 PLC cycles.
The inputs/outputs of the MTB1 I/O may only be used for the machine panel
(pushbuttons and indicator lights).
Absolute potentiometers
MTB1 I/O 24V/0.1A

Panel port
32 outputs
X14
X13
X12
X11
X62
Digital handwheel
X61
X71
X73
Fuse F1
(6.3 A)
X28
X27
X26
X25
X24
X23
64 inputs
X22
X21
X72
Incremental
potentiometers
LED for
supply
voltage
X10
PE conductor
connection
Supply
voltage
The MTB1 I/O offers the following connections:

64 inputs (24 V=) for pushbuttons and switches (X21X28)
32 outputs (24 V=, max. 100 mA) for indicators and controls (X11X14)
Three connections for absolute potentiometers (feed / rapid / spindle correc

tion) (X71)
Two connections for incremental potentiometers. (one of these for an analog

handwheel (X72))
One connection for digital handwheel (X73)
Two panel connections (X61 / X62)
One supply voltage connection (X10)

The MTB1 I/O requires a 24 V supply voltage (+20% / 15%) loaded to 4 A max.
(supplied from external load power supply module).
Note
All input and output leads and the potentiometers are connected by means of print
plugin terminals MSTB1.5 to the MTB1 I/O.
151
CC220
MTB1I/O
Connection to panel
The MTB1 I/O is linked to the panel via 2 cables.
Port X61 (connection to panel)
Connector, subD, 37 pin
Pin
Assignment
Pin
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DATA3
DATA2
DATA4
DATA6
SCAN11
SCAN12
SCAN10
SCAN9
OUT1
OUT3
OUT5
OUT7
+12VOUT
SCAN5
IN1
IN3
24VOK
MTB1I/O
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
AVCC
DATA1
DATA0
DATA5
DATA7
SCAN13
SCAN14
SCAN15
SCAN8
OUT2
OUT4
OUT6
OUT8
PGND
IN0
IN2
IN4
AGND
37
Type
Cable
Cable
X61
X62
No.
Length
065 619
065 618
2m
2m
Port X62 (connection to panel)

Connector, subD, 25 pin
System connection with TTL level between panel and MTB1 I/O.
This interface is used to transmit switching information between the machine panel
and the PLC.
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Assignment
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
OUT17
OUT18
OUT19
OUT20
OUT21
152
Pin
Assignment
14
15
16
17
18
OUT22
OUT23
OUT24
OUT25
OUT26
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
OUT27
OUT28
OUT29
OUT30
OUT31
PGND
OUT32
CC220
MTB1I/O
Power supply
Supply voltage input (Port X10)
Supply 24 V=, +20%/15%; at the 4 pin plugin terminal X10. The supply voltage
must be provided by the load power supply module (see section Electrical con
nections"). IIN: max. 4 A.
The input is protected against polarity reversal. Fuse F1 trips out if the 24 V supply is
connected with reversed polarity.
CAUTION
Only use the recommended type of fuse. Jumpering the fuse is not permitted.
X10
0V
0V
24V =
6.3A
24V =
l in =max.4A
Voltagesupply
fromloadpowersupplymodule
F1
CAUTION
All inputs are signalled as LOW if the supply voltage fails.
Power failures <50 ms are not recognised.
Type
No.
Input/output module MTB1 I/O

(64 inputs/32 outputs)
063 551
153
CC220
MTB1I/O
Inputs
64 inputs (Ports X21X28)
8x8 inputs for the connection of pushbuttons or switches in the machine panel, for
example (8 plugin terminals, each 8 pin). The inputs are isolated from the control
logic by octocouplers.
Open inputs are recognised as logical LOW.
The bounce time of the contacts must be < 32 ms.
Input voltage range:
LOW
HIGH
3 V to +5 V
+17 V to +32 V
Rated input current:

IIN approx. 6 mA
Input signals are encoded by the MTB1 I/O and transmitted via the panel to the
CNC. Evaluation by the PLC is then possible.
CAUTION
All inputs relayed to the PLC via the MTB1 I/O must be present for at least 2 PLC
cycles before they can be interpreted by the PLC as HIGH or LOW signals.
The input and output signals may only be used for the machine panel (pushbuttons
and indicator lights)!
The MTB1 I/O inputs and the PLC addresses are assigned as follows:
Address
Word coupl.
Address
Bit coupl.
MTB1 I/O inputs
A208.0
A208.1
A208.2
A208.3
A208.4
A208.5
A208.6
A208.7
E32.0
E32.1
E32.2
E32.3
E32.4
E32.5
E32.6
E32.7
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A209.0
A209.1
A209.2
A209.3
A209.4
A209.5
A209.6
A209.7
E33.0
E33.1
E33.2
E33.3
E33.4
E33.5
E33.6
E33.7
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A210.0
A210.1
A210.2
A210.3
A210.4
A210.5
A210.6
A210.7
E34.0
E34.1
E34.2
E34.3
E34.4
E34.5
E34.6
E34.7
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
X23,
X23,
X23,
X23,
X23,
X23,
X23,
X23,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
154
Remarks
CC220
MTB1I/O
Address
Word coupl.
Address
Bit coupl.
MTB1 I/O inputs
A211.0
A211.1
A211.2
A211.3
A211.4
A211.5
A211.6
A211.7
E35.0
E35.1
E35.2
E35.3
E35.4
E35.5
E35.6
E35.7
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
X24,
X24,
X24,
X24,
X24,
X24,
X24,
X24,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A212.0
A212.1
A212.2
A212.3
A212.4
A212.5
A212.6
A212.7
E36.0
E36.1
E36.2
E36.3
E36.4
E36.5
E36.6
E36.7
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
X25,
X25,
X25,
X25,
X25,
X25,
X25,
X25,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A213.0
A213.1
A213.2
A213.3
A213.4
A213.5
A213.6
A213.7
E37.0
E37.1
E37.2
E37.3
E37.4
E37.5
E37.6
E37.7
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
X26,
X26,
X26,
X26,
X26,
X26,
X26,
X26,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A214.0
A214.1
A214.2
A214.3
A214.4
A214.5
A214.6
A214.7
E38.0
E38.1
E38.2
E38.3
E38.4
E38.5
E38.6
E38.7
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
X27,
X27,
X27,
X27,
X27,
X27,
X27,
X27,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A215.0
A215.1
A215.2
A215.3
A215.4
A215.5
A215.6
A215.7
E39.0
E39.1
E39.2
E39.3
E39.4
E39.5
E39.6
E39.7
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
X28,
X28,
X28,
X28,
X28,
X28,
X28,
X28,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
155
Remarks
CC220
MTB1I/O
Outputs
32 outputs (Ports X11X14)
4 x 8 outputs for indicators and controls on the machine panel
(4 plugin terminals, each 8 pin). By limiting the current to 250 mA, a voltage of 24V
is present at the outputs; this makes the system short circuitproof.
If the output drive is heated illegally while limiting the current, it is switched off by a
circuitbreaker. The output drive switches back on automatically after cooling
down.
Permissible load in permanent operation:
100 mA.
Internal power failure at IOUT=100 mA:
approx. 2 V.
Status information for the following PLC output signals are passed to the MTB1 I/O
via the operating panel:
Address
Word coupl.
Address
Bit coupl.
MTB1 I/O outputs
A248.0
A248.1
A248.2
A248.3
A248.4
A248.5
A248.6
A248.7
A32.0
A32.1
A32.2
A32.3
A32.4
A32.5
A32.6
A32.7
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A249.0
A249.1
A249.2
A249.3
A249.4
A249.5
A249.6
A249.7
A33.0
A33.1
A33.2
A33.3
A33.4
A33.5
A33.6
A33.7
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
X12,
X12,
X12,
X12,
X12,
X12,
X12,
X12,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A250.0
A250.1
A250.2
A250.3
A250.4
A250.5
A250.6
A250.7
A34.0
A34.1
A34.2
A34.3
A34.4
A34.5
A34.6
A34.7
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
X13,
X13,
X13,
X13,
X13,
X13,
X13,
X13,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A251.0
A251.1
A251.2
A251.3
A251.4
A251.5
A251.6
A251.7
A35.0
A35.1
A35.2
A35.3
A35.4
A35.5
A35.6
A35.7
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
X14,
X14,
X14,
X14,
X14,
X14,
X14,
X14,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
156
Remarks
CC220
MTB1I/O
Potentiometers
Max. cable length per potentiometer connection = 5 m. Use a screened 3core lead for each potentiometer.
Avoid open leads. Potentiometers can be connected directly to X61 (panel) as well. The diagram shows the con
nections directly to X61 and to X71/X72.
Panel
MTB1 I/O
X61
X71
AVCC
IN0
AGND
max. 5 m
19
33
36
1 kOhm
P1
1 kOhm
P2
1 kOhm
P3
1 kOhm
P5
1 kOhm
P6
Analog
handwheel
3
IN1
15
4
5
6
35
IN4
Screenviataperpin
tohousing
X72
IN2
34
0
1
2
3
16
IN3
Screenvia
metalcover
tohousing
Screenviataperpin
tohousing

Connection diagram for potentiometers; connections X71/X72 (MTB1 I/O) and directly to X61 (panel)
Connection X71; P1, P2, P3 (potentiometer interface absolute)

Connection of three potentiometers (1 kW) for rapid, feed and spindle correction.
Potentiometer inputs are evaluated absolutely, i.e. the correcting quantity is deter
mined by the resistance value (potentiometer setting).
Analog handwheel
Connection X72; P4 and P5 (potentiometer interface incremental)
Connection for two endless potentiometers (1 kW). Potentiometer inputs are evalu
ated incrementally, i.e. changes in resistance determine the correcting quantity
(potentiometer turning speed). Pins 3, 4 and 5 are provided for the connection of an
analog handwheel (endless potentiometer).
157
CC220
MTB1I/O
Digital handwheel
Connection X73
The digital handwheel (see also section Handwheels") facilitates the positioning
of synchronous and asynchronous axes as an alternative to Jog mode (exceptions
being spindle axes and ANALOG axes). Connect at X73 of the MTB1 I/O or at a
measuring system input of the SERVO i (for connection assignment see chapte
SERVO i", for parameterisation see manual Machine parameters", set 9500).
Input for digital handwheel technical data:
Supply voltage
5V
Input signals
A, A, B, B
Input circuit
Differential line receiver

Ri = 180 Ohm; minimum voltage
difference between the differential
inputs 600 mV
Pulse multiplication
Quadrupling of input frequency
Max. current input of

digital handwheel
200 mA
Max. input frequency
7 kHz
Min. slope interval between

counter pulses
>200 ns
Min. slope interval at

reversal
>0 ns
Max. cable length for

2.5 m (conductor cross section min. 0.14 mm2)
supply voltage 5 V
max. 2.5m
MTB1 I/O, X73
Digital handwheel
0V
5V
6
7
6
7
5
A
Shield bonding by means of metallic

casing of subD plug connector
Digital handwheel, connection diagram
Specifications MTB 1 I/O

Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
Air humidity
Moisture condensation not permitted
Protection standard to DIN 40050
Mounting position (casing)
+5C to +55C
25C to +70C
Air humidity class F to DIN 40040
IP20
optional
158
Systemconfiguration
ASCIIkeyboard/handwheel
1.4.2
CC220
Handwheels
The handwheels (analog or digital) are active in Jog mode (toolsetting). The digital
handwheel is effective for synchronous machining axes as well as asynchronous
auxiliary axes (exception: spindle axes or ANALOG axes). Only one handwheel
may be connected!
Connection of analog handwheel: to X72 (MTB1 I/O) or X61 (panel)
Connection of digital handwheel:
to SERVO i measuring system input (X1116)
or to X73 (MTB1 I/O)
a
50
Digital handwheel
Analog handwheel
Type
No.
Analog handwheel (1 kOhm, linear):

Special cable for analog handwheel (max. 30 m):
Digital handwheel (100 pulses/rev.):
Special cable for digital handwheel:
1.4.3
038 341
904 696
069 167
070/908 558
ASCII keyboard
When programming direct at the machine or using the CC220 as a programming
unit, we recommend the ASCII keyboard for fast data entry. In addition to the usual
keys there are also keys for the group operating modes and function keys for the
softkeys. A dropdown drawer is available for spacesaving installation at the ma
chine.
The ASCII keyboard is connected to the X71 interface at the panel. Data may still be
input directly at the panel.
Type
No.
ASCII keyboard:
Drawer for ASCII keyboard:
050 461
050 910
F1
ESC
!
1
CAP
SHIFT
S
Y
F3
$
4
Q W
CTR
TAB
F2
"
2
D
X
F4
%
5
&
6
T
H J
F
C
SPACE
159
F5
(
8
/
7
+/
)
9
M <, >
.
*: =
_
P
+
;
LF
@
RET
DEL
?
/
SHIFT
Systemconfiguration
DNCinterfaces
1.4.4
CC220
DNC interfaces
There are two ways to couple an external computer to the CC 220 via a DNC inter
face:
using the plugin module SCP2 (with LSV2DNC) or
using the extended module V24/20mA (with EDNC and LSV2DNC).
While the SCP is designed as an intelligent plugin module for the card rack, the
extended module V24/20 mA is a plugin module which can be plugged onto the
plugin modules E/A 24/0.2, NCPLCBit, NCPLCWord3 (word coupler 3) or
PCI/OS.
CAUTION
The module contains components which can be destroyed by static discharges!
For this reason, ensure equipotential bonding before touching the module or com
ponents on the module!
The functions of EDNC and LSV2DNC is described in the manuals
DNC interface with simple protocol", prod. no. 4019 and
DNC interface with LSV2 protocol", prod. no. 4140.
The SCP connection assignment may be found in the chapter Plugin mod
ules", section SCP2".
Extended module V24/20 mA (Order no. 056 737)

The V24/20mA interface connection may be found on the front panel of the plugin
modules E/A 24/0.2, NCPLCBit, PCI/OS or NCPLCWord3. The interface con
nection is indicated with X31 (socket, subD, 25 pin).
Both interface variants (V24 and 20 mA) are wired on the socket.
The V24 interface transmits data in the same way as the 20 mA interface. The para
meterisation of the interface (baud rate, stop bits etc.) is implemented via machine
parameter set 8500 DNC interface with simple protocol" or 8600 DNC interface
with LSV2 protocol".
Please refer to the manual Machine parameters".
V24 interface
Level:
HIGH:
LOW:
Transmission rate:
Handshake (EDNC):
+3 V to +9 V
3 V to 9 V
max. 19200 baud with handshake.
Software or hardware handshake possible; adjustable
via machine parameter P 8503.
Handshake (LSV2DNC): via LSV2 protocol
Cable length:
max. 15 m
Cable type:
screened cable, conductor cross section min. 0.14 mm2.
The following interface circuits are used on the CNC side:

TX
Transmit data, CNC outgoing line.
RX
Receive data, CNC reception line.
DTR
Data Terminal Ready, HIGH signal indicates to the connected
machine that the CNC is ready to receive (corresponds to RTS signal
in standard computers).
160
Systemconfiguration
DNCinterfaces
DSR
CC220
Data Set Ready, HIGH signal indicates to the CNC that the
connected machine can accept data (corresponds to CTS
signal in standard computers).
Signal Ground.
contact to CNC casing via subD plug connector metallic casing.
GND
Screen
In the case of LSV2DNC and EDNC, the DTR signal remains permanently set after
DNC operation is activated for the first time. With LSV2DNC, DSR is not evaluated
(LSV2DNC uses no hardware handshake).
The CNC does not evaluate the CTS status circuit! The RTS is set permanently to
HIGH level on the CNC side!
Further information on status signals (DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS) and their applica
tion may be found in the section General information on status signals"!
CNC
SocketX31
SubD,25pin
<15m
Plug
Plug
TX
Data
RX
Data
DTR 20
Status
DSR
Status
GND
HOSTcomputer
socket
SubD,25pin
3 RX
2 TX
5 CTS
4 RTS
7 GND
Screentobody
1 Screen
Use metal covers!
V24connectionbetweenCNCandHOSTcomputer(SubD25pin)
CNC
socketX31
SubD25pin
<15m
Plug
Socket
TX
Data
RX
Data
DTR 20
Status
DSR
Status
GND
HOScomputer
Plug
SubD9pin
2 RX
3 TX
8 CTS
7 RTS
5 GND
Screentobody
Screentobody
Use metal covers!
V24connectionbetweenCNCandHOSTcomputer(SubD9pin)
CAUTION
Refer to the safety information regarding interfaces in the chapter Safety

notes" at the front of this manual!
IMPORTANT
The handshake for the extended module V24/20mA can be selected via ma
chine parameter P 8503 (for EDNC). The softkey SOFTWARE CONTROL has
no relevance for the extended module V24/20 mA.
If a connected device does not support hardware handshake, DTR must be
161
Systemconfiguration
DNCinterfaces
CC220
bridged with DSR on the CNC side.

Similarly, if software handshake is used, DTR must be bridged with DSR on
the CNC. In this case, the status leads to the external device must not be
wired. At times it may be necessary to bridge RTS with CTS and DTR with
DSR on the external device.
At baud rates < 600 baud, no hardware handshake signals are evaluated
on the CNC side.
To ensure reliable data transmission, the cable length for a V24 interface con
nection must not exceed 15 m. Either suitable repeaters or the 20 mA inter
face must be used if these lengths need to be exceeded.
It is possible to limit the max. transmission rate to values <9600 baud if
special line drivers or repeaters are used. Please refer to corresponding
technical data. Only use line drivers or repeaters with metal casing (only
then is the continuity of the cable screening from the CNC to the external de
vice ensured).
20 mA interface (current loop)

Level
HIGH:
LOW:
Transmission rate:
Max. external voltage drop:
(switched as 20 mA active)
Voltage drop in control unit:
(switched as 20 mA passive)
Power supply of
the driving device:
Handshake (EDNC):
Handshake (LSV2DNC):
Cable length (CNC active):
Cable length (CNC passive):
Cable type:
approx. 20 mA (min. 12 mA)

approx. 0 mA (max. 3 mA)
3.5 V
max. 3.5 V
max. 12 V
Software or hardware handshake
possible; adjustable via machine
parameter P 8503.
via LSV2 protocol
max. 100 m
max. 50 m
screened cable
Conductor cross section min. 0.14 mm2.

TX+, TX
RX+, RX
DTR+, DTR Data Terminal Ready, HIGH signal indicates to the connected ma
chine that the CNC is ready to receive (corresponds to RTS signal
DSR+, DSR Data Set Ready, HIGH signal indicates to the CNC that the
connected machine can accept data (corresponds to CTS signal
GND
Signal Ground.
Screen
by means of metallic casing of subD plug connector
Contact to CNC casing.
162
Systemconfiguration
DNCinterfaces
CC220
In the case of LSV2DNC and EDNC, the DTR signal remains permanently set after
DNC operation is activated for the first time. With LSV2DNC, DSR is not evaluated
(LSV2DNC uses no hardware handshake).
tion may be found in the section General information on status signals"!
CNC
SocketX31
SubD25pin
RX+
22
RX
12
TX+
23
TX
13
<50m
Plug
Plug
DNcomputer
Socket
SubD25pin
TX+
TX
Data
RX+
Data
RX
DTR+
DSR+ 11
Status
DTR
DSR 14
DTR+ 19
DSR+
Status
DSR
DTR 16
Screentobody
Screentobody
Use metal covers!
20 mA passive (power source: interface of connected device)
With the 20 mA connection, one device must be defined as the active device and
the other as the passive (active device acts as source). The 20 mA interface be
comes active if pins 9 and 10 are bridged.
If this bridge is not present, the interface is parameterised as passive.
CNC
SocketX31
SubD25pin
RX+
12
RX
24
TX+
13
TX
<100m
Plug
Plug
Data
TX+
TX
RX+
Data
25
RX
DTR+
DSR+ 14
Status
DSR 18
DTR+ 16
Status
DTR 21
Activein
Activeout
DNcomputer
Socket
SubD25pin
DTR
DSR+
DSR
9
10
Screentobody
Screentobody
Use metal covers!
20mA active (interface of extended module acts as source)
CAUTION

163
Systemconfiguration
DNCinterfaces
CC220
IMPORTANT
The handshake for the extended module V24/20 mA can be selected via ma
chine parameter P 8503 (for EDNC). The softkey SOFTWARE CONTROL has
no relevance for the extended module V24/20 mA.
If software handshake is used, it may be necessary at X31 to bridge pin 14
with 18 (if DNC interface is switched as active) or pin 14 with 18 and pin 11
with 10 (if DNC interface is switched as passive).
on the CNC side.
To ensure reliable data transmission, the cable length for a 20 mA connection

should not exceed 50 or 100 m. The maximum cable length admissible if
CNC is acting as the driving device (20 mA active) is 100 m. This is reduced to
50m if the peripheral interface is acting as the source (CNC: 20 mA passive).
Suitable repeaters must be used if these lengths are exceeded.
vice ensured).
164
Systemconfiguration
DNCinterfaces
CC220
General information on status signals

This section describes the functionality of control signals with standard PC inter
faces as an example (subD, 25 pin and subD, 9 pin). Functions or pin assign
ments which are different for the CNC are described unter the heading Note".
DTR / DSR
The DTR and DSR connections enable standard PCs connected to each other to
recognise whether the other PC is switched on or its interface is active/initialised.
The diagram below shows the connection of two computers connected to each
other via V24 interfaces:
Computer1
Socket
SubD25pin
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
DTR 20
DSR
GND
Computer2
Socket
SubD25pin
<15m
Plug
6
7
Plug
Data
Data
3 RX
2 TX
Status
Status
5 CTS
4 RTS
Status
Status
6 DSR
20 DTR
7 GND
Screentobody
Screentobody
orpin1
V24connectionbetweentwoPCs(SubD25pin>SubD25pin)
Computer1
Socket
SubD25pin
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
DTR 20
DSR
GND
Computer2
Socket
SubD9pin
<15m
Plug
6
7
Plug
Data
Data
2 RX
3 TX
Status
Status
8 CTS
7 RTS
Status
Status
6 DSR
4 DTR
5 GND
Screentobody
Screentobody
orpin1
Computer1
Socket
SubD9pin
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
DTR
DSR
GND
6
5
<15m
Plug
Plug
Computer2
Socket
SubD9pin
Data
Data
2 RX
3 TX
Status
Status
8 CTS
7 RTS
Status
Status
6 DSR
4 DTR
5 GND
Screentobody
Screentobody
165
Systemconfiguration
DNCinterfaces
CC220
For example, computer 1 relays to computer 2 via its DTR connection the informa
tion that its interface is activated. Computer 2 calls up this message via its DSR con
nection and recognises" that a data exchange is possible in principle.
In general, the DTR connection of a computer is activated always after the para
meterisation/initialisation of the interface (baud rate, number of data bits, number
of stop bits, parity etc.). If this does not occur, communication between the two
computers may be lost; e.g. computer 1 does not set its DTR output but computer 2
calls up its DSR input.
In this case, the connections DTR and DSR should be bridged at computer 2.
Note
With the CNC, the connections DTR and DSR are used for the hardware handshake
(see following section RTS/CTS")! The functionality correponds to the RTS or CTS
connections on standard PCs.
If a computer connected to the CNC demands the signals DTR and DSR, the follow
ing connection possibilities arise:
Bridge the connections DTR and DSR at the computer. No leads are required
to the CNC from these connections. Disadvantage: the computer may at
tempt a data transfer even when the CNC is switched off.
or
Connect the DSR connection of the computer with the RTS connection of the
CNC. At the CNC, RTS is set internally to HIGH level permanently.
RTS / CTS, XON / XOFF (Handshake)

During data transmission it must be ensured that the receiver is able to read in and
process the incoming data fast enough, since otherwise information can be lost
during transmission.
For this reason a handshake" between the sender and the receiver is used during
data transmission.
On the one hand, handshake" refers to
the ability on the part of the receiver to indicate to the sender that it is tempor
arily interrupting the data transfer, or is continuing an interrupted data
transfer. On the other hand, it refers to
the ability on the part of the sender to respond correctly to these commands"
of the receiver.
There are generally two conventional handshake variants:
Hardware handshake (RTS/CTS)
Software handshake (XON / XOFF).
Although at least two additional signal leads apart from the data leads TX and RX
(RTS and CTS, or DTR and DSR for the CNC!) are required between stations with
hardware handshake, software handshake is performed by means of additional
control characters to data leads TX and RX (<DC1> and <DC3>; <DC1>=XON,
<DC3>=XOFF).
166
Systemconfiguration
DNCinterfaces
Computer1
Socket
SubD25pin
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
<15m
Plug
DTR 20
DSR
GND
CC220
6
7
Plug
Computer2
Socket
SubD25pin
Data
Data
3 RX
2 TX
Status
Status
5 CTS
4 RTS
Status
Status
6 DSR
20 DTR
7 GND
Screentobody
orpin1
Screentobody
orpin1
Computer1
Socket
SubD25pin
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
<15m
Plug
DTR 20
DSR
GND
6
7
Plug
Computer2
Socket
SubD9pin
Data
Data
2 RX
3 TX
Status
Status
8 CTS
7 RTS
Status
Status
6 DSR
4 DTR
5 GND
Screentobody
Screentobody
orpin1
Computer1
Socket
SubD9pin
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
DTR
DSR
GND
6
5
<15m
Plug
Plug
Computer2
Socket
SubD9pin
Data
Data
2 RX
3 TX
Status
Status
8 CTS
7 RTS
Status
Status
6 DSR
4 DTR
5 GND
Screentobody
Screentobody
For example, computer 1 transmits a file to computer 2. Each time a new character
is read in from computer 2 to the interface (to be more exact, to the UART), com
puter 2 must transfer this individual character to a memory area specially created
for reception (an input buffer, usually in the form of a ring memory). This is per
formed usually by means of an interrupt signal issued by the UART to the main pro
cessor of computer 2 which executes a special, very short program routine for the
transfer.
The higher the transmission rate of the data leads (bits/second or baud), the lesser
the time available to the main processor of computer 2 to process the characters
collected in the input buffer.
In order to prevent further data being read in when the input buffer is full(which
would overwrite existing data), computer 2 deactivates (usually when the input
167
Systemconfiguration
DNCinterfaces
CC220
buffer has a filling factor of 75%) the RTS signal (with hardware handshake), or
transmits the character XOFF" via the data lead TX (with software handshake).
Computer1 subsequently interrupts the data transmission.
Computer 2 can then read out and process the data contained in the input buffer.
When the input buffer is emptied again to approx. 25% of its capacity, computer 2
activates the RTS signal (or sends the character XON" via data line TX), at which
point computer 1 continues the data transmission.
Note
The connections DTR and DSR, and not RTS and CTS, are used at the CNC for the
hardware handshake!
Therefore, the following connections in addition to data leads TX and RX must be
created for coupling to an external computer:
With hardware handshake:
DTR (on CNC) to CTS (on computer)
DSR (on CNC) to RTS (on computer).
Also if necessary:
RTS (on CNC) to DSR (on computer).
With software handshake:
Bridge RTS and CTS on computer
Bridge DTR and DSR on computer.
168
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
1.5
CC220
PLC couplings
The CC 220 is designed basically to operate with a PLC.
Depending on which PLC is used, different types of coupling between CNC and
PLC can be used (bit/word coupling). The type of coupling used also directly af
fects the potential function scope of the whole system.
PLC
Coupling
PIC 250 (internal PLC, integrated on

I/O card or PCI/OS card
in logic section)
CL 300 (external PLC)
PC 600 (external PLC)
PC 600 (external PLC)
Word processing
Bit coupling
no
Bit coupling
Bit coupling
Word coupling
yes
yes
yes
Bit coupling means that the interrogation and setting of individual bits or of a com
plete data word (word processing depends on the PLC used) within a 288 bit PLC
output address area (A0.0A35.7, CNC inputs and MTB1 I/O outputs) and a 320 bit
input address area (E0.0E39.7, CNC outputs and MTB1 I/O inputs) can be per
formed by the PLC. Therefore the PLC can access the CNC digital interface and the
MTB1 I/O for the CNC.
With word coupling communication" between PLC and CNC is not restricted to
the CNC digital interface area and the MTB1 I/O area. CNC and PLC can access a
common data stock" rapidly via the commumication memory (128 kByte dual port
RAM on the NCPLC word coupling card) (in addition to the CNC digital interface
and the MTB1 I/O this includes e.g. CNC system data such as potentiometer and
panel data, value tables, correction and ZS tables, etc.). Word coupling also facili
tates communication between the PLC and a DNC computer (LSV2DNC, trans
parent communication).
Note
Word coupling is possible only between CC 220 M and PC 600!
CAUTION
PLC programming must only be carried out by qualified personnel.

The applicable safety regulations and standards must be observed for the con
figuration of the PLC adaptation.
Bosch accepts no liability for resultant damage which could have been avoided
through correct configuration of the PLC adaptation!
169
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
1.5.1
CC220
PIC 250 (Order no. 066635)

The PIC 250 is a PLC in the form of an extended card which can be plugged onto the
plugin module I/O 24/0.2" or PCI/OS".
CAUTION
The module contains components which can be destroyed by static discharges!
For this reason, ensure equipotential bonding before touching the module or com
ponents on the module!
PIC 250 Performance features:

512 digital inputs
512 digital outputs
1024 markers
F
F
F
F
F
F
32 timers
8 counters
2k memory (4k and 8k optional)
The active PIC 250 program is stored in the EEPROM of the PIC 250 and can be
programmed and edited from the CNC operating panel. Alternatively the Bosch
programming units PG4 or PG5 can be used for programming purposes. The full
PIC functions are described in a separate manual.
If using the I/O 24/0.2:
64 inputs (24 VDC) and 40 outputs (24 V/0.2 A) are available for adaptation of ma
chine and PLC. When using the MTB1 I/O module the number of inputs increases
by a further 64 and the outputs by 32 (for a description of the MTB1 I/O see section
MTB1 I/O").
There is also a socket for a second I/O 24/0.2" without PIC. This can increase the
number of inputs and outputs for machine signals from 64 to 128 or from 40 to 80
(for address assignment see section Module I/O 24/0.2").
If using the PCI/OS and power supply module PS75:
A maximum of 13 PLC I/O cards and 1 AG/ZS can be connected. Bear in mind that
PIC250 can address only 512 input and 512 output signals! Part of this is reserved
already for the CNC digital interface and the MTB1 I/O. Therefore the maximum
which may be used for PLCI/O are addresses 40.0 to 63.7 as inputs (=192) and
36.0 to 63.7 as outputs (=224)!
AdressesPIC250
CNC
E0.0E31.7
E40.0E63.7
Digital
interface
A0.0A31.7
Machine
PIC250
A36.0A63.7
I/OdataMTB1I/O
X21
X22
X61
Panel
E32.0E39.7
MTB1I/O
Machinepanel
A32.0A35.7
X62
170
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
CC220
Address distribution PIC 250:

Inputs:
512
CNC digital interface (256):
MTB1 I/O (64):
Machine (max. 192):
Outputs:
512
MTB1 I/O (32):
Machine (max. 224):
Markers: 1024
Remanent (256):
Not remanent (184):
Markers for byte operations (144):
Not remanent (408):
Special markers (32):
(see machine parameter P6009!)
171
E0.0
E32.0
E40.0
A0.0
A32.0
A36.0
M0.0
M32.0
M55.0
M73.0
M124.7
E31.7
E39.7
E63.7
A31.7
A35.7
A63.7
M31.7
M54.7
M72.7
M123.7
M127.7
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
CL 300
The PIC 300 is a PLC with bit and word processing commands and operates in a
structured modular configuration. The interface coupling is established via the
CNC switching group NCPLCBit", the NCPLCBit" connection cable and the
PLC connection module AG/Z or AG/P (for a description of the NCPLCBit and the
cable see section NCPLCBit").
CL 300 Performance features:
512 digital inputs
512 digital outputs
max. 512 analog inputs
or max. 128 analog outputs
2048 markers (+32 special markers)
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
128 timers
128 counters
16kwords memory
intelligent extended modules
16 ms/k processing time
Bit coupling means: connecting the CNC and MTB1 I/O interface to the CL300.
The PLC sees the CNC signals as machine signals (inputs and outputs). No further
data traffic between CNC and PLC is possible. The PLC functions and program
ming correspond to the particular characteristics of the 300 family.
Monitor functions using the CNC panel for inputs and outputs are possible. A sep
arate programming unit (PG4 or PG5) is required for programming and editing the
CL 300 program.
AdressenCL300:
CNC
CL300
E0.0E31.7
Digital
interface
A0.0A31.7
E0.0E39.7
NC
PLC
Bit
A0.0A35.7
I/OdataMTBI/O
X21
AG/ZorAG/P
1.5.2
CC220
E40.0E63.7
Machine
A36.0A63.7
X22
X61
Panel
E32.0E39.7
MTB1I/O
Machinepanel
A32.0A35.7
X62
Address distribution CL 300:

Inputs:
512
Outputs:
512
Markers:
2048

MTB1 I/O (64):
Machine (192):
MTB1 I/O (32):
Machine (224):
Remanence is adjustable
E0.0
E32.0
E40.0
A0.0
A32.0
A36.0
M0.0
E31.7
E39.7
E63.7
A31.7
A35.7
A63.7
M255.7
The start addresses of the inputs and outputs of the CNC digital interface (incl.
MTB1 I/O if present) are relocatable via machine parameter P 6008 (used when
several CNCs are to be connected to a single PLC. Advisable with PC 600 only).
172
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
1.5.3
CC220
PC 600
The PIC 600 is a PLC with bit and word processing commands and operates in a
structured modular configuration.
The interface coupling can also be bit oriented. This system allows several CC con
trols to operate on a single PC 600 (multiple bit coupling). In this case the connec
tion to the PLC is established via the module NCPLCBit, the connection cable
NCPLCBit" and the switching group AG/Z or AG/P (max. 2 NCs per AG/Z). See
section NCPLCBit" for a description of the NCPLCBit module and the connec
tion cable.
If more than 2 AG/Z modules (per rack) are required, then AG/P modules can be
used.
The PC 600 can be wordcoupled also to the CC 220 M. In this case the connection
is made via module NCPLCWord3 (WK3), the CNC PC600 connection cable
and the AG/NC3S switching group. The AG/NC3S module must be fitted to slots
10 to 14 in the PLC rack. The section NCPLCWord3" contains a description of the
NCPLCWord3 and the connection cable.
Note
Word coupling is possible only between CC 220 M and PC 600!
See the Price List for PLC module ordering information.
In conjunction with word coupling a monitor operation via the CNC panel facili
tates the display of inputs and outputs, markers, timers, counters and data mod
ules on the CNC screen.
A separate programming unit (PG4 or PG5) is required for programming and edit
ing the PC 600 program.
The user also has the full range of PC 600 functions at his disposal, e.g. interfaces
to terminals, barcode readers, tool encoding systems, analog inputs etc.
Linking one wordcoupled CNC to one or several bit coupled CNCs is possible.
PC 600 Performance features:
F
F
F
F
F
2048 digital inputs

2048 digital outputs
2048 analog inputs
512 analog outputs
4096 markers
173
F
F
F
F
F
256 timers
256 counters
64k words memory (RAM, EPROM)
intelligent extended modules
4 ms/k mean processing time
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
CC220
PC 600 with bit coupling

AddressesPC600(bitcoupled):
CNC
Digital
interface
A0.0A31.7
E0.0E39.7
NC
PLC
Bit
A0.0A35.7
I/OdataMTBI/O
X21
AG/ZorAG/P
PC600
E0.0E31.7
E40.0E255.7
Machine
A36.0A255.7
X22
X61
Panel
E32.0E39.7
MTB1I/O
Machinepanel
A32.0A35.7
X62
Address distribution PC 600 (bit coupled):

Inputs:
2048
Outputs:
2048
Markers:
4096

MTB1 I/O (64):
Machine (1728):
MTB1 I/O (32):
Machine (1760):
Not remanent (2048):
Remanent (2048):
E0.0
E32.0
E40.0
A0.0
A32.0
A36.0
M0.0
M256.0
E31.7
E39.7
E255.7
A31.7
A35.7
A255.7
M255.7
M511.7
The start addresses of the inputs and outputs of the CNC digital interface (incl.
MTB1 I/O if present) are relocatable via machine parameter P6008 (used when
several CNCs are to be connected to a single PLC > multiple bit coupling).
When PLC programming remember that you can define:
40 Organisation modules (OB0OB39)
128 Program modules (PB0PB127)
128 Function modules (FB0FB127)
256 Extended modules (ZB0ZB255)
128 Data modules (DB0DB127).
174
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
CC220
PC 600 with word coupling (CC 220 M only)

AddressesPC600(wordcoupled):
CNC
PC600
A176.0A207.7
A216.0A247.7
NC
PLC
Word
A216.0A251.7
I/OdataMTBI/O
X21
E0.0E255.7
AG/NC3S
A176.0A215.7
Digital
interface
Machine
A0.0A175.7
X22
X61
Panel
A208.0A215.7
MTB1I/O
Machinepanel
A248.0A251.7
X62
Address distribution PC 600 (word coupled):

Please note that all CNC and MTB1 I/O relevant signals must be addressed when
word coupling as PLC outputs!
Inputs:
Outputs:
2048
2048
Markers:
4096
from machine (2048):

to machine (1408):
from CNC digital interface (256):
from MTB1 I/O (64):
to CNC digital interface (256):
to MTB1 I/O (32):
(see Limits)
175
E0.0
A0.0
A176.0
A208.0
A216.0
A248.0
M0.0
E255.7
A175.7
A207.7
A215.7
A247.0
A251.0
M 511.7
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
1.5.4
CC220
Limits to PLC program generation

Bit coupling and use of the PC 600 and CL 300:
With bit coupling the following particular features should be taken into account
when creating the PLC user program:
1. PLC cycle times
The PLC cycle time (from EP to EP) is:
2ms < cycle time < watchdog time (defined in machine parameter 6002).
The watchdog time is defined in machine parameter 6002. The time is computed
indirectly since the value in P 6002 gives the number of task changes. A task
change is performed in approx. 10 ms.
Example: P6002=11. Watchdog time is 10 ms x 11 = 110 ms.
For the example this means that if no EP is executed in the PLC after approx.
110 ms, the error message PLC time inhibit" will appear at the CNC. The READY2
signal is deleted also!
CAUTION
Calling alarm and timecontrolled modules can have a considerable effect on PLC
cycle times! For this reason ensure that when generating the PLC user program the
above limits for PLC cycle times are observed!
2. Alarm processing (CL 300 only)

Alarm processing must be inhibited in the CL 300 while I/O display processing is in
progress!
3. Step mode (CL 300 only)
Step mode is not allowed!
Word coupling and use of the PC 600:

A wide range of standard modules for a variety of tasks are available from Bosch
(e.g. function and program modules for LSV2DNC, tool management).
The structured modular configuration of the PC 600 offers the PLC programmer the
ability to define:
40 Organisation modules (OB0OB39)
128 Program modules (PB0PB127)
128 Function modules (FB0FB127)
256 Extended modules (ZB0ZB255)
128 Data modules (DB0DB127).
To prevent these modules conflicting with your own modules, only the following
module names should be used for your own developments:
OB0OB39
PB64PB127
176
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
CC220
FB40FB127
ZB0ZB255
DB21DB127
There are also limitations on the use of timers, counters, markers and outputs. The
following are approved for use by the user:
Freely usable timers (192):
T0 T191
Freely usable counters (224):
Z0 Z223
Freely usable markers (2304):
M0.0 M287.7
Freely usable scratch markers (256):
M480.0 M511.7
Freely usable outputs (960):
A0.0 A119.7
Freely usable inputs (2048):
E0.0 E255.7
CAUTION
Calling alarm and timecontrolled modules can have a considerable effect on PLC
cycle times! If the time defined in machine parameter P6002 is exceeded, the error
message PLC time inhibit" will appear at the CNC. The READY2" signal is also
cancelled for a short time!
For this reason ensure that when generating the PLC user program these limits for
PLC cycle times are observed!
See the Price List for PLC module ordering information.
177
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
1.5.5
CC220
Possible PLC couplings

CNC with I/O 24/0.2 and PIC 250
CNCCardrack1.05
Inputs/outputs of I/O 24/0.2.
to machine:
to X11
from the machine:
to X21 and X22.
I/O24/0.2withintegratedPIC250
poss.addition
2ndI/OcardwithoutPIC250
CNC with PC I/O and PIC 250
PLCexpansionunit
CNCCardrack1.05
PLCI/O
Connection cable for
PCI/OS and AG/ZS:
0.55m:
064 754
AG/ZS (can be connected to the first slot as
well as the last in the expansion unit)
PCI/OSwithintegratedPIC250
Max. 1 PLC expansion rack can be coupled via X11 of the PCI/OS
by means of the AG/ZS.
Possibleaddition:a
PLCexpansionunit
NCPLC cardrack
PLCI/O
PLCI/O

PCI/OS and AG/ZS:
0.55m:
064 754
PCI/OSwithintegratedPIC250
The connection between PCI/OS and the PLC I/O cards in the NCPLC
card rack is established internally in the card rack via the backplane.
Max. 1 PLC expansion unit can be coupled via X11 of the PCI/OS by
means of the AG/ZS.
CAUTION
If the power supply module PS75 is used max. 1 PLC expansion unit (but max. 14
I/O cards in the whole system!) may be coupled via X11 of the PCI/OS and X11 of
the AG/ZS!
No switching groups addressed on the extended field (EI/EO) or which could
interrupt other units should be used in this expansion unit!
178
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
CC220
CNC with bit coupling card NCPLCBit
PLCexpansionunit
PLCI/O
AG/Z (can be connected to the first slot as

Cable:
041 535
PLCbasicunit
CNCCardrack1.05
e.g.PC600

NCPLCBit and AG/Z:
0.5m:
041 535
0.75m:
062 970
AG/Z (can be connected to slots 1014 in the

PLC basic unit)
NCPLCBit
The PLC basic unit is coupled via X11 of the NCPLCBit and X11 of
the AG/Z.
The PLC basic unit can be connected with additional expansion
units. Please refer to PLC documentation for possible PLCside
combinations.
NC/CL3Cardrack
CL300+
PLCI/O
The connection between the NCPLCBit and

the CL300 is established internally in the
cardrack via the backplane. A cable and an
AG/Z are not needed in this case.
NCPLCBit
NC/CL3cardrack
PLCexpansionunit
PLCI/O
CL300+
PLCI/O

NCPLCBit and AG/Z:
0.5 m:
041 535
0.75 m:
062 970
NCPLCBit
Max. 1 PLC expansion unit (max. 14 I/Os in the whole system) may be
coupled to the CL300 via X11 of the NCPLCBit and X11 of the AG/Z.
CAUTION
No switching groups addressed on the extended field (EI/EO) or which
could interrupt other units should be used in this expansion unit!
179
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
CC220
PLCexpensionunit
NCPLCBit and AG/Z:
0.5 m:
041 535
0.75 m:
062 970
SPSE/A

Cable:
041 535
PLCbasicunit
NC/PLCCardrack
SPSE/A
z.B.PC600
AG/Z

NCPLCBit and AG/Z:
0.5 m:
041 535
0.75 m:
062 970
NCPLCBit
AG/Z (can be connected to slots 1014 in the

PLC basic unit)
The PLC basic unit is coupled via X11 of the NCPLCBit and X11 of
the AG/Z (in the PLC basic unit).
The PLC basic unit can be connected with additional expansion
units.
PLCI/O cards in the NCPLC card rack can be connected to the PLC
basic unit or expansion unit via an AG/Z.
CNC with word coupling card NCPLCWord3
PLCexpansionunit
PLCI/O

CNCcardrack1.05
NCPLCWord3 and AG/NC3S:
0.7 m:
060 742
1.5 m:
060 743

AG/NC3S and AG/ZS:
0.55 m:
064 754
PLCbasicunit
PC600
AG/NC3S (can be connected to slots 1014 in the

PLC basic unit)
NCPLCWord3
The PLC basic unit is coupled via X71 of the NCPLCWord3 and X71 of the
AG/NC3S. The PLC basic unit can be connected with additional expansion
units. Please refer to PLC documentation for possible PLCside
combinations.
180
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
1.5.6
CC220
PLC modules
Connection module AG/NC3S (Order no.: 071 204)
The PLC module acts as an interface connection for the PC600 to the CNC on the
basis of the word coupling (only in conjunction with the PLC modules
ZE602, order no.: 062340, with components list index greater than/equal to 107 or
ZE611, order no.: 063 804, with components list index greater than/equal to 105 or
ZE612, order no.: 063 815, with components list index greater than/equal to 105!).
The AG/NC3S is connected to the word coupling card NCPLCWord3 fitted in the
CNC card rack (for available connection cables see Plugin modules", section
NCPLCWord3"). The AG/NC3S must be fitted to slots 10 to 14 in the PLC basic
unit.
BOSCH
Connection for a PLC expansion unit

via AG/ZS or AG/PS
(socket X61, subD, 50 pin)
AG/NC3S
System connection to
NCPLCWord3 in CNC rack
(connector X71, subD, 50 pin)
Earth star point

(connection for cable screening)
Front view AG/NC3S
CAUTION
The module must only be inserted or removed when the CNC and PLC are
switched off!
Similarly, connected cables must only be inserted or removed when the CNC and
PLC are switched off!
181
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
CC220
Connection module AG/ZS (Order no.: 064 719)

The PLC module is used
to interface a PLC expansion unit to the PLC basic unit (via the AG/NC3S),
which in turn is wordcoupled with a CNC, or
to interface a PLC expansion unit to the CNC module PCI/OS.
BOSCH
Connection for an
AG/ZS or an AG/NC3S
AG/ZS
Connection for a
AG/ZS or an AG/NC3S
12345
6789
Earth star point

(connection for cable screening)
Front view AG/ZS

Connecting to AG/NC3S:
For this purpose the AG/ZS is connected to the connection module AG/NC3S
fitted to the PLC basic unit (via socket X61) (connection cable between AG/ZS and
AG/NC3S, length 0.55 m: 064 754).
The AG/ZS may be connected to the first as well as the last slot in the PLC expan
sion unit.
The two sockets on the front panel of the AG/ZS are arranged parallel to each other
so that the connection to the AG/NC3S can be made via the upper or the lower
socket as desired. In any case only one AG/NC3S may be connected!
182
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
CC220
Connecting to PCI/OS:
The connection between PCI/OS and AG/ZS is established via the connection
cable 064 754 (length: 0.55 m).
The AG/ZS may be connected to the first as well as the last slot in the PLC expan
sion unit.
The two sockets on the front panel of the AG/ZS (X61) are arranged parallel to each
other so that the connection to the PCI/OS can be made via the upper or the lower
socket as desired. This connection method excludes the fitting of any further con
nection modules to the second socket.
Please refer to PLC documentation for descriptions of connection modules AG/Z

(order no. 041 523) and AG/P (order no. 047 944). These connection modules are
used for bit coupling between the CNC and the PLC (via NCPLCBit coupler).
CAUTION
switched off!
183
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
CC220
Digital input modules E 24 V/DC, 95way (Order no.: 071 252)

This module is intended mainly for use in CNC combiracks.
A maximum of 95 input signals (24 V=) can be transmitted to the PLC logic via the
module. To save space there are no LEDs on the front panel to display the logic
level.
Connection of all input signals is made via 12 plugin terminals, each 8pin (X210 to
X221) with contact spacing of 3.5 mm.
The external 24 V= supply (from load power supply module) is established via a
5pin plugin terminal (X10) with contact spacing of 5 mm.
BOSCH
0
Connection X210
Connection X216
7
Connection X211
Connection X217
Connection X212
Connection X218
Connection X213
Connection X219
Connection X214
Connection X220
Connection X215
Connection X221
7
S
E24V=
Input Voltage
24 V DC +20% /15% max.
X
1
0
24V
24V
24V
0V
0V
Extended field
F
r
o
n
t
I/O field
S1
S3
S2
Address
Debounce time ON OFF
Front view E24 V/DC
Front view E24 V/DC

(component side)
CAUTION
switched off!
184
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
CC220
Input voltage 24 V= (connection X10)

24 V= supply, +20%/15%; (Weidmller plugin terminal MSTB 1.5, 5pin) Conductor
cross section max. 1.5 mm2, supply line with insulation: max. 3 mm diameter.
Supply via an external load power supply module (see section Electrical connec
tions"). Maximum input current: 50 mA.
NOTE
Internal power input (from CNC power supply module PSxx) of module (12 V): type.
12 mA, max. 60 mA
Digital inputs (connections X210 to 221)

(12 plugin terminals with contact spacing 3.5 mm, 8pin)
95 inputs are available. The inputs are metallically separated from the logic voltage
via optical couplers.
CAUTION
Input X221, pin 7 is indicated with S" on the front panel of the module. This pin may
not be used as a normal input since the bit allocated to it monitors the 24 V= supply.
In this case
Bit = 0:
24 V missing
Bit = 1:
24 V OK
The last bit must be read cyclically by the PLC if the card is operated in the ex
tended field. Otherwise all input bits remain at 0"!
Specifications of an input:
LOW:
HIGH:
Input current
at 5 V:
at 15 V:
at 30 V:
Temp. mean of input current
at 15 V:
at 30 V:
Input delay from
LOW to HIGH:
HIGH to LOW:
Auxiliary supply
approx. 11 V
3 V to +5 V
+15 V to +30 V
0.65 mA to 0.7 mA
2.0 mA to 5.2 mA
4.0 mA to 10.4 mA
approx. 2.1 mA
approx. 4.3 mA
adjustable in 8 stages with S2
adjustable in 8 stages with S2
X210toX221
Signalinput
X10
for auxiliary supply
generation
Scan
pulses
24V =
24V =
24V =
l in =max.50mA
0V
0V
Supplyvoltage
fromloadpowersupply
module
The input circuit is provided with a suppressor diode (limiting voltage approx.
70 V) to protect against transients.
185
Systemconfiguration
PLCcouplings
CC220
The input current is switched to pulses by the scan system as soon as the input
voltage exceeds 13 V. The pulse repetition time corresponds to the minimum input
delay given in table 1. Exception: The minimum pulse repetition time is 2.5 ms
when the S2 switch position is 0".
Debouncing (rotary switch S2)
The times for the debouncing of all inputs signals can be set by using S2. A setting
between 0" and 7" should be selected (position 8" corresponds to position 0",
position 9" corresponds to 1").
Switch setting S2
min. input
delay
2.5
10
20
40
80
160
max. input
delay
3.1
5.6
10.6
20.6
40.6
80.6
160.6
320.6
pulse suppressed
if shorter
0.005
4.5
9.5
19.5
39.5
79.5
159.5
pulse recognised
if longer
3.1
5.6
10.6
20.6
40.6
80.6
160.6
320.6
Table 1 (all times in ms)
Addressing the module (S3 and S1)

The module address is fixed using DIL switch S3. The address set in this way corre
sponds to the address of the first byte. Slide switch S1 can be used to specify also
whether the module is to be operated in the I/O field or the extended field.
Switch
Significance
S31
S32
S33
4
S34
S35
16
S36
32
S37
S38
64
128
NOTE
Switch S31 is not connected. Only one evennumbered address can be set. It is
advisable to leave S31 at position OFF ("0") for reasons of clarity.
CAUTION
No address may be set for which the last byte of the input card lies outside the ad
dressing range of the PLC or the used coupler! Otherwise all input bits remain at
logical 0"!
186
Systemconfiguration
Externalexpansionunits
1.6
External expansion units
1.6.1
DCR cassette player
CC220
Specifications
Mains voltage:
220 V/110 V (+15% 10%); 50/60 Hz;

max. mains failure time: 20 ms
Dimensions and weight:
Width:
Height:
Depth:
Weight:
Operating temperature range
10C45C
Cassette recorder:
TEAC MT204
Data carrier:
Magnetic tape cassette to ECMA 34
Serial interface:
V24 (RS 232 C), line current 20/60 mA (active/

passive) depending on connection
Parallel interface:
Signal assignment conforms to Remex reader

7300 in mode 6
Max. Cable length:
15 m for V24, 100 m for 20 mA
Transmission speed:
serial 100, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,

9600 baud
parallel 50, 75, 110, 134, 150, 300, 600,
1200 characters/s
Operating modes:
Search forwards/backwards
Fast rewind
serial: write/read
parallel: read
Settings at the DCR

Code:
Baud rate:
Parity:
Stop bit:
BIN
C (4800 baud)
Off
1
Settings at the CNC

Device selection: CASSETTE 4800 BAUD
187
265 mm
149 mm
303 mm
approx. 7.5 kg
Systemconfiguration
CC220
Connection cable CNCDCR (20 mA interface)

Connector DCR
SubD, 25pin
Connector X11
SubD, 25pin
2.5 m
20 mA SERIAL
strainrelief clamp
Pin assignment
Colour
blue
red
violet
black
white
brown
yellow
green
Screen
Connector DCR
12
13
14
16
18
21
24
25
1
Connector X11
23
22
19
11
16
14
13
12
Connector
housing
Type
No.
Connection cable CNCDCR (2.5 m)

DCR cassette player
Blank cassette (min. qty. 10)
046 266
036 485
036 087
188
Systemconfiguration
1.6.2
CC220
MiniCass cassette player

Specifications
Mains voltage:
220 V / 110 V (+15% 10%) slide switch

selection; 50/60 Hz
Dimensions and weight:
Width:
Height:
Depth:
Weight:
216 mm
114 mm
227 mm (with carry strap and
connector 232 mm)
approx. 3 kg
Operating temperature range: 5C 55C

Cassette recorder:
MDCR 220
Data carrier:
Digital minicassette LDB 400
Serial interface:
V24 (RS 232 C), line current 20/60 mA (active/

passive) depending on connection
Max. Cable length:
15 m for V24, 100 m for 20 mA
Transmission speed:
50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400,

3600, 4800 7200, 9600 bit/s, selectable
Operating modes:
Stop, fast rewind

Write
Read
Settings at the MiniCass

ISO/BIN
Baud rate:
Mode:
BIN
7 (1200 baud)
4
Settings at the CNC

Interface:
AT THE CONTROL
Device selection: TTY 1200 BAUD
Status:
no device control, DFS identification
189
Systemconfiguration
CC220
Connection cable CNCMiniCass (20 mA interface)

Connector MiniCass
SubD, 25pin
Connector X11
SubD, 25pin
2.5 m
20 mA SERIAL
strainrelief clamp
Pin assignment
Colour
blue
red
violet
black
white
brown
yellow
green
Screen
Connector MiniCass Connector X11

12
13
14
16
18
21
24
25
1
23
22
19
11
16
14
13
12
Connector
housing
Type
No.
Connection cable CNCMiniCass (2.5 m)

MiniCass
Blank cassette (min. qty. 10)
046 266
044 198
910 749
190
Systemconfiguration
Punched tape reader with 5" spooler, type: FER 204 A/S2
Photoelectric punched tape reader with spooler. The spooler is suitable for start
stop reading up to approx. 300 characters/s, respooling up to 1000 characters/s.
148
37.75
S R
57.1
93.5
6.35
132.5(5)
1/4
483 (19")
67
51
1.6.3
CC220
Specifications
Operating elements:
1 touch key Spooler"

1 touch key Reader"
1 respool key left"
1 respool key right"
Punched tape width:
1"
Punched tape tension:
0.50.7 N
Mains connection:
110/220/240 V, 5060 Hz selectable
Rating:
Standby: 20 VA
Reading: 80 VA
Respooling: 40 VA
Environmental:
Operation: conforms to KUF DIN 40040

(0...60C)
Storage: 25C to +75C
Humidity: 0 to 95% without condensation
Weight:
6.35 kg
Operating data:
Read mode:
automatic from punched tape
loop mode
Respool:
manual with touch key
remote with TTL signals
(SW or SRW)
191
Systemconfiguration
CC220
Settings when commissioning:

Baud rate:
Selectable with rotary switch S1 from 509600 baud:
Baud rate
Switch position
50
75
110
134.5
150
200
300
600
1200*
1800
2400
4800
9600
D
C
0
B
1
A
2
9
4
5
3/8
6
7
* default set by Bosch

Data format:
Selectable via DIL switch S2:
5, 6, 7 or 8 data bits
1, 1 or 2 stop bits
Even, odd or no parity
+
close
5
S2

open
Default: 8databits
1stopbit
noparity
S21:
open: even parity

close: uneven parity
S22:
open: parity off (no parity)

close: parity on
S23/4:
open open: 8 data bits

close open: 7 data bits
open close: 6 data bits
close close: 5 data bits
S25
open: 2 stop bits (1.5 stop bits with 5 data bits)

close: 1 stop bit
192
Systemconfiguration
CC220
Encoding switch S3
As the current interface is not standard, it is possible to invert
the outputs via the S31 and S33 switches
the inputs via the S32 switch
Signal description
Switch open
READY (active)
RUN (active)
DATA
+
close
closed
S31
S32
S33
current
current
Start bit:
current
Stop bit:
no current
no current
no current
Start bit:
no current
Stop bit:
current
5
Default

open
Punched tape reader PCB

X2
S2
193
S3
S1
Systemconfiguration
CC220
Connection cable CNCpunched tape reader (20 mA interface)

Connector X11
SubD, 25pin
Socket X2
SubD, 25pin
5m
strainrelief clamp
Pin assignment
Colour
X11
Signal
X2 (reader)
Signal
violet
pink
beige
brown
blue
transparent
greenyellow
16
21
14
18
12
24
housing
DTR+
DTR
DSR
DSR
RX+
RX
Screen
9
10
24
25
18
21
1
RUN+
RUN
Ready+
Ready
TXD+
TXD
Screen
Pins 9 and 10 at connector X11 are jumpered (20 mA interface of the CNC is active).
Type
No.
Connection cable CNCPTR (5 m)

Connection cable CNCPTR (10 m)
Punched tape reader with spooler
Punched tape reader without spooler
050 336
050 337
914 122
055 078
194
Systemconfiguration
1.6.4
CC220
Diskette unit CC disk

Operation
For operating instructions see manual CC Disk, prod. no. 4113.
Diskettes used
3 inch, MSDOS compatible
Double density, double sided (2DD):720 kbytes
(max. 99 programs)
High density, double sided (2HD):
720 kbytes or 1.44 MByte
(max. 99 / 211 programs)
Keyboard
Alphanumeric ASCII keyboard, 16 function keys
Display
LCD with illumination, 4 lines of 40 characters each
Codes
ASCII, ISO, EIA and transparent
Editing
Programs up to 256 kBytes
Interfaces
Serial RS232C (V24): SubD socket, 25pin, 1109600 baud.
Serial RS232C (V24): SubD socket, 9pin, 1109600 baud.
Balanced serial RS422 (V11): SubD socket, 15pin, 1109600 baud.
(connection to serial data interface 1 or CP/MEM4)
Current loop (20 mA passive): SubD socket, 25pin, 1109600 baud.
Parallel Centronics (printer port).
Facit 4070, Parallel: subD socket, 25pin
Interface parameters
Set at the CC Disk by software.
Settings at the CNC
See manual Machine Parameters CC 220, parameter set 5500.
Type
No.
CC disk
Connection cable CNCCC (2.5 m)
Diskettes 3", formatted 720 kByte (min. qty. 10)
Diskettes 3", unformatted 1.44 MByte (min. qty. 10)
195
062 957
064 785
054 599
915 486
Systemconfiguration
1.6.5
CC220
Programming units PG4 / PG5 / PG6 / BOT5200

Apart from their use as programming and test units for CL100 / CL300 / PC 400,
PC 600, the Bosch units PG4 (80286 processor) and PG5, PG6 or BOT5200 (each
with 80386 processor) can also be used as AT compatible computers. More de
tailed information may be found in the manuals Programming units PG4 / PG5 /
PG6 / BOT5200".
PG4 functions
Developing programs
Testing programs
Loading programs
Documenting programs
Archiving programs
Converting PG3 files
See Price List PNo.: 4163.
1.6.6
XTRANS
XTRANS is a software package which can be used to transfer, manage, edit and
archive CNC programs and tables of the CC 220.
Use 3" or 5" diskettes as data carriers.
The program is run on the BOT5200, an IBMAT compatible PC or the Bosch pro
gramming units PG4 and PG5.
1.6.7
Type
No.
XTRANS 3" diskette

XTRANS 5" diskette
V24 transmission cable
062 625
064 780
054 956
Biburn
Software for creating IntelHex files for customer software libraries of the CC 220.
Type
No.
incl. software protection adaptor

3" diskette
5" diskette
Without software protection adaptor
3" diskette (Update)
5" diskette (Update)
196
064 135
064 806
066 728
066 730
Dimensions
Cardrack
CC220
2.
Dimensions, installation and connection conditions
2.1
2.1.1
Dimensions card rack

NC card rack 1.05
Frontview
205.4
Sideview
100 mm
clearance
307.5
187.5
1.5
133.3
488.1
37.7
133.3
146.1
377
100 mm
clearance
Doubleendedcableopeningfor
andPEconductor
Fanunitconnection24V=
Planview
Panelcutout
160.4
187.5
133.3
M6 or
7
146.1
170
39.7
133.3
492
+0.1
386.15 0.3
11.7
21
Dimensions
Cardrack
2.1.2
NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 or

Frontview
Sideview
480
100 mm
clearance
307.5
461.9
488.1
37.7
133.3
146.1
252.8+/0.2
100 mm
clearance
377
Doubleendedcableopeningfor
fanunitconnection24V=andPEconductor
Planview
Panelcutout
461.9
435
133.3
M6 or
7
146.1
450
39.7
133.3
492
+0.1
0.2
11.7
1.5
133.3
386.15
CC220
22
Dimensions
12"monochromepanel
2.2
Operating panels
2.2.1
CC220
265
6.15
8.3
284.5
298
Sideview
235
233
15
310
233
482.6
Rearview
245
276
Planview
13
Earthing studs
(PE terminal)
18
88.5
358
Panelcutout
21
21
4.5
321
298
234.94
287,5
452
45
7
80
233
280
466
23
26.28
5.25
4.5
37.65
310.3
Frontview
Abmessungen
Bedienfeld14"Farbe
2.2.2
CC220
Anschlubedingungen
14" colour panel
Frontview
Sideview
284.5
298
234.94
Support
bracket
6.15
8.3
13
22
233
361.6
233
15
427.5
482.6
Planview
Rearview
Power supply connection
13
276
362.5
230 V
incl. PE terminal
(nonheating unit socket)
18
88.5
358
Panelcutout
21
21
4.5
321
298
234.94
287.5
452
45
7
80
233
280
466
24
26.28
5.25
4.5
37.68
310.3
460
Dimensions
MTB1I/O,ASCIIkeyboard
2.3
CC220
MTB1 I/O
Frontview
4,7
260
X12
X11
X62
X61
X71
X73
150
X13
34
Fuse F1
(6.3 A)
124
138
X14
Sideview
X28
X27
X26
X25
X24
X23
X22
X21
X72
X10
427
2.4
~40
ASCII keyboard with drawer

Frontview
Sideview
74
88
76,2
CCK
5,9
25
466
90
~
482,6
200
~
Planview
Connectionlead1.5m
Panelcutout
7 or
M6
240
76
ASCIIkeyboard
435
466
25
Dimensions
Electronichandwheel
Handwheels
Dimension drawing of analog handwheel
Frontview
a
Sideview
5.2
~ 50
h 89
h 108
16
30
18
Dimension drawing of digital handwheel
Frontview
Sideview
h 108
+
90
63
63
2.5
CC220
50
5.2
50
60
h 89
26
4
55
Installation
2.6
CC220
Installation
CAUTION
Units which are intended for installation in casings or switch cabinets may only be
operated when installed.
Units and particularly control elements must be installed in such way that they are
protected sufficiently from accidental operation.
The relevant safety and accident prevention regulations must be observed during
installation.
All connection cables must be laid as shown at the corresponding points. Addi
tional isolating points are not allowed!
Connection or signal leads must be laid in such a way that no unit functions can be
interrupted by capacitive or inductive interference.
2.6.1
Operating panel installation

Installation position:
0 to max. 45 oblique position.

The installation of the operating panel must afford an un
obstructed view of the moving machine parts!
Installation method:
Installation in desk or swivel frame, sealed to IP 54.

Install with a view to easy maintenance (i.e. easy access
to panel connections, fuses and if necessary to MTB1
I/O).
Make a note of the data on the rating plate, in case this
cannot be read after installation.
Allsides
min.50mm
max. 45
Panel
(housing)
Side view (section)
For purposes of ventilation and cable routing, ensure a minimum clearance of

50 mm above, below, to the sides and at the backplane of the unit! All cables should
be laid in loops and must have strain relief.
Distances from interference sources (e.g. magnets) should be kept as great as
possible. Use screening plates if required.
27
Installation
CC220
CAUTION
Owing to the weight of the units, lifting or transporting should always be carried out
by 2 persons!
Connect operating panels to the protective circuit using earthing studs (on the
backplane of the panel) (minimum cross section 6 mm2)!
The admissible ambient temperature range of the panels of +5 C to +55 C re
lates to the direct environment of the panel, i.e. in the case of installed units, the
temperature in the installation compartment at the highest point of the panel
housing. It is most important to ensure that the maximum temperature given is not
exceeded even by the highest occuring outside temperature, e.g. by installing
additional ventilation units.
Please ensure also that protection standard IP 54 (required for the installation com
partment) is adhered to when installing additional ventilation units.
The 14" colour panel must be fixed on the outside at the panel front as well as at the
rear of the housing. For this purpose a support bracket has been preassembled on
the underside of the panel.
NOTE
Exposure of the monitor to direct sunlight should be avoided since this impairs the
legibility of the display and causes increased heating of the unit.
Select position for ease of operation without excessive fatigue.
Angular mounting increases the risk of soiling to the panel front.
2.6.2
Installing drawer with keyboard

Keyboard weight:
Drawer weight:
Length of keyboard connection cable:
approx. 0.8 kg
approx. 1.2 kg
approx. 1.5 m
Centred beneath the panel. The keyboard drops down

approx. 25_ so the drawer should not be installed inclined
more than 20_.
The closed drawer has enclosure class IP 54.

It must be sealed.
CAUTION
The keyboard without (or with opened) drawer complies with protection standard
IP40.
NOTE
For standing operation, the best ergonomic installation height of the keyboard is
between 1000 mm and 1200 mm above the floor.
28
Installation
2.6.3
CC220
Installing the MTB1 I/O 24 V/0.1 A

Weight of MTB1 I/O:
approx. 1 kg
optional, provided heat buildup is avoided.
Install close to panel in desk or swivel frame, sealed to IP 54.

Install with a view to easy maintenance (i.e. easy access
to connections and fuse).
Make a note of the data on the rating plate, in case this
cannot be read after installation.
The installed distance between MTB1 I/O and panel is limited by the connection
cables between these two units (cable length max. 2 m).
All connection cables should be laid in loops and must have strain relief.
Distances from interference sources should be kept as great as possible. Use
screening plates if required.
2.6.4
Installing the electronic handwheel

The handwheel is provided for manually traversing the axes. It is best integrated in
the machine panel.
Protection standard: IP65 front, IP50 rear
Maximum cable lengths for connecting handwheels:
analog handwheel: 20 m. Connection to MTB1 I/O (X72) or operating panel (X61).
digital handwheel: 14 m. Connection to SERVO i measuring system input (X1116)
or to MTB1 I/O (X73).
CAUTION
A handwheel with magnetic holder should not be positioned in the immediate vicin
ity of the monitor owing to the possible effects on the display (distortion, colour cor
ruption).
29
CC220
Installation
Installing the card rack

Installation:
Vertical.
In switch cabinet to IP54.
The card rack can be mounted on the front or rear side. Mounting set order no.
050409 (bracket + screws) is required for rearside assembly.
For purposes of ventilation and cable routing, ensure a minimum clearance of
100 mm above, below, to the sides and at the backplane of the unit!
Distances from interference sources (transformers, reactors, drive boosters, power
contactors etc.) should be kept as great as possible. Use screening plates if re
quired.
Ventilation plugin units for cooling the modules during operation are provided in
the lower section of the rack. The ventilation units are powered with 24 V=. The ven
tilation unit power supply cable can be installed on the left or right side wall of the
card rack via the openings provided (see dimension drawing). Measured from the
access openings, the cable must be long enough for the fan unit to be completely
removed for maintenance work to be carried out.
Maintenance information may be found in the section Maintenance".
CAUTION
Rearsideassembly
Drillingplanforrearsideassembly
M6 or
7
412,7
Card rack
279,4
Owing to the weight of the card rack, lifting or transporting should always be carried
out by 2 persons!
The card rack must be connected via the earthing stud on the PE protective cir
cuit(minimum cross section 6 mm2)! The earthing stud is located on the inside of
the card rack, directly alongside the left cable access opening (viewed from the
front).
133,3
2.6.5
187.5
(Rack 1.05)
Mounting set for rearside assembly
210
461.9
(Combirack)
Installation
CC220
NOTE
The maximum clearance between the CNC and a PLC card rack is limited by the
length of the connection cable (for clearances and construction of PLC modules
see System description PC 600, prod. no. 3594).
The minimum vertical distance between the two racks is 100 mm!
Cable lengths available when using PCI/OS and PLC expansion unit:
Cable PCI/OS to AG/ZS:
0.55 m
(order no. 064 754)
Cable lengths available when bit coupling between CNC and PLC:
Cable NCPLCBit to AG/Z or AG/P:
0.5 m
(order no. 041 535)
Cable NCPLCBit to AG/Z or AG/P:
0.75 m
(order no. 062 970)
Cable NCPLCBit to AG/P:
1.8 m
(order no. 048 081)
Cable lengths available when word coupling between CNC and PLC:
Cable NCPLCWord to AG/NC3S:
0.7 m
(order no. 060 742)
Cable NCPLCWord to AG/NC3S:
1.5 m
(order no. 060 743)
Cable AG/NC3S to AG/ZS:
0.55 m
(order no. 064 754)
211
CC220
Electricalconnections
2.7
Electrical connections
The NC machine tool system is usually supplied from the threephase main, from
which all internal plant voltages are derived (230 VAC; 24 VDC).
CAUTION
The mains supply must be established in accordance with the relevant standards
and codes of practice. The VDE regulations (e.g. VDE 0100 and VDE 0113) and
the regulations of the local power station must be observed in particular!
All connection cables must be installed as shown in the block diagrams!
!
!
Electrical connections may only be performed by appropriately qualified person

nel. A suitable electric tool must be used.
It is most important that transformers to VDE 0551 are used!
!
2.7.1
General data on power supply(ies)

230 V supply
~ 230 VAC +6% 10%
~ 4862 Hz
~ max. break time: 10 ms every 10 sec.
24 V load supply
24 VDC, +20% 15%
Module
Connectionmax.power
input
I/O24.02
MTB1I/O
SERVOi
PLCmodules
Fanunits
X10
X10
X31
8.3A
4.0A
0.9A
acc.toconstruction
0.5A
24 V logic supply
24 VDC, +20% 15%
Module
Connection
PS75
12"panel
14"panel
X10
X10(CP/MEM4)
X10(CP/MEM4)
max.power
input
5.0A
1.1A
1.1A
All data relates to nominal voltage.

For load/logic supply: Ripple voltage content arising from an uncontrolled three
phase bridge connection without smoothing with a ripple factor of 5%
(see DIN 40 110/10.75, section 1.2) is permissible. This makes the upper voltage
limit the largest absolute value of 30.2 V and the lower voltage limit the smallest ab
solute value of 18.5 V.
CAUTION
In the case of units powered by mains voltage, it must be ensured before commis
sioning that the set/required mains voltage range corresponds to the local mains
voltage.
Fluctuations or deviations from the nominal value of the mains voltage must not ex
ceed or fall below the given tolerance limits. If this happens then functional defects
may result and/or the electric modules may become dangerous.
212
2.7.2
CC220
24 V power supply modules for load and logic supply

The control requires two 24 VDC voltage sources (either 2 separated 24V power
supply modules or a power supply module with 2 secondary windings), of which
one supplies the logic circuits of the individual units and the other provides the load
voltages (e.g. to supply the PIC250, MTB1 I/O or PLC inputs/outputs). For reasons
of interference immunity is it advisable to separate logic and load voltage.
Using only a single 24 VDC voltage source is only permitted if the required logic
voltage is decoupled from the load voltage circuit by appropriate filters, and
differential inputs for the analog nominal speed are available for the con
nected drives.
CAUTION
Power supply modules with transformers to VDE 0551 must be used!
!
L1 L2 L3
400 V +5%
Safety isolating transformer to VDE 0551.

Connection to VDE 0551.
400 V
400 V 5%
PE
Power supply modules

available:
24 V=; 6 A / 3*400 V
Order no.: 916535
0V
IN > 16 A
2
i2t >
50 A s
24 V=; 16 A / 3*400 V
Order no.: 916327
+ 24V
Power supply module with 2 separated secondary windings

Safety isolating transformer to VDE 0551. Connection to VDE 0551.
400 V +5%
L1 L2 L3
400 V
400 V 5%
PE
0V logic
0 V load
IN > 16 A
i2t > 50 A2s

24 V load
24 V logic
IN = rated current
213
2.7.3
CC220
PE conductor and screen

All PE conductors and 0V connections in a system were previously wired in a star
configuration with only one connection to a central earthing point with the switch
cabinet casing. Furthermore, the screening of all measuring system, tacho or com
mand cables was connected at one end only to an insulated earthing bar which in
turn was wired to the central earthing point. In this way a widelybranched screen
ing system with star configuration developed.
This wiring method has proved itself in the past; interference of drive components
by thyristors commutated with 50 Hz or by transistors switching at low voltage
(100200 V) has been relatively low.
By contrast, the introduction of voltagesource converters powered directly from
the mains leading to highly dynamic speed regulation of feed and main spindle mo
tors together with the associated introduction of modern highperformance transis
tors has brought about a considerable change in interference.
The only adequate protection against high interference is screening connected at
both ends in conjunction with a strongly meshed earthing cable!
CAUTION
The protective circuit (earth connection) of the system must be meshed!
!
!
Module housing, switch cabinet housing, mounting plates in the switch cabinet
etc. must be connected to the protective circuit. Take particular care to ensure ad
equate cable cross sections for the PE conductor wiring!
The bonding leads/PE leads of all system components (in particular between the
NC and drives) must be kept as short as possible and must be lowresistance. All
protective circuit connections must conform to EN 60204 part 1!
All screening must be connected at both ends, with the prerequisite that the system
components are electrically networked and earthed.
Refer to the connection conditions of the individual drives when connecting the
drive cable screening in order to establish whether one or both ends should be
connected.
214
CC220
2.7.4
Interference suppression
Electrically driven and controlled machine systems can generate electromagnetic
fields (high and low frequencies) and causes mains disturbance. For this reason
they must be suppressed in accordance with the regulations.
VDE regulations are applicable in addition to the statutory requirements, e.g.:
VDE 0874 Directives for radio interference suppression
VDE 0875 and
VDE 0871 Requirements for the radio suppression of appliances, machinery
and plant for nominal frequencies from 0 to 10 kHz.
Bosch control systems already incorporate the required suppression equipment.
The performance of a control system can however be affected by mainsborne dis
turbance, and for this reason external circuit elements (switch cabinet) should in
clude
filters
spark quenching circuits
damping of inductive switching spikes
limiting the switching voltage of highspeed semiconductors
screening (see also section PE conductor and screen")
It is essential that all of these components are included in the interference sup
pression system, since they achieve their optimum and most costeffective per
formance in concert.
The issue of electrical symmetry or asymmetry is also important.
Apart from symmetrical interference voltage components that occur between the
supply cables, asymmetrical interference voltages can also occur. This may arise
as a result of the capacitive coupling of the interference source with the mains. The
diagram below illustrates a typical suppression circuit in which the asymmetrical
interference voltages are discharged to the housing via Cy. Cx damps the sym
metrical interference.
Cy
Cx
Mains
Cy
CAUTION
Suppress as close as possible to the interference source.

Limit leakage currents in accordance with safety regulations (shockhazard
protection!).
Suppressors should be mechanically well secured to prevent failure
through vibration.
Use only components which are identified as suppressors.
215
CC220
Examples of interference suppression

Contact circuits
(a.c., d.c., superimposed d.c.)
a)
b)
c)
d)
D
R
R
VDR
Rp
C
C
re b)
re c)
re d)
for sensitive contacts, residual current when contact open!

for highinductive load
voltagedependent resistor, residual current when contact open
Inductive load circuit

(motors, solenoid, relays and contactor coils)
a)
b)
c)
e)
d)

D
VDR
D
U
VDR
ZD
re c)
re d)
re e)
dropout delay with relay

defined dropout delay with relay
must be optimised to the inductance!
Mains circuit
L1
L1
Cx
Cx
L2
Cy
M
~
~
L3
Cx
SL
SL
216
Cx
Cx
Cy
CC220
Voltage connection
The principles of voltage connection are depicted in the following diagrams.
Emergency switching circuits, mains switches etc. are provided by the pro
ject planner of the system as a whole.
CAUTION
Supplyleads
min.16 mm2 (green/yellow)
to switch cabinet housing
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
16 mm2 (green/yellow)
to machine
all housing components (PE

bolt)
Earthing bars for 0 V wiring (see
following diagram)
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
L3
L2
PEstarpoint
Fuses, preferably motor circuitbreakers
400V
N conductors may
be used only with
the agreement of
the operator!
Transformer
to VDE 0551
230V
PE
N1
W1
PE
W1
N1
PE
PE cross section greater
than/equal to cross section for
voltage supply lead of unit to be
earthed (colour: green/yellow)
230Vfan(PLC,drives)
Serviceconnector(s)
colourPanel(CNC)
230Vsupply(SPS)
Drives:
LogicpowermoduleforTCmodule
PEbars
Powerupswitch
217
PE
L3
L2
L1
PE
L3
L2
L1
PE
Cross sections
dependent on power
demand, but min.
1.5 mm2
L3
L1
When connecting the voltage the relevant safety and accident prevention re
gulations must be observed!
Panels, CNC and PLC should be all switched on or all switched off.
When disconnecting, the drives must be switched to an inoperative state be
fore the CNC logic voltage can be disconnected!
Owing to the particular, safetycritical significance with regard to drive oper
ations or the evaluation of CNC digital I/Os, we would like to draw your attention
to the signal READY2 (relay contact see section PS 75"): If the READY2
contact is open the control is not ready for operation!
L2
L1
2.7.5
CNCloadpowermodule CNClogicpowermodule
(seefollowingdiagram) (sefollowingdiagram)
= insulate terminals
CC220
Generation of 24 V logic and 24 V load voltage with 2 separated power supply modules or by using a power
supply module with 2 separated secondary windings:
N1
PE
W1
PE
L3
L2
L1
400 VAC
Cross sections dependent on power

demand, but min. 4 mm2. At higher power
demand 2 x 4 mm2
Logic power supply

module (2) with safety
transformer to VDE
0551 and lineside
motor circuitbreaker
Load power supply

module with safety
transformer to VDE
0551 and lineside
motor
circuitbreaker
400 VAC
24 VDC
24 VDC
Length max. 4m
Twisted leads
62 (1)(blue)
Length max. 4 m
L3
L1
Cross sections
dependent on power
demand, but min.
0.75 mm2
Cross sections
dependent on power
demand, but min.
1.5 mm2
PE
Cross sections
dependent on power
demand, but min.
1.5 mm2
from PE star point

(see previous diagram)
L2
from230Vconnection
(seepreviousdiagram)
4 mm2
62 (1)(blue)
0Vload
Earthingbars
4 mm2
A
102 (green/yellow)(4)
24Vload
0Vlogic
24Vlogic
A = terminal block 42
B = terminal block 102
MTB1 supply voltage input load (connection X10)
HighSpeed supply (connection X31(3) at SERVOi)
I/O 24/0.2 supply voltage input (connection X10)
PLC (power supply for I/Os, PU, EZ, DG)
Supply voltage for the CNC interface input signals
Supply voltage for probe/signal
Load multiterminal busbars (24 V/0 V) drives
Supply voltage CNC ventilation unit
Supply 24 V at PS75 (connection X10)

Supply 24 V at CP/MEM4 (connection X10)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Easily visible and detachable

This mains connection is not active if a power supply module with 2 separate secondary windings is used.
The leads to the logic terminals 0 V and 24 V must be connected then in accordance with the section 24 V power
supply modules for load and logic supply", diagram "power supply module with 2 separate secondary windings".
The power supply to X31 may be lost if the HighSpeed inputs/outputs of the SERVOi are not used.
PE bars should preferably be conductive and mounted on the mounting plate. Insulated PE bars must be
connected to the mounting plate at both ends with max. 20 cm copper strips.
The cross section of the copper strips must correspond at least to that of the supply line.
218
CC220
Generation of the 24 V logic and the 24 V load voltage by a single power supply module:
Power supply
module with safety
transformer to VDE
0551 and lineside
motor
circuitbreaker
W1
N1
102 (green/yellow)
PE
L3
L1
Cross sections
dependant on power
demand, but min.
0.75 mm2
PE
Cross sections
dependent on power
demand, but min.
1.5 mm2
from PE star point

(see previous diagram)
L2
From230Vconnection
400 VAC
Cross sections dependant on power

demand, but min. 4 mm2. At higher power
demand 2 x 4 mm2
42
24 VDC
Length max. 2 m
Twisted leads
42
DC filter
Length max. 2 m
Twisted leads
Length max. 4 m
42
62 (1)(blue)
42
0Vload
Earthingbars
A
102 (green/yellow)(4)
24Vload
0Vlogic
24Vlogic
A = terminal block 42
B = terminal block 102
MTB1 supply voltage input load (connection X10)
HighSpeed supply (connection X31(3) at SERVOi)
I/O 24/0.2 supply voltage input (connection X10)
PLC (power supply for I/Os, PU, EZ, DG)
Supply voltage for the CNC interface input signals
Supply voltage for probe/signal
Load multiterminal busbars (24 V/0 V) drives
Supply voltage CNC ventilation unit
Supply 24 V at PS200 (connection X10)

Supply 24 V at CP/MEM4 (connection X10)
(1)
(3)
(4)
Easily visible and detachable

The power supply to X31 may be lost if the HighSpeed inputs/outputs of the SERVOi are not used.
PE bars should preferably be conductive and mounted on the mounting plate. Insulated PE bars must be
connected to the mounting plate at both ends with max. 20 cm copper strips.
The cross section of the copper strips must correspond at least to that of the supply line.
219
CC220
from load
terminals
(see
previous
diagram)
From230Vconnection
from load
terminals
(see
previous
diagram)
Cross sections
dependant on power
demand, but min.
0.5 mm2 (*)
W1
N1
PE
Cross sections
dependant on power
demand, but min.
0.75 mm2 (*)
from logic
terminals
(see
previous
diagram)
Cross sections
dependent
on power
demand; but min.
0.5 mm2 (*)
PE
DG
EZ
E
A
PU
ZE602
ZE603
ZE601
230V
W1
N1
PE
Speicher
NT
Poss.PLCvariant(PC600)
Panel 12"
monochrome
6
4
PE
X22
6
4
MTB1 I/O
230 V
24V
W1
N1
PE
X10
0V
PE
Special connection cable

Coaxial cable X22
(see section Operating panels")
230 V
W1
N1
PE
Panel
14" colour
MTB1 I/O
PS75
I/O24/0.2
SERVOi
SERVOi
PE
X22
X10
24V
Cross sections
dependant on power
demand, but min.
1.5 mm2 (*)
Length: max. 2 m.
Twisted leads
X10
X10
X31 (**)
0V
X31 (**)
X10
X22 CP/MEM5
Poss.CNCvariant
24V
PE
0V
3
24 V=
24V
(*)
3
0V
PE
1
1
220
(**)
0.5 mm@, to 4 m
0.75 mm@, to 6 m
1.5 mm@, to 20 m
Over 20 m requires separate power
supply module at location!
The power supply to X31 may be lost if
the fast inputs/outputs of the servo
card are not used.
Twist the power supply leads!
2.7.6
CC220
Notes on switch cabinet construction

All drive components must be assembled in a separate, fully enclosed switch cabi
net compartment in order to fulfil radio interference suppression requirements in
compliance with VDE 0871 / 0875 (see SERVODYN connection conditions" for
further information). The starting circuit and the potentialfree 24 V logic power sup
ply module which may be required for the operation of the TC module must also be
installed in this compartment. The enable signal must be transmitted via a relay in
order to implement the required electrical isolation to the 24 V load power supply
module. This relay must also be assembled in the drive components compartment.
A minimum distance of 10 cm between the power cables and the control leads run
ning parallel must be maintained when arranging the cabling.
Screened cables must be used for setpoint, tacho and encoder leads. They must
be installed at a distance of min. 10 cm from motor or supply cables.
PE bars should preferably be conductive and mounted on the mounting plate.
Insulated PE bars must be connected to the mounting plate at both ends with max.
20 cm copper strips.
The PE bars must be arranged in such a way that the length of outgoing PE conduc
tor leads to the individual modules does not exceed 1 m.
The 0 V load terminal strip must be insulated. A minimum distance of 10 cm to the
power cables must be maintained when arranging the cabling.
The 24 V load terminal strip must be insulated. A minimum distance of 10 cm to the
power cables must be maintained when arranging the cabling.
221
Fieldserviceconditions
2.8
CC220
Field service conditions

The following data is valid for NC system components unless specified otherwise in
the individual sections:
Temperatures
Storage temperatures:
25 C to +70 C.
Ambient temperature:
+5 C to +55 C.
Ambient temperature data is valid for precisely defined installation positions and
locations. The respective installation specifications for individual units may be
found in the chapter Installation".
The ambient temperature may drop to 0 C when the control is switched on. Tem
perature gradients of up to 3 C per minute are permissible.
Humidity
Class F to DIN 40 040.
Limits of relative humidity are 50% at 40 C and 90% at 20 C. The control system
must not be exposed to moisture condensation.
Protection standards
12" monochrome panel:
14" colour panel:
Card rack (6 and 8):
MTB1 I/O:
Keyboard with drawer:
Digital handwheel:

IP 20, provided for switch cabinet installation
to IP 54
IP 20
IP 40 when drawer open, otherwise IP 54
Front side IP 65, rear side IP 50
Mechanical strength
a)
Vibration test
Stress on 3 axes offset at 90 to one another
Test conditions
Frequency range:
Amplitude excursion from 1057 Hz:
Amplitude of acceleration from 57150 Hz:
Test duration per axis:
Frequency traverse speed:
IEC 6826
10150 Hz
0.075 mm
1g
10 frequency cycles
1 octave/min
b)
Shock testing
IEC 68227
Shock strain with 3 shocks in each positive and negative main axis direction.
Test conditions
Pulse strength
15 g
Pulse duration:
11 ms
Pulse type:
Halfsinusoidal
c)
Transport shaking test to Bosch guidelines
222
N42 AP 450
Fieldserviceconditions
CC220
Corrosive influences
The ambient air must be free from conductive impurities (e.g. acids, caustics, cor
rosive agents, salts, metallic vapours, etc.). Suitable filters should be installed at air
inlets if necessary and checked during maintenance.
Electromagnetic influences
Strong electromagnetic fields must not arise near the system.
Interference immunity
a)
Static discharge to IEC 8012, severity 3 (issue 9/87).
b)
Mainsborne disturbances of the supply voltage to IEC 8014, severity 3

(issue 88).
c)
Nonmainsborne disturbances to IEC 8013 (issue 2/88).

Test field strength in frequency band 27500 MHz >10 V/m.
Contamination (EN 60 204, part 1 sec. 7.2.1 and 8.1.2)

Our builtin units require a dustfree environment. Casings and installation com
partments in which the devices are to be installed must conform to minimum en
closure class IP 54 to 40 050.
Air pressure
Operative up to 1000 m above sea level.
Marginal conditions (norms, provisions, guidelines, standards)
The control system is based on the following norms and guidelines:
Bosch Safety guidelines", issue 4, 11/91

EN 60 204 (IEC 204) (*) / VDE 0113 (issue 2/86)
VDE 0160 (*) (issue 5/88)
IEC 801 (interference definitions), (from which VDE 0843 is derived)
IEC 68 (mechanical strain)
Class F to DIN 40 040.
Protection standards to DIN 40 050 (incl. IP00, IP20, IP40, IP50, IP54, IP65).
Transport shaking test to Bosch norm N42 AP 450
Connection and operation of the control system to VDE 551
(*)
is not fully met. This specifically refers to:

Overvoltage protection to VDE 0160 : no test for system overvoltage pulse (200% UN)
Safety separation: only fulfilled for NC if transformers to DIN VDE 0551 are used.
223
Maintenance
2.9
CC220
Maintenance
The control electronics system, the adaptation cabinet and the mechanical com
ponents of a machine tool must be serviced at regular intervals in order to guaran
tee smooth operation. This section contains only those maintenance operations
required for the CNC.
CAUTION!
Unless otherwise stated, maintenance work must always be carried out when the
unit is switched off! If it is necessary to carry out measuring or testing operations on
an active unit, the existing safety and accident prevention regulations must be ob
served. A suitable electric tool must be used in any case!
Repairs or maintenance of CNC components may only be carried out by the Bosch
Service Department or by maintenance centres authorised by Bosch.
Only replacement parts and spares authorised by Bosch may be used.
!
!
Unauthorised opening or removal of CNC components or improperly carried out

repairs can result in death, physical injury or serious damage to equipment!
After removal or opening of casing or protective guards, or after opening the switch
cabinet it is possible that certain system components will be exposed which are live
and dangerous!
Emergency stop devices must remain operative in all unit modes. Deactivating the
emergency stop device must not initiate an uncontrolled or undefined restart of the
machine!
224
Maintenance
CC220
Operating panels
Screen surface: clean at least once a week with an antistatic cloth or window
cleaning agent containing alcohol.
CAUTION!
Do not use solvents (dilutions or similar)!
Screen brightness: adjust every six months with CNC switched on.
CAUTION!
Excessive brightness causes premature ageing" and burning" of the picture tube
(this invalidates the guarantee!).
Air filter mats (not present in all panels) :located at rear of panel; inspect for conta
mination at least quarterly. Contaminated filter mats reduce the air flow necessary
for cooling. If necessary, wash in soapy water.
CAUTION!
The fan impeller continues to run for a time after switching off the CNC! Never place
your hands inside the fan impeller. Do not place any objects in the fan impeller!
Only replace filter mats when completely dry.
Fan units: once annually check fan impeller at the rear of the panel for easy run
ning, when the unit is switched on (air flow).
CAUTION!
Rotating fan impeller! Never place your hands inside the fan impeller. Do not place
any objects in the fan impeller!
Note:
The 14" colour panel is equipped with an automatic fan unit at the rear side which
switches on only when the temperature exceeds 45 _C (5 C) in the direct vicinity
of the panel! The fan unit automatically switches off again if the temperature in the
direct vicinity of the panel drops below 35 _C (5 C).
Connector and terminal connections of panels: inspect annually.
Card rack
225
Maintenance
CC220
Connector and terminal connections of card racks: inspect annually.
Air filter mats and fan units: inspect at least once a year for contamination and
easy running of the fan units. Contaminated filter mats reduce the air flow necess
ary for cooling. For this reason, contaminated filter mats must be replaced or
washed in soapy water if necessary (order no.: 066796 for NC part; 066797 for PLC
part).
In card racks 1.05 the fan unit (filter supporting plate with ventilators) is located
beneath the plugin modules behind the cable duct.
The NC/PLC card rack or the NC/CL3 card rack has another fan unit beneath the
PLCI/O modules, in addition to the fan beneath the CNC modules (see diagram).
Fastening screws for

PLC fan unit cover
Fan units
CNC fan
unit
Fastening screws for
CNC fan unit
cover
Diagram: NC/PLC or NC/CL3 card rack; position of fan units
226
Maintenance
CC220
Procedure with CNC fan unit:

1.
Switch off unit.
2.
Loosen fastening screws (quickrelease screws) for cable duct and remove
cable duct.
3.
Carefully pull forwards the fan unit.

CAUTION!
Be careful not to damage any connection cables when removing the fan unit!
4.
Loosen the screw at the base of the fan unit and lift the filter mat holder.
5.
Replace old filter mats with new ones or wash old filter mats in soapy water.
CAUTION!
6.
Position filter mat holder and attach with screws.
7.
Position the fan unit in such a way that no objects can block the fan impellers
and there is an unimpeded view of the of the top of the fan unit with the fan
impellers. Switch on the CNC.
8.
Visually check that the fan impellers are turning.

CAUTION!
Rotating fan impellers! Never place your hands inside a fan impeller. Do not place
any objects in the fan impeller!
9.
Switch off CNC again. Wait for the fan impellers to come to rest.
10.
Carefully replace the fan unit in the corresponding card rack guide rails with
the filter side down and push back in.
CAUTION!
Be careful not to damage any connection cables when replacing the fan unit!
11.
Screw in cable duct.
227
Maintenance
CC220
Procedure with PLC fan unit:

1.
Switch off unit.
2.
Loosen the four screws of the cover. Remove cover.
3.
Loosen quickrelease screws of the filter supporting frame (with screwdriver

or coin; 1/4 turn to the left).
CAUTION!
4.
Push up filter supporting frame so far that the filter mat can be removed.
5.
Replace old filter mats with new ones or wash old filter mats in soapy water.
After washing return the filter mat again.
CAUTION!

Push in the quickrelease screw of the filter supporting frame.
6.
Screw on cover.
228
Maintenance
CC220
Module CP/MEM5
Change the buffer battery once a year. The battery must be changed immediately
when the error message CP/MEMBATTERY LOW" appears!
The battery may be changed within 5 minutes when the control system is
switched off (otherwise data may be lost)! The computer/memory module CP/
MEM4 must not be removed when changing the battery!
Battery type:
Order no.:
Alkaline battery, 4.5 V.

107 913 572.
Procedure: 1.
Switch off the control.

2. Remove the cover for EPROM
modules and battery compartment.
3. Remove EPROM module.
4. Remove empty battery and insert a fresh one.
Pay attention to polarity!
5. Reinsert EPROM module.
6. Screw on cover.
CAUTION!
Only use original replacement batteries! Used or rechargeable batteries must be
treated as special waste!
Batteries should not be forcibly opened, recharged, soldered or thrown into fire!
NCPLCWord3 module (word coupler card)

Change the buffer battery once a year. The battery must be changed immediately
when the error message WKBATTERY LOW" appears!
Change battery when the control system is switched on (otherwise data may be
lost)! The module NCPLCWord3 must not be removed when changing the bat
tery!
Battery type:
Order no.:
Lithium, TLQ 150, taper pin connection

046 800
Procedure:
1. Switch on control.
2. Shortcircuit new battery for approx. 2 secs.
3. Remove battery cover.
4. Remove empty battery and insert a fresh one.
Pay attention to polarity!
5. Screw on cover.
CAUTION!
Only use original replacement batteries! Used or rechargeable batteries must be
treated as special waste!
Batteries should not be forcibly opened, recharged, soldered or thrown into fire!
229
Maintenance
CC220
PLC modules
Please note that the batteries for PLC modules RAM600 and ZE60x must also be
changed annually! See PLC manual for information concerning battery change for
these modules.
230
Pluginmodules
Generalnotes
3.
CC220
Plugin modules
The modules described in this chapter are all intended for use in the card rack. The
chapter System configuration", section Card rack" contains information on poss
ible module combinations and which plugin modules can be connected to which
slots.
CAUTION!

31
Pluginmodules
CP/MEM5
CP/MEM5 Computer/memory module
Toggle switch S1
Write protection for EEPROM
BOSCH
CNC
S
1
I
O
S
2
Rotary switch S2
Switch for internal test purposes
(Setting 1 = normal operation)
EPROM
MODULE
Battery
Buffer battery for data

in RAM memory
X
2
1
X
2
2
Power supply
24 V logic dc
(Connection X10. Weidmller
terminal strip with max.
cross section of 1.5 mm2
Install leads twisted)
X
1
0
V24.2
X
1
2
Serial data interface 1

V24 or 20 mA
(socket X11, SubD, 25pin)
Serial data interface 2

V24
RGB
X
1
1
V24.1/20mA
CP/MEM5
RGB signal output to colour

panel
(Socket X21, SubD, 15pin)
Panel
3.1
CC220
Connection to operating panel

(socket X22, SubD, 20pin with
integrated coaxial connector)
24V
24V
0V
0V
Identification of
processor module variants
FrontpanelCP/MEM5
CAUTION!
The computer/memory module and the modules contained may only be inserted
or removed when the control is switched off!
32
Pluginmodules
CP/MEM5
1.
2.
3.
4.
FRONTVIEW
1.
2.
3.
CC220
EPROM module with operation software.

EEPROM module 32k or 128k
Graphics module
Processor module 15 MHz with FPU or
30 MHz with FPU or
30 MHz with FPU and 2 MB RAM
4.
Modules on the CP/MEM5
Toggle switch S1
Write protection for EEPROM (1 = protection on).
Rotary switch S2
Switch for internal test purposes.
Buffer battery for data in RAM
The battery must be replaced once a year!
The battery voltage is checked automatically when the control is switched on, after
CLEAR LOGIC, after a reset (for PS75) and, when the control is on, every 24 hours.
The error message CP/MEM BATTERY LOW" is displayed if undervoltage is de
tected.
CAUTION!
If the control is switched off for longer than 5 minutes when the battery is empty, all
data in the RAM will be irrevocably lost!
When the battery dischages normally, the data in the RAM will be buffered for at
least 14 days after the error message has been displayed for the first time.
The CP/MEM5 has a capacitor for shortterm buffering (max. 5 minutes!) of data in
the RAM (e.g. for changing the battery when the control is switched off, or after re
moving the CP/MEM5).
Open battery cover to replace battery; the battery is held in place by means of a
retainer.
4.5 V alkaline battery, order no. 107 913 572
For information on changing batteries see chapter 2, section Maintenance".
33
Pluginmodules
CP/MEM5
CC220
Serial data interface 1 (connection X11)

V24/20mA interface for connection of a data terminal unit
Both interface variants (V24 and 20 mA) are wired on the socket.
The V24 interface transmits data in the same way as the 20 mA interface. The para
meterisation of the interface (baud rate, stop bits etc.) is implemented via machine
parameter set 5500 device selection" and the softkey SOFTWARE CONTROL
(handshake setting).
The following parameters are fixed: 7 data bits, EVEN parity, 1 start bit.
Variable parameters:
Baud rate 1109600 baud, 1/1.5/2 stop bits.
Software/hardware handshake.
When software handshake is set (XON/XOFF) the control transmits control char
acters to the coupled device at various operating stages (in additional to those
used for the handshake):
start data in:
<DC1>
abort data in using softkey ABORT:
<DC3>
abort data in via CONTROL RESET:
<DC3>
abort data in after timeout:
at least once <DC3>
abort data out via CONTROL RESET:
<DC4><DC3>
abort data out after timeout:
<DC4>
start of block during data out:
<DC2>
end of block during data out:
<DC4>
CONTROL RESET (read in/out not active):
<DC3>
If a connected device sends a DC3 whilst no data out is active at the CNC, the con
trol does not wait for a DC1 during a later data out start before beginning the trans
mission (this is different for operating panel interface X11 of the CC320!).
V24 interface
Level:
HIGH:
LOW:
Transmission rate:
Handshake:
Cable length:
Cable type:
+3 V to +9 V
3 V to 9 V.
Software or hardware handshake possible; adjustable
via softkey.
max. 15 m
screened cable, conductor cross section min. 0.14 mm2

TX
RX
DTR
DSR
Data Set Ready, HIGH signal indicates to the CNC that the
connected machine can accept data (corresponds to CTS signal in
standard computers).
GND
Screen
Signal Ground.
to CNC casing.
34
Pluginmodules
CP/MEM5
CC220
The CNC does not evaluate the CTS status circuit (pin 5)! The RTS (pin 4) is set
permanently to HIGH level on the CNC side!
tion may be found in the chapter System configuration", section
DNC interfaces"!
CP/MEM5
SocketX11
SubD25pin
<15m
Plug
Plug
TX
Data
RX
Data
DTR 20
Status
DSR
Status
GND
Peripheral
z.B.DCR
SubD25pin
3 RX
2 TX
6 DSR
20 DTR
7 GND
1 Screen
Screento
body
Use metal covers!
V24connectionbetweenCNCandperipheral(e.g.DCR)
CAUTION!

IMPORTANT
The operator at the CNC can select the handshake using the softkey SOFT
WARE CONTROL:
Hardware handshake:
softkey is displayed normally
Software handshake:
softkey is displayed in reverse video.
on the CNC side.
If software handshake is used, status leads to the external device do not need
to be wired. At times it may be necessary to bridge RTS with CTS and DTR
with DSR on the external device.
When connecting the Bosch DCR or Bosch MiniCass (mode 4), the control
must be set to hardware handshake for data out and data in (the softkey
SOFTWARE CONTROL is not displayed in reverse video).
nection must not exceed 15 m. Either suitable repeaters or the 20mA inter
face must be used if these lengths need to be exceeded.
vice ensured).
35
Pluginmodules
CP/MEM5
CC220

Level
HIGH:
LOW:
Transmission rate:
Power supply of
the driving device:
Handshake:
Cable type:
min.

approx. 0 mA (max. 3 mA)
3.5 V
max. 3.5 V
max. 12 V
Software or hardware handshake
possible; adjustable via softkey.
max. 100 m
max. 50 m
screened cable, conductor cross section
0.14 mm2

TX+, TX
RX+, RX
DTR+, DTR
DSR+, DSR Data Set Ready, HIGH signal indicates to the CNC that the
connected machine can accept data (corresponds to CTS signal
GND
Screen
Signal ground.
contact to CNC casing.
the other as the passive (active: device acts as source). The 20mA interface be
tion may be found in the chapter System configuration", section DNC inter
faces"!
CAUTION!

36
Pluginmodules
CP/MEM5
CP/MEM5
SocketX11
SubD25pin
RX+
22
RX
12
TX+
23
TX
13
CC220
<50m
Plug
Plug
Peripheral
Socket
SubD25pin
TX+
TX
Data
RX+
Data
RX
DTR+
DSR+ 11
Status
DTR
DSR 14
DTR+ 19
DSR+
Status
DSR
DTR 16
Screentobody
Screentobody
Use metal covers!
20 mA passive (interface of connected device acts as power source)
CP/MEM5
SocketX11
SubD25pin
RX+
12
RX
24
TX+
13
TX
<100m
Plug
Plug
Data
TX+
TX
RX+
Data
25
RX
DTR+
DSR+ 14
Status
DSR 18
DTR+ 16
Status
DTR 21
Activein
Activeout
Peripheral
Socket
SubD25pin
DTR
DSR+
DSR
9
10
Screentobody
Screentobody
Use metal covers!
20 mA active (interface of CP/MEM4 acts as source)
IMPORTANT
The operator at the CNC can select the handshake using the softkey SOFT
WARE CONTROL:
Hardware handshake:
softkey is displayed normally
Software handshake:
softkey is displayed in reverse video.
No handshake is supported at baud rates < 600 baud on the CNC side!
If software handshake is used, it may be necessary at X11 to bridge pin 14

with 18 (if interface is switched as active) or pin 14 with 18 and pin 11 with 10
(if interface is switched as passive).
When connecting the Bosch DCR or Bosch MiniCass (mode 4), the control
must be set to hardware handshake for data out and data in (the softkey
SOFTWARE CONTROL is not displayed in reverse video).

should not exceed 50 or 100 m. If the CNC is used as the driving device (20
mA active), a maximum cable length of 100 m is permitted. If the
37
Pluginmodules
CP/MEM5
CC220
peripheral interface is acting as the source (CNC: 20mA passive), the maxi
mum permitted length is 50 m. Suitable repeaters must be used if these
lengths are exceeded.
vice ensured).
Serial data interface 2 (connection X12)

V24 interface (socket X12, SubD, 25pin)
Technical data for V24 interface to X12: corresponds to V24 interface at X11. Note
that no 20 mA interface is available at X12!
38
Pluginmodules
CP/MEM5
CC220
Connection to panel
Interface CP/MEM panel (connection X22)
The cable contains the leads for the 24 V supply voltage to the panel, analog sig
nals and the serial signals of the keyboard. The video signal is also transmitted.
See chapter 1 Operating panels" for pin assignment and connection cables.
RGB signal (connection X21)
Incircuit link between CP/MEM5 and 14" colour panel.
See chapter 1 Operating panels" for pin assignment and connection cables.
Input voltage
Input voltage 24 V dc logic (connection X10)
Weidmller terminal strip for connection of 24 V= (logic dc). The power connection
must be installed twisted, directly from the logic power supply module
(PS 75).
This input voltage is led internally to the connection X22 and is available there as 24
V supply voltage for the panel logic. (panel logic). The fuse (M 4 A) is located at the
panel.
39
CC220
Pluginmodules
SERVOiservoloopinterface
3.2
SERVOi servo loop interface
3.2.1
Overview
The servo loop card is used to issue the analog set speed values and closes the position control circuit by evalu
ating the signals of the connected position measuring systems. The card also facilitates fast input/output of digi
tal signals.
The servo icard is available in various hardware versions, which differ in the number of measuring system inputs
and setpoint outputs. Integrated EXEs are also available.
SERVO 6i
6 measuring system inputs
7 analog setpoint outputs
SERVO 4i
3 measuring system inputs
Servo i EXE3/3S
3 measuring system inputs with EXE
BOSCH
CNC
Measuring system input 1st axis

Measuring system input 4th axis

Measuring system input 2nd axis


Measuring system input 3rd axis


8way analog input (connector

X25, SubD, 15pin)
High Speed I/O

(connector X31, SubD, 25pin)
(in preparation)
Probe inputs
Probe switching voltage 5 V
Fast retract" input (connection X51)
Earth star points
Analog setpoint outputs 67

(connection X22)
6
Screen connections
Analog setpoint outputs 15
(Connection X21)
1
SERVO6i
Front view SERVO 6i with analog setpoint outputs
310
Pluginmodules
CC220
CAUTION!
The servo loop module SERVO i and all connected modules may only be inserted
or removed when the control is switched off!
FRONTVIEW
1. Processor module 15 MHz or 25 MHz

2. Setpoint module Analog out 4 or
Analog out 7
1.
2.
311
CC220
Pluginmodules
3.2.2
Measuring system inputs (socket X11 to X16)
(X14 to X16 optional)
Both encoders for direct connection as well as encoders with pulseforming elec
tronics (EXE) can be connected to the measuring system inputs. The SERVO i with
integrated EXE (on 3 axes) has been available since 1993. This makes possible the
direct connection of encoders which would normally be connected via an external
EXE to the CNC (for connection conditions see section Measuring system inputs
with integrated EXE").
A digital handwheel can also be connected (see section Connecting a digital
handwheel"). The connection conditions stipulated by the manufacturer for cable
length and installation must be observed. The power supply of a directly connected
encoder or an EXE with an external 5 V supply is implemented via the measuring
system input socket.
The following data applies in general for SERVO i measuring system inputs (with
out integrated EXE):
Max. permiss. cable length/input: 50 m or manufacturers specification.
Max. permissible cable length
difference at all inputs:
15 m
Cable type:
Special cable NFS 7264
10 x 0.14 mm2 + 4 x 0.5 mm2
(not for trailing cable operation!)
Signal inputs:
Differential line receiver
Ri = 120 W
Input signals:
A, B, R, Uas , A, B, R (TTL level);
min. voltage difference between
Pulse multiplication:
Max. permiss. input frequency:

Encoder/EXE voltage supply:
Max. power input of all
encoder/EXEs connected to CNC:
A and A, B and B, R and R>

=600 mV
Quadrupling of input frequency
(quad slope evaluation)
800 kHz
+5 V
1.5 A
The signal lines of the measuring systems must be connected exactly in accord
ance with these connection conditions. Switching the signal wires to change the
direction is not permissible due to the coding of the reset pulse! A change of
direction can be implemented with the software by means of machine parameters.
Directionofmeasurement
a
Positive
Negative
a
b a
Positive
b
A/Ua1
A/Ua1
B/Ua2
B/Ua2
R/Ua0
R/Ua0
c
c
Bothcircuitconditionsarepermissible
312
a
b
c
> 250ns
=
> 0ns
=
> 100ns
=
Pluginmodules
CC220
Permissible digital measuring systems

NOTE:
The section Measuring system inputs with integrated EXE" contains information
on permissible measuring systems for connecting the SERVOi with integrated
EXE to the measuring system inputs.
In general, Heidenhain and Stegmann rotary encoders for direct connection can
be fitted subject to the following conditions:
5 V encoder power supply
Squarewave signal output
Line driver to RS 485 or RS 422
Encoder power input < 250 mA
Min. flank clearance between active counting pulses >
= 250 ns
Heidenhain EXEs can also be fitted subject to the following conditions:
5 V or external 230 V power supply
Squarewave signal output
Line driver to RS 485 or RS 422
Max. encoder and EXE power input at 5 V supply: < 350 mA
Min. flank clearance between active counting pulses >
= 250 ns
Owing to frequent modifications and the increasing number of models, the follow
ing list of measuring systems should be regarded as a guide only. Other measuring
systems are available on request.
Rotary measuring systems
If the ROD encoder is supplied by Bosch, its cable (0.5 m) is provided with a
round plug of the Souriau" type. The encoder cable from NC controllers to
the ROD encoder can be supplied by Bosch fully assembled in the lengths
5 m, 8 m, 16 m, 25 m, 35 m or 50 m. At the NC end it contains a 15pin subD
connector, and at the encoder end it contains a 12pin Souriau" round socket.
Rotary encoder for direct connection: ROD 420 (Heidenhain)

ROD 426
"
ROD 428
"
DG 60 D (Stegmann)
DG 90 D
"
DG 100 D
"
Recommended rotary encoder for direct connection:
ROD 428
DG 60 D
Rotary encoder for connection via

EXE 604 C, EXE 605 C:
Rotary encoder for connection via

EXE 702, EXE 816:
313
ROD 250 (Heidenhain)

ROD 450
"
ROD 456
"
ROD 700
"
ROD 800
"
ROD 800 (Heidenhain)
Pluginmodules
CC220
Linear measuring systems

Linear measuring systems for direct connection:
LS 323 (Heidenhain)
LS 623
"
Linear scales for connection via
EXE 604 C, EXE 605 C, EXE 610,
EXE 801, EXE 802, EXE 803,
EXE 804, EXE 805, EXE 813:
LS 403 (Heidenhain)
LS 703
"
LS 707
"
LS 903
"
Linear scales for connection via
EXE 808, EXE 816:
LS 300 (Heidenhain)
LIDA 325 "
Distance coded measuring systems
Rotary encoder:
Linear scales:
TE 60 (Stegmann)
LIP 101 A (Heidenhain)
LS xxx C
"
Angular position measuring systems: ROD 250 C
"
Recommended pulse shaper electronic systems (EXE)

If the available EXEs with an external 5V supply, we recommend:
EXE 604 C (Heidenhain)
It is preferable, however, to use EXEs with their own 230 V power supply.
Recommendation for pulse shaper electronic system (EXE) and encoder
For rotary encoders with direct connection or EXEs, we recommend using those
with no capacative connection between 0V of the supply voltage and the housing
(e.g. ROD 428, EXE 604 C). This reduces susceptibility to interference.
CAUTION!
If using several SERVO is, the total power input (at 5V supply) of all encoders
and EXEs connected to the CNC must not exceed 1.5 A!
Total power input (at 5 V supply) of all encoders and EXEs connected to an
individual SERVO i: max. 1.5 A!
If using an EXE or an encoder for direct connection with Uas signal, the cor
rect wiring of the Uas signal to the CNC must be checked!
IMPORTANT
The SERVO i detects a measuring system error both from the Uas input signal
and when the connected encoder/EXE switch their output stages to the tris
tate condition (highresistance) (e.g. for EXE 604 C and ROD 428).
The encoder supply voltage must be +5 V+/5% for all connected encoders
and permitted cable lengths (directly at encoder input).
Open Uas inputs are set to HIGH potential by internal pullup resistors (= no
measuring system error present).
314
CC220
Pluginmodules
Terminal assignments
The cable screen must have a continuous connection from the front panel of the
SERVO i (earthing star connections) to the measuring system.
Heidenhain rotary encoders
CAUTION!
Pin assignment only applies to cables and encoders supplied by BOSCH!
Socket
X11X16
Cable
(10 x 0.14 mm2 + 4 x 0.5 mm2)
Encoder
signaloutput
Use metal covers

A/Ua1
A/Ua1
B/Ua2
B/Ua2
R/Ua0
R/Ua0
Uas
+5V
max.1m
1ws/ge
0.14
br
2gn
0.14
gn
3gr
0.14
gr
4rs
0.14
rs
5br
0.5
bl
6ws
0.14
rt
Ua0
7ws/gr
0.14
sw
Ua0
8vio
0.14
vio
9rt
0.5
br
Uas
+5V
10sw
0.5
10
10
ws
11
11
12
12
10
0V
Measuring
system
12
12bl
0.5
ws
Ua1
Ua1
Ua2
Ua2
Sensor+5V
Sensor0V
0V

ConnectionmadebymetalbodyofsubDplug
andpin11oftheSouriausocket
max.50m
315
Pluginmodules
CC220
Stegmann rotary encoders.

CAUTION!
When using the BOSCH cable, only the housing type 1" with a cable tail of 0.5 m
is permissible for the encoder. A 12pin Souriau" type round connector must then
be fitted to the encoder by the user in accordance with the following pin assign
ment:
Socket
X11X16
Cable
(10 x 0.14 mm2 + 4 x 0.5 mm2)
Use metal covers

A/Ua1
A/Ua1
B/Ua2
B/Ua2
R/Ua0
R/Ua0
Uas
+5V
Encoder
signaloutput
Measuring
system
max.1m
1ws/ge
0.14
ws
2gn
0.14
br
3gr
0.14
rs
K2
4rs
0.14
sw
K2
5br
0.5
6ws
0.14
li
K0
7ws/gr
0.14
ge
K0
8vio
0.14
gn
9rt
0.5
rt
ALARM
Us
10sw
0.5
10
10
K1
K1
11
0V
12
12bl
0.5
12
bl
0V

ConnectionmadebymetalbodyofthesubDplug
max.50m
CAUTION!
When using a type DG60KTB Stegmann encoder (with flange connection), the
connection cable between the encoder and the SERVOi must be adapted accord
ing to both the plug connector at the encoder (Interconectron, order no.: 065 615)
and the pin assignment, as shown in the following diagram:
Cable (10 x 0.14 mm2 + 4 x 0.5 mm2)
Use metal covers
Socket
X11X16
A/Ua1
A/Ua1
B/Ua2
B/Ua2
R/Ua0
R/Ua0
Uas
+5V
0V
Measuring
system
1ws/ge
0.14
2gn
0.14
3gr
0.14
K2
4rs
0.14
K2
5br
0.5
12
Us
6ws
0.14
K0
7ws/gr
0.14
K0
9rt
0.5
10
10sw
0.5
10
12
12bl
0.5
11
K1
K1
8
9
0V
0V

ConnectionmadebymetalbodyofthesubDplug
max.50m
316
CC220
Pluginmodules
Heidenhain rotary encoder with pulse shaper electronics (EXE)

The connection cables from EXE to the measuring system are supplied by Heiden
hain.
CAUTION!
When using an EXE, the correct wiring of the Uas signal must be checked!
Pin assignment only applies to cables and EXEs supplied by BOSCH!
Socket
X11X16
EXE(5V)
Cable
(10 x 0.14 mm2 + 4 x 0.5 mm2)
Signal
output
Measuring
system
Use metal covers

A/Ua1
A/Ua1
B/Ua2
B/Ua2
R/Ua0
R/Ua0
Uas
+5V
1ws/ge
0.14
2gn
0.14
3gr
0.14
4rs
0.14
5br
0.5
6ws
0.14
7ws/gr
0.14
8vio
0.14
9rt
0.5
10
10sw
0.5
10

Ua1
Ie1+
Ua1
Ie1
Ua2
Ie2+
Ua2
Ie2
Sensor+5V
Ua0
Ie0+
Ua0
Ie0
Uas
+5V
Sensor0V
11
0V
12
+5V
+5V
12bl
0.5
Screen
12
0V
0V
0V
Connectionmadeby
metalbodyofthesubD
plugandpin11ofthe
Souriausocket
Socket
X11X16
EXE(230V)
Cable
(10 x 0.14 mm2 + 4 x 0.5 mm2)
Signal
output
Measuring
system
Use metal covers

A/Ua1
A/Ua1
B/Ua2
B/Ua2
R/Ua0
R/Ua0
Uas
+5V
1ws/ge
0.14
2gn
0.14
3gr
0.14
4rs
0.14
5br
0.5
6ws
0.14
7ws/gr
0.14
8vio
0.14
9rt
0.5
10
10sw
0.5
10
12
12bl
0.5

Ua1
Ie1+
Ua1
Ie1
Ua2
Ie2+
Ua2
Ie2
Ua0
Ie0+
Ua0
Ie0
Uas
11
0V
Screen
12
0V
Connectionmadeby
metalbodyofthesubD
plugandpin11ofthe
Souriausocket
317
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
Pluginmodules
CC220
Servo measuring system cable (ROD)
Connector, subD, 15pin
Socket, Souriau type, 12pin
Strainrelief clamp
Screen clamp on metal housing
Cable: LY 10 x 0.14 + 4 x 0.5 (max. cable length 50 m)

Not suitable for trailing cable operation!
Pin assignment
Colour
SubD connector
Souriau socket
whiteyellow
green
grey
pink
brown 0.52
white
whitegrey
violet
red 0.52
black 0.52
blue 0.52
Screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
Plug
housing
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
11
Type
No.
Readyassembled cable length 5 m

Single parts:
Cable 10 x 0.14 + 4 x 0.52
Dplug, 15pin
Metal cover for 15pin. Dplug
Socket 12 pin. Souriau
Accessory kit for Souriau socket
048 662
048 663
048 664
048 665
048 666
048 667
318
903 499
904 440
913 724
909 131
909 688
CC220
Pluginmodules
Measuring system inputs with integrated EXE

Encoders with sinusoidal output signals (Heidenhain quasi standard, 11mAss) can
be connected to measuring system inputs with integrated EXE.
Owing to frequent modifications and the increasing number of models, it is not
possible to provide a complete list of possible measuring systems. The encoders
given in the section Permissible digital measuring systems" for connection via
EXEs should also be regarded as a general recommendation. Other measuring
systems are available on request.
The following data applies in general for SERVO i measuring system inputs with
integrated EXE:
Cable type:
Max. permiss. cable length/input:
Max. permissible cable length
difference at all inputs:
Encoder power supply:
Max. power input of all
encoder/EXEs connected to CNC:
Signal multiplication
SERVOi
socket
measuringsysteminput
withintegratedEXE
Heidenhain cable, identity no. 244 955 01

30 m or manufacturers specification.
15 m
50 kHz
+5 V
1.5 A
5way
Cable
Measuring
system
(3 x (2 x 0.14 mm2) + 2 x 1.0 mm2)
Use metal covers
1gn
0.14
2ge
0.14
3bl
0.14
Ie2
4rt
0.14
Ie0+
6gr
0.14
Ie0
7rs
0.14
+5V
5br
inner
screen
0V
12
Ie1+
Ie1
Ie2+
10
12
+5V
10we
0V
Connectionmadebymetal
bodyof15pinSubDplug
Connectionmadeby
metalbodyof9pin
coupling
max.30m
CAUTION!
The 9pin coupling at the measuring system end (Heidenhain identity no. 228 562
01/237 525 04) and the 15pin subD connector at the CNC end must be fitted by
the user according to the pin assignment above.
Metal connector covers must be used! Cable screening must have largesurface
contact with the strainrelief clamp!
319
CC220
Pluginmodules
Connection to digital handwheel

The digital handwheel (order no. 069 167) can be connected to any measuring sys
tem input at the SERVO i (X11 to X16). This input must be fixed using machine para
meters P 9511 and P 9512.
The digital handwheel is effective for synchronous machining axes as well as
asynchronous auxiliary axes (exception: spindle axes or ANALOG axes).
Various cables can be used for the digital handwheel connection, but they must
always be screened:
Cable
min/max permissible cable lengths
7 x 0.14 mm2
2 m / 14 m
4 m / 24 m
7 x 0.25 mm2
5 m / 33 m
7 x 0.34 mm2
7 x 0.5 mm27 m / 50 m
11 m / 50 m
7 x 0.75 mm2
Remarks
Order no. 070/908558
*
*
*
* = These cables are only suitable in certain cases, as the cable connection to the
9pin subD socket (at the digital handwheel) is problematic due to the size of the
cable diameter.
Socket
X11X16
(SubD15pin)
Cable
(7 x 0.14 mm2)
Digitalhandwheel
(SubDplug,9pin)
Use metal covers

A/Ua1
A/Ua1
B/Ua2
B/Ua2
R/Ua0
R/Ua0
Uas
+5V
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
+5V
0.14
0V
510Ohm,
0.25Watt
7
8
9
10
0V
12

Connectionmadebymetalbocyof
subDplugconnection
min.2m
max.14m
The power supply of the digital handwheel (Uhandwheel = 5 V +/ 5%, Ihandwheel =

200 mA) is provided via the SERVO i measuring system input.
Note:
Open Uas inputs (pin 8) at X11 to 16 are set to HIGH potential by internal
pullup resistors (= no measuring system error present).
320
Pluginmodules
CC220
CAUTION!
The cable screen must have a continuous connection from the front panel of
the SERVO i (earthing star connections) to the handwheel.
The resistor R (510 W, 0.25 W) prevents overloading of the receiver and there
fore must be used.
The total power input (at 5 V supply) of all encoders, EXEs and handwheels
connected to the CNC must not exceed 1.5 A! The total power input (at 5 V
supply) of all encoders, EXEs and handwheels connected to an individual
SERVO i must not exceed 1.5 A!
The encoder/handwheel supply voltage must be +5 V+/5% for all con
nected encoders/handwheels and permitted cable lengths (directly at en
coder input or handwheel supply voltage input).
The handwheel must be fixed. It must not be pluggable or switchable.
321
CC220
Pluginmodules
3.2.3
8way analog input (connector X25)
(in preparation)
These 8multiplexed inputs can be used to digitise analog voltage signals with a
max. input frequency of approx. 10 Hz (8 bit resolution).
The following data applies in general for the SERVO analog input:
Max. permiss. cable length/input:
50 m (with 8 bit resolution)
Cable type:
Belden
Number of input channels:
Max. internal resistance of the

input voltage source:
10 kW
Max. permiss. input voltage:
+10.2 V

with CNC on:
+10 V
Input voltage range

nominal:
0 V to 10 V
10 Hz
Conversion resolution nominal:
8 bit
Increment voltage 8 bit:
39.2 mV
Conversion time:
35 ms
Linearity error:
+/
Min. resolution without missing

codes:
12 bit
Offset:
+/
Full Scale Calibration Error:
25 mV
Changeover time for channel change: max. 15 ms
Connector
X25
(SubD,15pin)
Channel1
Channel2
Channel3
Channel4
Channel5
Channel6
Channel7
Channel8
LSB
Cable
(Belden)
max.50m
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
4
6
GND
LSB
8
10
12
14
Use metal covers
322
Analogsignal1 (0to10V)
AnalogsignalGND
AnalogsignalGND
AnalogsignalGND
AnalogsignalGND
AnalogsignalGND
AnalogsignalGND
AnalogsignalGND
Connectionmadebymetalbocyof
thesubDplugconnectionorthe
screenconnectionattheSERVOifrontpanel
Pluginmodules
CC220
High Speed I/O (connector X31)

The High Speed ports of the SERVO i can be assigned to the individual signals at
will. Refer to the manual Machine parameters", parameters P 9504 to P 9509 for
information on which signals can be assigned to the individual ports.
Inputs
In contrast to standard digital interfaces, the control reacts to a signal to the fast
inputs within the interpolation time set in P9901 at the latest.
In the case of input signals which may directly influence axis traversing (e.g. pro
bes), the max. response time is 2 x P9901.
Exception: response time FEED HOLD: P 9901
In this way, for example, the signal FEED HOLD may be assigned to one of the HS
inputs for safety shutdowns (see also machine parameters P 9504 to 9506). LOW
level at the relevant input brings about the Feed hold".
The following data should be observed for the HS inputs of the Servo i.
The input signals must be interferencesuppressed and bouncefree.
All inputs are metallically separated from the logic voltage via optical
couplers.
Threshold voltage for transition

from LOW to HIGH level:
+8.5 V, +/1 V
Hysteresis for transition

from HIGH to LOW level:
1 V, +/0.5 V
3 V to +32 V
An open input is recognised as logical 0".
Input current/input:
Screened cables must be used.
max. 8 mA,
+/1
mA
Outputs
A maximum of 9 fast output signals in the 24V level may be transferred via optical
couplers to the interface unit (PLC). The control reacts to an event within the time
2 x P9901 with HIGH level at the relevant output.
Caution!
Safetycritical signals must be looped via EMERGENCY STOP"!
!
!
If the READY2 contact opens, the outputs retain their last applicable value! They
are not set to logical 0".
323
Pluginmodules
CC220
The following can be output via the HS outputs:
4 electronic limit switches (see machine parameters P 6201 to

P 6204),
2 inposition signals (special case),
2 special signals RAISE" and LOWER" (see P 6403 and

P 6404),
2 spindle signals CONTROLLED SPINDLE STOP" and SPINDLE

RESOLUTION CHANGEOVER".
For assignment of signals to outputs see manual Machine parameters", P 9507 to

P 9509. For signal descriptions see chapter Digital interface, other signals" (part
two of this manual).
The following should be considered for SERVO i High Speed outputs:
Screened cables should be used.
Output current/output: max. 100 mA (for continuous operation)

max. 300 mA (for 20 ms at 10 Hz)
The output stages are permanently shortcircuit proof. In an overloaded

condition (the permissible power loss is exceeded), the outputs are deener
gised by a temperature monitor and automatically reenergised when the
service temperature falls back to within the maximum limit.
Internal voltage drop at

rated current:
max. 2 V
No active LOW level is output. LOW potential must be generated by external

load resistors.
All outputs are highresistance after a RESET.
Power supply of the High Speed I/O

The power supply is external via input X31 from the 24 V load supply (see chapter
Electrical connections" for information on the 24 V load supply).
The module is protected against damage in the case of incorrect polarity of
the supply voltage. This can however cause malfunction!
The status of the external voltage source is monitored (threshold: 14V, 1 V).
If the High Speed I/O signals are not used, X31 does not require a power sup
ply.
324
Pluginmodules
CC220
*Distributorcable
NCfrontpanel
ConnectorX31
(subD25pin)
(36 x 0.14 or
single core 0.25)
max.2m
Interfacecable
(single
core
screened)
0.25,
max.50m
HSIn1
HSIn2
HSIn3
HSIn4
HSIn5
HSIn6
HSIn7
HSIn8
HSIn9
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15
10
HSOut1
HSOut2
HSOut3
HSOut4
HSOut5
HSOut6
HSOut7
HSOut8
HSOut9
11
12
24
23
22
21
20
19
1
14
Twist
leads!
13
0VLast
25
ScreenconnectionsatSERVOfront
panelorviametalbodyofsubD
plugconnection
Metalbodyofplug
connectioninPLC
cabinet
*=distributorcablenotneededwheninterfacecablesaredirectlyconnectedtotheCNC
325
+24V
Last
Pluginmodules
3.2.4
CC220
Probe inputs / 5 V probe power supply (connection X51)

At connection X51 there are 2 inputs (24 V DC, 5 V DC) for switching probes (desig
nation on front panel: Pr"). Internally both inputs are linked via an OR function.
The evaluation of the probe signal can be set using machine parameter P 9908
(triggering on positive edge, negative edge, both edges or no evaluation
possible).
In addition a switching voltage for a 5 V probe is available (load carrying capacity:
max. 10 mA). This voltage can be switched from the switch contact of a probe and
be returned to the control at the 5 V DC probe input.
Caution!
When using several SERVO is, the probe signal must be fed to all probe inputs of
those SERVO icards which operate synchronous axes!
The following should be observed in general for probe inputs of the SERVO i:
The input signals must be interferencesuppressed and bouncefree.
Screened lines must be used.
An open input is recognised as logical 0".
All inputs are metallically separated from the logic voltage via optical
couplers.
24 V probe input
HIGH level:
LOW level:
Nominal input current (at 24 V):
Typical switching threshold:
5 V probe input
HIGH level:
LOW level:
Nominal input current (at 5 V):
Typical switching threshold:
0V
+17 to +32 V
3 to +5 V (or open input)
8 mA
230V
+6 V
+4 to +6 V
3 to +0.8 V (or open input)
8 mA
+3 V
Connection
X51
1
24Vprobeinput
5Vprobeinput
0Vload
2
3
4
5Vvoltagesupplyforprobe(max.10mA)
0V
5
6
7
8
Screenconnectionat
Servofrontpanel
326
CC220
Pluginmodules
Connection examples for probes

24 V probe
5 V probe
Floatingcontact,5Vswitched
internal5Vvoltageused
Floatingcontact
24Vswitched
Terminal block (*)
MT
3
4
5
MT
3
(*): Connect terminal block
close to cable bushing at
24Vload switch cabinet.
4
5
0Vload
Driveroutput
24Vswitched
Driveroutput
5Vswitched
MT
MT
24Vload
5Vexternal
0Vload
0Vexternal
Opencollector"output
0Vswitched(5Vinternal)
1
Screenconnectionsat
Servofrontpanel
(taperpin)
2
3
4
MT
Floatingcontact
24Vand5Vswitched
MT
1
24Vload
5Vexternal(*)
0Vload
4
5
(*): Potential connection to 0 V load
327
Pluginmodules
CC220
Fast retract" input (connection X51)

The fast retract input is located at connection X51 and is designated on the front
panel of the SERVO i by Em" (Emergency In).
A positive edge at this input (HIGH level: +24 V) initiates the processing of informa
tion in the programmed G98 or G33 record. This information can include an incre
mental retract movement from the contour.
The currently active program is interrupted abruptly. The CNC executes the G98 or
G33 information not later than the time set in machine parameter P 9901.
Safetycritical functions can thus be performed in conjunction with an external
monitoring logic (e.g. in the event of tool failure).
Caution!
Where a number of SERVO is are fitted, only the Fast retract" input is evaluated on
the first SERVO i (from the left).
The following data should be observed for the Fast retract" input of the Servo i:
Screened cables should be used.
The input signal must be interferencesuppressed and bouncefree.
The input is metallically separated from the logic voltage via optical couplers.
Threshold voltage for transition

from LOW to HIGH level:
+8.5 V, +/1 V
Hysteresis for transition

from HIGH to LOW level:
1 V, +/0.5 V
3 V to +32 V
Open input is interpreted as logical 0".
Input current:
max. 8 mA, +/1 mA
Terminal assignment
Connection
X51
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fastretract(24V,positiveslope)
0Vload
7
8
Screenconnectionat
Servofrontpanel
328
CC220
Pluginmodules
3.2.5
Analog setpoint outputs (connections X21 and X22)

Speedproportional voltages are available at these outputs to control the individual
axes. In this case the spindle is to be treated as an asynchronous axis (e.g. connec
tion to 7th set value output on SERVO 6i).
Caution!
The output stages of the SERVO i are permanently shortcircuit proof. If, however,
several outputs are shortcircuited, increased power loss can lead to destruction of
the output operational amplifiers.
The setpoint outputs are set to 0 V (analog GND) immediately if the READY2 con
tact opens. This level is guaranteed for 1 second at the most! For this reason the
drives must be switched off within 1 second!
The following should be observed in general for analog setpoint outputs of the
SERVO i:
Recommended cable type:
Belden 2 x 0.5 mm2 (876220)
Max. cable length:
50 m
The screen connection is dependent on the drives used (e.g. for Servodyn T:
connection on both sides).
Max. output voltage range:
13.3
Resolution (nom.):
0.4 mV
Output voltage (rapid):
10 V
The output voltages are potentialbound.
Permissible load resistance

at output:
min. 10 kW
The inputs on the drive amplifiers must be wired as differential amplifiers.
329
CC220
Pluginmodules
Terminal assignment
Connection
X22
max.50m
4
3
2
1
0V
7. Setpointoutput
+/10V
0V
6. Setpointoutput
+/10V
Screenconnectionat
Servofrontpanel
Connection
X21
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Screenconnectionat
Servofrontpanel
330
0V
+/10V
0V
+/10V
0V
+/10V
0V
+/10V
0V
+/10V
5. Setpointoutput
4. Setpointoutput
3. Setpointoutput
2. Setpointoutput
1. Setpointoutput
Pluginmodules
I/O24/0.2(withPIC250)
3.3
CC220
I/O 24/0.2 module with PIC 250 (digital I/O with integrated PLC)
There are 64 inputs and 40 outputs available for the machine and PLC. Using the
MTB1 I/O increases the number of inputs by a further 64 and outputs by a further 32.
A second I/O 24/0.2 module (without integrated PIC) can be connected in order to
extend the inputs and outputs (for possible slot see section Card rack").
The PIC 250 is a PLC in the form of an additional card which can be plugged onto
the I/O 24/0.2 module.
BOSCH
CNC
Digital outputs
E/A24/0.2
WriteProt.
0
1
Write protection PIC 250
Digital inputs
Digital inputs
24V
24V
0V
0V
V24
(optional)
(socket X32, SubD, 25pin;
currently unused)
Supply voltage
input for X11
(connection X10)
V24/20mA (EDNC/LSV2DNC)
(optional)
V24
V24/
20mA
Front view I/O 24/0.2
Caution!
The module must only be inserted or removed when the CNC is switched off!
331
Pluginmodules
CC220
PIC 250 data:

512 digital inputs
512 digital outputs
32 timers
8 counters
1024 markers
2k memory (EEPROM)
(4k or 8k optional)
The CNC interface is addressed with the PIC addresses

A0.0 to A31.7 (CNC inputs) and
E0.0 to E31.7 (CNC outputs),
the MTB I/O inputs/outputs with
A32.0 to A35.7 (MTB I/O outputs) and
E32.0 to E39.7 (MTB I/O inputs),
the outputs/inputs of the primary module I/O 24/0.2 (to which PIC 250 is con
nected) with
A36.0 to A40.7 (outputs) and
E40.0 to E47.7 (inputs),
the outputs/inputs of the secondary module I/O 24/0.2 (without PIC 250) with
A41.0 to A45.7 (outputs) and
E48.0 to E55.7 (inputs).
The section PLC couplings" contains further information on PIC 250.

Position 0:
Access to the PIC program is possible (editing, deleting). Only one nonactive PIC
program can be edited.
Position 1:
PIC 250 memory is locked against all write access.
Caution!
The write protection switch must be in position 0" when loading a

PIC program.
After commissioning the PIC program, write protection must always be acti
vated (position 1). If this is not done, for example, reloading the CNC operat
ing system at a later time could cause the PIC memory to be overwritten and
the PIC program to be lost!
332
Pluginmodules
CC220
Supply voltage input (connection X10)

24 VDC supply, +20% 15%; (Weidmller plugin terminal, MSTB 1.5, 4pin). Pola
rised supply voltage input for the digital outputs to X11. Supplied from an external
24 V load power supply module (see chapter Electrical connections"). Maximum
input current (to all outputs at HIGH level): 8.3A.
F 10 A
X10
24 V=
F1
24 V=
0V
0V
Power supply
from 24 V load power sup
ply module
IMAX = 8.3 A
Polarity protection
Caution!
Only use the recommended fuse type. Bridging the fuse is not permitted!
Digital outputs (connection X11)

(Socket, SubD, 50pin)
These outputs are driven by the internal PLC (PIC 250). They are freely assignable.
Signal assignment depends on the PLC program. 40 outputs are available. Specifi
cations of an output:
Nominal output voltage:
Max. internal voltage drop:
Nominal output current (HIGH level):
Max. output current (HIGH level):
Shortcircuit current of an output:
Max. Output leakage current (LOW level):
24 V
2V
200 mA
220 mA
250500 mA
0.1 mA
All outputs are set to LOW level during CNC system startup. Similarly, all outputs
are set to LOW level by pressing the RESET key at PS75 or by the RESET IN signal
at PS75.
Caution!
Corresponding freewheeling diodes must be wired parallel to the load when an

inductive load (relay) is connected to the outputs!
Since an output does not supply an active LOW level, an external load resis
tance (approx. 1kW) must be used at a highresistance seriesconnected
input.
Due to the particular, safetycritical relevance with regard to drive movements or
the evaluation of CNC digital I/Os, we would like to draw attention to the control
signal READY2 at this point (relay contact, see section PS75"): if the READY2
contact is open the control system is not ready!
333
Pluginmodules
CC220
The allocation between the PLC output addresses and output pins to X11 may be
derived from the following tables:
Primary module I/O 24/0.2 (with PIC 250):
ADDR
PIN
ADDR
PIN
ADDR
PIN
ADDR
PIN
ADDR PIN
ADDR
36.0
27
36.1
50
36.2
09
36.3
33
36.4
26
36.5
PIN
17
ADDR
36.6
PIN
08
ADDR
36.7
PIN
49
37.0
25
37.1
16
37.2
07
37.3
32
37.4
23
37.5
15
37.6
06
37.7
48
38.0
22
38.1
14
38.2
05
38.3
31
38.4
21
38.5
13
38.6
04
38.7
30
39.0
20
39.1
12
39.2
03
39.3
29
39.4
36
39.5
11
39.6
02
39.7
28
40.0
19
40.1
10
40.2
01
40.3
47
40.4
18
40.5
34
40.6
35
40.7
37
X11
Secondary module I/O 24/0.2 (without PIC 250):

ADDR
PIN
ADDR
PIN
ADDR
PIN
ADDR
PIN
ADDR PIN
ADDR
41.0
27
41.1
50
41.2
09
41.3
33
41.4
26
41.5
PIN
17
ADDR
41.6
PIN
08
ADDR
41.7
PIN
49
42.0
25
42.1
16
42.2
07
42.3
32
42.4
23
42.5
15
42.6
06
42.7
48
43.0
22
43.1
14
43.2
05
43.3
31
43.4
21
43.5
13
43.6
04
43.7
30 X11
44.0
20
44.1
12
44.2
03
44.3
29
44.4
36
44.5
11
44.6
02
44.7
28
45.0
19
45.1
10
45.2
01
45.3
47
45.4
18
45.5
34
45.6
35
45.7
37
Digital inputs (connections X21 and X22)

(X21: connector, SubD, 15pin; X22: connector, SubD, 50pin)
These inputs are interrogated by the internal PLC (PIC 250). Signal assignment de
pends on the PLC program. 64 inputs are available. The inputs are metallically sep
arated from the logic voltage via optical couplers.
Specifications of an input:
Input voltage range
LOW:
3 V to +5 V
HIGH:
+17 V to +32 V
Open inputs are recognised as logical LOW.
Input current:
max. 6 mA at HIGH level
Note:
Since the inputs are scanned, the input current fluctuates between 0 and
6 mA at HIGH level.
Caution!
The input suppressor circuit limits positive and negative interference volt
ages to 68 V.
However, if the input voltage is greater than 61 V and at the same time the
internal resistance of the input voltage source is static and less than 5 kW, the
input suppressor circuit may be damaged! The input circuit would then be
exposed to the full voltage present and could be damaged!
334
Pluginmodules
CC220
The allocation between the PLC input addresses and input pins to X21 and X22
may be derived from the following tables:
Primary module I/O 24/0.2 (with PIC 250):
ADDR
PIN
ADDR
PIN
ADDR
PIN
ADDR
PIN
ADDR PIN
ADDR
40.0
48
40.1
47
40.2
50
40.3
49
40.4
33
40.5
PIN
32
ADDR
40.6
PIN
17
ADDR
40.7
PIN
16
41.0
46
41.1
15
41.2
31
41.3
45
41.4
30
41.5
14
41.6
29
41.7
44
42.0
13
42.1
12
42.2
28
42.3
43
42.4
11
42.5
27
42.6
42
42.7
10
43.0
26
43.1
41
43.2
09
43.3
25
43.4
24
43.5
08
43.6
40
43.7
07
44.0
23
44.1
39
44.2
06
44.3
22
44.4
38
44.5
05
44.6
21
44.7
04
45.0
37
45.1
20
45.2
03
45.3
36
45.4
19
45.5
02
45.6
01
45.7
18
46.0
34
46.1
35
46.2
15
46.3
07
46.4
14
46.5
06
46.6
13
46.7
05
47.0
12
47.1
04
47.2
11
47.3
03
47.4
10
47.5
02
47.6
09
47.7
01
X22
X21
Secondary module I/O 24/0.2 (without PIC 250):

ADDR
PIN
ADDR
PIN
ADDR
PIN
ADDR
PIN
ADDR PIN
ADDR
48.0
48
48.1
47
48.2
50
48.3
49
48.4
33
48.5
PIN
32
ADDR
48.6
PIN
17
ADDR
48.7
PIN
16
49.0
46
49.1
15
49.2
31
49.3
45
49.4
30
49.5
14
49.6
29
49.7
44
50.0
13
50.1
12
50.2
28
50.3
43
50.4
11
50.5
27
50.6
42
50.7
10
51.0
26
51.1
41
51.2
09
51.3
25
51.4
24
51.5
08
51.6
40
51.7
07
52.0
23
52.1
39
52.2
06
52.3
22
52.4
38
52.5
05
52.6
21
52.7
04
53.0
37
53.1
20
53.2
03
53.3
36
53.4
19
53.5
02
53.6
01
53.7
18
54.0
34
54.1
35
54.2
15
54.3
07
54.4
14
54.5
06
54.6
13
54.7
05
55.0
12
55.1
04
55.2
11
55.3
03
55.4
10
55.5
02
55.6
09
55.7
01
X22
X21
DNC interface (optional) (connection X31)

(Socket, SubD, 25pin)
For terminal assignments see section DNC interfaces".
335
Pluginmodules
CC220
Interface cables
X11 (PIC 250 output signals)
Connector, SubD, 50pin
Terminal pin
2.5 m
400 mm
Stripped length: 4 mm
Strainrelief clamp
Pin assignment
Colour
white
brown
green
yellow
grey
pink
blue
red
black
violet
greypink
redblue
whitegreen
browngreen
whiteyellow
yellowbrown
whitegrey
Pin
Colour
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
greybrown
whitepink
pinkbrown
whiteblue
brownblue
whitered
brownred
whiteblack
brownblack
greygreen
yellowgrey
pinkgreen
yellowpink
greenblue
yellowblue
greenred
yellowred
336
Pin
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Colour
Pin
greenblack
yellowblack
greyblue
pinkblue
greyred
pinkred
greyblack
pinkblack
blueblack
redblack
whitebrownblack
yellowgreenblack
greypinkblack
redblueblack
whitegreenblack
browngreenblack
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Pluginmodules
CC220
X21 (PIC 250 input signals)
Socket, SubD, 15pin
Terminal pin
2.5 m
400 mm
Strainrelief clamp
Stripped length 4 mm
Pin assignment
Colour
white
brown
green
yellow
grey
pink
blue
red
black
violet
greypink
redblue
whitegreen
browngreen
whiteyellow
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
337
Pluginmodules
CC220
X22 (PIC 250 input signals)
Socket, SubD, 50pin
Terminal pin
2.5 m
400 mm
Stripped length: 4 mm
Strainrelief clamp
Pin assignment
Colour
white
brown
green
yellow
grey
pink
blue
red
black
violet
greypink
redblue
whitegreen
browngreen
whiteyellow
yellowbrown
whitegrey
Pin
Colour
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
greybrown
whitepink
pinkbrown
whiteblue
brownblue
whitered
brownred
whiteblack
brownblack
greygreen
yellowgrey
pinkgreen
yellowpink
greenblue
yellowblue
greenred
yellowred
Type
No.
I/O 24/0.2
I/O 24/0.2 with PIC250
I/O 24/0.2 with PIC250 and with
V24/20mA expansion card for DNC
Interface cable X11
Interface cable X21
Interface cable X22
068 347
068 349
338
068 357
048 034
048 033
048 032
Pin
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Colour
Pin
greenblack
yellowblack
greenblue
pinkblue
greyred
pinkred
greyblack
pinkblack
blueblack
redblack
whitebrownblack
yellowgreenblack
greypinkblack
redblueblack
whitegreenblack
browngreenblack
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Pluginmodules
NCPLCBit
3.4
CC220
NCPLCBit module (bit coupler)

Using the NCPLCBit module, an external PLC (PC600, CL300) can be coupled to
the CNC on the basis of a bit coupling. To do this the PLC module AG/Z or AG/P
must be on the PLC side.
The PLC can then access the complete CNC digital interface and the MTB1 I/O in
puts/outputs (if the MTB1 I/O is connected). The corresponding addresses for bit
coupling can be found in the interface tables (see chapter Digital interface") under
the column Address bit coupl.".
It is also possible for several CNCs (CC120, CC200, CC220, CC300, CC320) to be
driven on one PLC on the basis of the bit coupling (provided that the PLC has a
correspondingly large I/O range). In order to avoid a conflict of addresses with PLC
I/O signals assigned to the other controllers, the start address of the CC220 digital
interface must be set using machine parameter P6008.
BOSCH
CNC
NCSPS
Bit
System connection to the PLC

(AG/Z or AG/P)
V24
(optional)
currently unused)
(optional)
V24
Front view NCPLCBit
339
V24/
20mA
Pluginmodules
NCPLCBit
CC220
Caution!
The module must only be inserted or removed when the control and PLC are
switched off!
System connection to the external PLC (terminal X11)

(socket, SubD, 50pin)
Bus connection between the CNC (connection X11) and the PLC module AG/Z or
AG/P (also connection X11) for bit coupling between CNC and PLC.
Caution!
The bus connection cable must only be inserted or removed when the CNC and

340
Pluginmodules
NCPLCBit
CC220
Connection cable NCPLCBit to AG/Z or AG/P

0.5 m, 0.75 m
or
1.8 m
Connector
X11 at
AG/Z or
AG/P
Connector
X11 at
NCPLCBit
Pin assignment
Colour
black
blue
brown
beige
yellow
green
violet
pink
orange
transparent
redwhite
bluewhite
yellowwhite
greenwhite
violetwhite
Pin
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Pin
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Colour
Pin
orangewhite
brownwhite
bluered
yellowred
greenred
whitered
orangered
brownred
redblack
blueblack
greenyellow
yellowblack
greenblack
violetblack
whiteblack
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
36
Pin
Colour
Pin
Pin
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
36
orangeblack
brownblack
redgreen
greygreen
violetgreen
whitegreen
orangegreen
browngreen
redyellow
blueyellow
violetyellow
whiteyellow
brownyellow
redblue
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Type
No.
NCPLCBit
NCPLCBit incl. V24/20 mA expansion card for DNC
Cable NCPLCBit 0.5 m (for AG/Z or AG/P)
Cable NCPLCBit 1.8 m (for AG/P)
AG/Z
AG/P
044 339
056 752
041 535
062 970
048 081
041 523
047 944
341
Pluginmodules
NCPLCWord
3.5
CC220
NCPLCWord3 module (word coupler)

The external PLC PC600 can be coupled to the CC 220 on the basis of the word
coupling*) by means of the NCPLCWord3 module. To do this the PLC module AG/
NC3S must be on the PLC side.
The data exchange between CC 220 and PC600 is performed via the communica
tions memory of the NCPLCWord3. The PLC accesses this dualport RAM via
special function modules.
The corresponding addresses and symbol names of the word coupling may be
found in the interface tables (see chapter 4, Digital interfaces") under the columns
headed Word coupl. address" and Symb. PG4".
Several CNCs can be connected to one PC600. It is, however, only possible to con
nect a maximum of one wordcoupled CNC (the other CNCs are bit coupled).
*) Word coupling between CC 220M and PC 600 only
BOSCH
CNC
System connection to PC 600

(AG/NC3S)
NCSPS
Word3
Battery
Battery cover
V24
(optional)
currently unused)
(optional)
V24
Front view NCPLCWord3
342
V24/
20mA
Pluginmodules
NCPLCWord
CC220
Caution!
The module must only be inserted or removed when the control and PLC are
switched off!
System connection to PC600 (connection X71)

(connector, SubD, 50pin)
Bus connection between CNC (connection X71) and PLC module AG/NC3S (also
connection X71) for word coupling between CC 220 M and PC600.
Caution!
Battery
The battery is used to back up the communication memory.
Battery type: Lithium, TLQ 150, taper pin connection, order no.: 046 800.
Replacement: annually.
See section Maintenance" for information on battery replacement.
Caution!
The battery must be changed immediately on the first occasion the error message
WKBATTERY LOW" appears, while the CNC is switched on (otherwise data will
be lost)!

The communication memory

The communication memory (total capacity: 128 kB) is used for data exchange be
tween CC 220 and PC 600. The user is able to access the data in this memory by
using CPL commands at the CNC and function modules at the PLC.
PC 600
CC 220 M
64 kB
Communication
memory
64 kB
Data from:
Interface I/O
Screen
Potentiometers
Panel keys
DNC
X71
W tables
NCPLCWord3
343
System
connec
tion
cable
X71
AG/NC3S
Pluginmodules
NCPLCWord
CC220
Connection cable NCPLCWord3 to AG/NC3S
Socket, SubD, 50pin
Socket, SubD, 50pin

1.5 m or
0.7 m
Strainrelief clamp
Pin assignment
Colour
white
brown
green
yellow
grey
pink
blue
red
black
violet
greypink
redblue
whitegreen
browngreen
whiteyellow
yellowbrown
whitegrey
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Colour
greybrown
whitepink
pinkbrown
whiteblue
brownblue
whitered
brownred
whiteblack
brownblack
greygreen
yellowgrey
greenblue
yellowblue
greenred
yellowred
greenblack
yellowblack
Pin
Pin
Colour
Pin
Pin
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
greenblue
pinkblue
greyred
pinkred
greyblack
pinkblack
blueblack
redblack
white
brown
green
yellow
grey
pink
pinkgreen
yellowpink
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Type
No.
NCPLCWord3
NCPLCWord3 incl. V24/20mA extended module for DNC
Cable NCPLCWord3, 0.7 m (for AG/NC3S)
Cable NCPLCWord3, 1.5 m (for AG/NC3S)
Battery for NCPLCWord3
AG/NC3S
060 668
060 670
060 742
060 743
046 800
071 204
344
Pluginmodules
SCP2
3.6
CC220
SCP2 module (serial couple processor)

As a highperformance LSV2DNC interface, the SCP2 module offers a number of
advantages compared with the V24/20 mA extended module which can be
plugged onto the I/O, bit or word coupling card:
Faster loading of files and faster Processing via DNC interface" (P0 operation).
430 kByte ring buffer for direct processing" via DNC (P0
operation). Ring buffer direct on the SCP card so no more demands on part pro
gram memory by DNC data.
Additional RS422 interface. This facilitates maximum

transmission rates of 57.6 kBaud (as opposed to 19200 baud with V24 and 9600
baud with 20 mA) and longer transmission distances (up to 1000 m).
Extended LSV2 diagnostics.
BOSCH
CNC
NMI button S1
EPROM
Modul
EPROM module
EPROM module cover
SCP2
V24/RS422
V24/RS422
V24/20mA
V24/20mA
Front view SCP2
Caution!
345
Pluginmodules
SCP2
CC220
The SCP module and its EPROM module may only be inserted or removed
when the control is switched off!
The NMI button is used to debug the card. It must not be actuated during nor
mal operation!
The V24/RS422 interface connection is designated by X11 (socket, SubD, 25pin)

and the V24/20MA interface connection by X12 (socket, SubD, 25pin). The inter
face to be used for LSV2DNC can be specified using machine parameter P 8607.
The interface variants V24/20 mA and V24/RS422 are each wired to a socket.
All interface variants behave in the same way with regard to data. The parameter
isation of the interfaces (baud rate, stop bits etc.) is implemented via machine para
meter set 8600 DNC interface with LSV2 protocol".
Please refer to the manual Machine parameters".
V24 interface
Level:
HIGH:
+3 V to +9 V.
LOW:
3 V to 9 V.
Transmission rate:
maximum 19200 baud.
Protocol:
LSV2 protocol.
Cable length:
max. 15 m
Cable type: screened cable, conductor cross section min. 0.14 mm2
TX
RX
GND
Signal ground.
Screen
contact to CNC housing by means of metallic casing of subD plug
connector.
Neither hardware handshake nor software handshake (XON, XOFF) are used with
LSV2DNC. The CNC does not evaluate the CTS and DSR status leads. DTR (pin
20) is permanently set at the CNC end.
SCP
SocketX11/12
SubD25pin
<15m
Plug
Plug
TX
Data
RX
Data
GND
HOSTcomputer
Socket
SubD25pin
3 RX
2 TX
7 GND
1 Screen
Screentobody
Use metal covers
V24connectionbetweenCNCandperipheral(e.g.HOST)
Caution!

346
Pluginmodules
SCP2
CC220
IMPORTANT
At times it may be necessary to bridge RTS with CTS and DTR with DSR on
the external device.
nection must not exceed 15 m. Either suitable repeaters or the 20mA inter
face or the RS422 interface must be used if these lengths need to be ex
ceeded.
vice ensured).

Level
HIGH:
LOW:
approx. 0 mA (max. 3 mA).
Transmission rate:
max. 9600 baud.
3.5 V
max. 3.5 V
Power supply of
the driving device:
max. 12 V
Protocol:
LSV2 protocol
max. 100 m
max. 50 m
Cable type: screened cable, conductor cross section min. 0.14 mm2
TX+, TX
RX+, RX
Screen
Contact to CNC housing by means of metallic casing of subD
plug connector.
For LSV2DNC the DTR signal is always set by the CNC. DSR is not evaluated here.
the other as the passive (active: device acts as source). The 20 mA interface be
347
Pluginmodules
SCP2
SCP
SocketX12
SubD25pin
RX+
22
RX
12
TX+
23
TX
13
CC220
<50m
Plug
Use metal covers
Plug
DNCcomputer
Socket
SubD25pin
TX+
TX
Data
RX+
Data
RX
Screentobody
Screen
20 mA passive (interface of connected device acts as power source)
SCP
SocketX12
SubD25pin
RX+
12
RX
24
TX+
13
TX
<100m
Plug
Use metal covers
Plug
Data
TX+
TX
RX+
Data
25
Activein
Activeout
DNCcomputer
Socket
SubD25pin
RX
9
10
Screentobody
Screen
20 mA active (DNC interface of the CNC operates as power source)
CAUTION!

IMPORTANT

should not exceed 50 or 100 m. The maximum cable length admissible if
CNC is acting as the driving device (20 mA active) is 100 m. If the peripheral
interface is acting as the source (CNC: 20mA passive), the maximum per
mitted length is 50 m. Either suitable repeaters or the RS422 interface must
be used if these lengths need to be exceeded.
vice ensured).
348
Pluginmodules
SCP2
CC220
RS422 interface
Line Receiver:
SN 75175; min. input error voltage: 200 mV

min. input resistance: 12 kW
Line Driver:
SN 75174
Transmission rate:
max. 57.6 kBaud
Protocol:
LSV2 protocol
Cable length:
max. 1000 m with screened twisted pair cable
Conductor cross section: min. 0.25 mm2.
Line termination:
at cable lengths >100 m: 150 W between pin 16 and
pin 3 (at X11).
TX+, TX
RX+, RX
Screen
contact to CNC housing by means of metallic casing of subD plug
connector.
SCP
SocketX11
SubD25pin
RX+
max.
1000m
Plug
16
RX
TX+
15
TX
Use metal covers

Data
DNCcomputer
Plug
RS422
TX+
TX
RX+
Data
RX
GND
GND
10
7
9
Screentobody
Screen
(ScreeningseeCaution")
(Pins7and9seeIMPORTANT")
RS422connectionbetweenCNCandHOST
CAUTION!
Be sure to verify that the screen connections of both units have the same reference
potential before connecting the screening! If this is not done then equipotential
bonding leads with suitable cross sections must be installed between the systems
by the user!
IMPORTANT
The RS422 interface will only be active if pin7 is bridged with pin9 at X11 on
the SCP side!
Screening at both sides provides the greatest interference immunity. Inad
equate screening reduces interference immunity!
It is possible to limit the max. transmission rate to values < 57.6 kbaud if
vice ensured).
349
Pluginmodules
PCI/OS
PCI/OS module with integrated PIC 250

This card is used for coupling PLC I/O cards which are fitted either in the CNC
combirack or externally in a PLC extension rack to the integrated PLC (PIC 250).
If using a combirack, the connection between the PCI/OS and the PLC I/O cards is
established internally via the backplane.
External PLC I/O cards are connected to the PCI/OS coupler via the AG/ZS and
the AG/ZS connection cable (length 0.55 m, order no. 064 754).
BOSCH
CNC
NCSPS
I/OS
0
1
WriteProt.
3.7
CC220
System connection to the PLC

(AG/ZS)
LED Logic
Logic
LED 12 V
12V
24V
24V
0V
0V
X
1
0
V24
(optional)
currently unused)
(optional)
V24
Front view PCI/O interface card
350
Supply voltage
input
(connection X10)
V24/
20mA
Pluginmodules
PCI/OS
CC220
CAUTION!
S4
S3
S2
S1
FRONTVIEW
The module must only be inserted or removed when the CNC is switched off!
The addresses E0.0 E39.7 and A0.0 A35.7 are assigned by the CNC digital
interface and the MTB1 I/O and may not be used for signals of the connected PLC
I/O cards. For this reason address the PLC I/O cards connected to the PCI/OS (via
AG/ZS) from E40.0 onwards (range: E40.0 E63.7) or from A36.0 (range: A36.0
A63.7)!
S1 and S2 switch the CMOS bus signals IRD and

IRW. These signals must be switched off if a DESI
bus master is connected!
S1 S2
ON ON
no DESI bus master
ON OFF
not permitted
OFF ON
not permitted
OFF OFF
DESI bus master possible
S3 and S4 are currently not evaluated.

Position 0:
Access to the PIC program is possible (editing, deleting).
Only one nonactive PIC program can be edited.
Position 1:
PIC 250 memory is locked against writing access.
CAUTION!
The write protection switch must be in position 0" when loading a PIC pro
gram into the CNC.
After commissioning the PIC program, write protection must always be acti
vated (position 1). If this is not done, for example, reloading the CNC operat
ing system at a later time could cause the PIC memory to be overwritten and
the PIC program(s) to be lost!
351
Pluginmodules
PCI/OS
CC220
Supply voltage input (connection X10)

24 VDC supply, +20% 15%; (Weidmller plugin terminal, MSTB 1.5, 4pin). Pola
rised supply voltage input for generation of internally required voltages. Supply via
an external 24 V logic power supply module (see chapter Electrical connections").
Maximum input current: 1.5 A
F 10 A
X10
24 V=
F1
Power supply
from the 24 V logic power sup
ply module.
IMAX = 1.5 A
Install leads twisted!
24 V=
0V
0V
Polarity protection
CAUTION!
Only use the recommended fuse type. Bridging the fuse is not permitted!
LED 12 V
The internal 12 V supply voltage for the CMOS bus is present.
LED logic
Internal logic voltage for PLC I/O cards is present.
System connection to the external PLC extension rack (connection X11)
(socket, SubD, 50pin).
Bus connection between CNC and PLC module AG/ZS in the PLC extension rack
(extension cable AG/ZS, length 0.55 m, order no. 064 754). Access to the I/Os is
then possible via PIC 250 from the PLC I/O cards installed there.
CAUTION!

Type
No.
PCI/OS with PIC 250

PCI/OS with PIC 250 and
V24/20 mA expansion card for DNC
Extension cable AG/ZS 0.55 m
071 356
352
071 358
064 754
CC220
Pluginmodules
PS75
3.8

The power supply module (order no. 047 181) supplies the internal voltages for the
logic circuits of all plugin modules (CP/MEM4 etc.). The measuring system and
handwheel supply voltage (5 V, max. 1.5 A, see description of SERVOi) is also gen
erated by the power supply module.
BOSCH
CNC
PS75
V out
LED output voltage
READY
READY2 LED
24 V
Reset
READY2
24V input voltage
Reset button
Relay contact (make contact)
X
2
0
Fuse for 24 V input

F10A
24V
Input voltage
24 V DC +20% /15% max.
X
1
0
0V
0V
FrontpanelPS75
Caution!
The PS 75 module may only be connected or removed when the controller is
switched off!
353
CC220
Pluginmodules
PS75
Output voltage LED

Output voltage display. The LED is lit when the logic supply voltage is output at the
PS 75.
READY2 LED (see also READY2 contact)
The LED lights up if none of the following errors arise:
internal voltage error
excess temperature (> 58 C internal)
measuring system error
control loop error
watchdog error
24V input voltage LED
The green LED lights up when the 24 V input voltage to X10 is present.
Reset button
Button for resetting all error messages and cold restart of the CNC (hardware
reset).
READY2 contact (X20)
Relay contact (make contact) opens when faults are detected as described under
READY2 LED (switch rating 50 W/24 V DC, Imax. = 2 A).
CAUTION!
The control is not READY if the READY2 contact is open! For this reason
READY2 must be connected accordingly in the interface controller (with
EMERGENCY STOP)!
When switching off, the drives must be disconnected before switching off the
CNC logic voltage!
Input voltage 24 V (connector X10)

4pin screw terminal, max. 1.52.
Supply from 24 V= +20%/15%, max. 1.2 Vss ripple voltage.
The input is polarised. Power input 125 W.
F 10 A
24 V
X10
24 V
F1
24 V
0V
0V
0V
Polarity protection
(internal)
CAUTION!
Only use the recommended fuse type. Bridging
the fuse is not permitted!
354
Power supply
from 24 V (logic) power supply
module (see Electrical connec
tions")
Install leads twisted!
DigitalInterface
4.
Digital interface
4.1
Interface tables
CC220
General
The tables list the total interface scope between CNC / PLC / MTB1 I/O classified by
addresses. The section Signal register" lists all signals in alphabetical order.
Addresses
The CNC digital interface has 256 inputs and 256 outputs. The PLC addresses
these signals differently depending on the type of coupling between CNC and PLC
(PIC250, bit or word coupling). For word coupling, the correct addresses are found
in the Address word coupl." column; for bit coupling and when using the PIC250,
in the column Address bit coupl.".
In the tables all addresses are PLC or PIC 250 related, i.e. I 0.0" corresponds to
PLC Input signal 0.0 and O 0.0" to PLC output signal 0.0. The assignment of ad
dresses for the CNC interface is contained in the Address bit coupl." column:
e.g. I 0.0 = CNC output 0.0; e.g. O 0.0 = CNC input 0.0
Symbol name (PG 4/5)
The SYMBOL NAMES for wordcoupling PLCs (PC 600) must be adopted by the
user 1:1 because existing function modules are configured around these symbol
names.
For bitcoupled PLCs (PIC 250 / PC 600) other symbol names can be used, but the
default symbol names should be used to simplify troubleshooting (service).
For multiple bitcoupling (PC 600) the symbol is given an index at the first character
of the symbol name (e.g. CCDRVON1" 1CDRVON1" , 2CDRVON1"
3CDRVON1").
Start address
The start address for the CNC interface can be set using the machine parameter of
the relevant control unit (in parameter block 6000). This avoids conflicting ad
dresses where a number of bitcoupled CNCs are connected to a single PC600
(multiple bitcoupling).
Example:
First CNC:
P6008=0;
Start address of CNC digital interface at 0.0
(normal case).
Second CNC: P6008=40; Start address of CNC digital interface at 40.0
The CNC input DRIVE ON 1ST AXIS" is now set by
the PLC through the PLC output O40.0.
Remarks
The REMARKS for the CNCPLC signals correspond to the standard Bosch Assign
ment Lists. The user can change these forms to his/her own remarks provided the
meaning of the signal remarks remains unchanged.
41
CC220
DigitalInterface
4.1.1
Signals from PLC to CNC

Address
Address
Word coupl.Bit coupl.
Address
decimal
Symb.PG4
Remarks
PLC>NC O BYTE 0
O216.0
O0.0
0
CCDRVON1
DRIVE ON 1ST AXIS
O216.1
O0.1
1
CCDRVON2
DRIVE ON 2ND AXIS
O216.2
O0.2
2
CCDRVON3
DRIVE ON 3RD AXIS
O216.3
O0.3
3
CCDRVON4
DRIVE ON 4TH AXIS
O216.4
O0.4
4
CCDRVON5
DRIVE ON 5TH AXIS
O216.5
O0.5
5
CCDRVON6
DRIVE ON 6TH AXIS
O216.6
O0.6
6
CCDRVON7
DRIVE ON 7TH AXIS
O216.7
O0.7
7
CCDRVON8
DRIVE ON 8TH AXIS
PLC>NC O BYTE 1
O217.0
O1.0
8
CCVFRG1
FEED
O217.1
O1.1
9
CCVFRG2
FEED
O217.2
O1.2
10
CCVFRG3
FEED
O217.3
O1.3
11
CCVFRG4
FEED
O217.4
O1.4
12
CCVFRG5
FEED
O217.5
O1.5
13
CCVFRG6
FEED
O217.6
O1.6
14
CCVFRG7
FEED
O217.7
O1.7
15
CCVFRG8
FEED
ALLOW 1ST AXIS

ALLOW 2ND AXIS
ALLOW 3RD AXIS
ALLOW 4TH AXIS
ALLOW 5TH AXIS
ALLOW 6TH AXIS
ALLOW 7TH AXIS
ALLOW 8TH AXIS
PLC>NC O BYTE 2
O218.0
O218.1
O218.2
O218.3
O218.4
O218.5
O218.6
O218.7
O2.0
O2.1
O2.2
O2.3
O2.4
O2.5
O2.6
O2.7
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
CCREFP1
CCREFP2
CCREFP3
CCREFP4
CCREFP5
CCREFP6
CCREFP7
CCREFP8
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
POINT
POINT
POINT
POINT
POINT
POINT
POINT
POINT
1ST
2ND
3RD
4TH
5TH
6TH
7TH
8TH
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
O219.0
O3.0
24
O219.1
O3.1
25
O219.2
O3.2
26
O219.3
O3.3
27
O219.4
O3.4
28
O219.5
O3.5
29
O219.6
O3.6
30
O219.7
O3.7
31
PLC>NC
CCREFR1
CCREFR2
CCREFR3
CCREFR4
CCREFR5
CCREFR6
CCREFR7
CCREFR8
BYTE
DIR. OF
DIR. OF
DIR. OF
DIR. OF
DIR. OF
DIR. OF
DIR. OF
DIR. OF
O220.0
O4.0
32
O220.1
O4.1
33
O220.2
O4.2
34
O220.3
O4.3
35
O220.4
O4.4
36
O220.5
O4.5
37
O220.6
O4.6
38
O220.7
O4.7
39
PLC>NC
CCRED1
CCRED2
CCRED3
CCRED4
CCRED5
CCRED6
CCRED7
CCRED8
BYTE 4
(NOT) REDUCTION 1ST AXIS
(NOT) REDUCTION 2ND AXIS
(NOT) REDUCTION 3RD AXIS
(NOT) REDUCTION 4TH AXIS
O221.0
O5.0
40
O221.1
O5.1
41
O221.2
O5.2
42
O221.3
O5.3
43
O221.4
O5.4
44
O221.5
O5.5
45
O221.6
O5.6
46
O221.7
O5.7
47
PLC>NC
CCEINFRG
CCEDITFR
CCSLASHA
CCEMSTPQ
CCSTART
CCHALTQ
CCLOCREM
BYTE 5
TRANSFER ALLOW
EDIT INHIBIT
BLOCK SLASH
(NOT) EMERGENCY STOP
CYCLE START
(NOT) FEED HOLD
LOCAL/REMOTE (DNC)
42
3
REF. 1ST AXIS
REF. 2ND AXIS
REF. 3RD AXIS
REF. 4TH AXIS
REF. 5TH AXIS
REF. 6TH AXIS
REF. 7TH AXIS
REF. 8TH AXIS
CC220
DigitalInterface
Address
Address
Address
decimal
Symb.PG4
Remarks
O222.0
O6.0
48
O222.1
O6.1
49
O222.2
O6.2
50
O222.3
O6.3
51
O222.4
O6.4
52
O222.5
O6.5
53
O222.6
O6.6
54
O222.7
O6.7
55
PLC>NC
CCEINM01
CCDIREKT
O223.0
O7.0
56
O223.1
O7.1
57
O223.2
O7.2
58
O223.3
O7.3
59
O223.4
O7.4
60
O223.5
O7.5
61
O223.6
O7.6
62
O223.7
O7.7
63
PLC>NC
CCMMOD1
CCMMOD2
CCMMOD4
CCMMOD8
CCMMOD16
CCMMOD32
CCMMOD64
CCMMO128
BYTE 7
MULTIMODE VALUE 1
MULTIMODE VALUE 2
MULTIMODE VALUE 4
MULTIMODE VALUE 8
MULTIMODE VALUE 16
MULTIMODE VALUE 32
MULTIMODE VALUE 64
MULTIMODE VALUE 128
O224.0
O8.0
64
O224.1
O8.1
65
O224.2
O8.2
66
O224.3
O8.3
67
O224.4
O8.4
68
O224.5
O8.5
69
O224.6
O8.6
70
O224.7
O8.7
71
PLC>NC
CCDAT1
CCDAT2
CCDAT3
CCDAT4
CCDAT5
CCDAT6
CCDAT7
CCDAT8
BYTE 8
DATA LINE MULTIMODE 1 * 10**0/2**0
O225.0
O9.0
72
O225.1
O9.1
73
O225.2
O9.2
74
O225.3
O9.3
75
O225.4
O9.4
76
O225.5
O9.5
77
O225.6
O9.6
78
O225.7
O9.7
79
PLC>NC
CCDAT9
CCDAT10
CCDAT11
CCDAT12
CCDAT13
CCDAT14
CCDAT15
CCDAT16
BYTE 9
PLC>NC
O226.0
O226.1
O226.2
O226.3
O226.4
O226.5
O226.6
O226.7
O10.0
O10.1
O10.2
O10.3
O10.4
O10.5
O10.6
O10.7
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
O227.0
O11.0
88
O227.1
O11.1
89
O227.2
O11.2
90
O227.3
O11.3
91
O227.4
O11.4
92
O227.5
O11.5
93
O227.6
O11.6
94
O227.7
O11.7
95
CCCPLMAS
CCBETRKL
CCMULSTR
CCABSINK
CCSIGN
CPL DIALOGUE MACHINE

MODE INHIBIT
MULTISTROBE
ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL (L/H)
SIGN (+/) (L/H)
CCDAT17
CCDAT18
CCDAT19
CCDAT20
CCDAT21
CCDAT22
CCDAT23
CCDAT24
PLC>NC
CCDAT25
CCDAT26
CCDAT27
CCDAT28
CCDAT29
CCDAT30
CCDAT31
CCDAT32
43
BYTE 6
OPTIONAL STOP
DIRECT CALL
BYTE 10
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
MULTIMODE
MULTIMODE
MULTIMODE
MULTIMODE
MULTIMODE
MULTIMODE
MULTIMODE
MULTIMODE
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
10**4/2**16
10**4/2**17
10**4/2**18
10**4/2**19
10**5/2**20
10**5/2**21
10**5/2**22
10**5/2**23
BYTE
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
11
LINE MULTIMODE 1 * 10**6/2**24
LINE MULTIMODE 8 * 10**7/(+/)
DigitalInterface
Address
Address
Address
decimal
Symb.PG4
PLC>NC
O228.0
O12.0
96
CCHQUIT
O228.1
O12.1
97
CCBSPR
O228.2
O12.2
98
O228.3
O12.3
99
CCSFTAUS
O228.4
O12.4
100
O228.5
O12.5
101
O228.6
O228.7
O12.6
O12.7
102
103
CC220
Remarks
O
BYTE 12
AUX.FUNCT. RECEIPT
OPTIONAL JUMP ON
SUPPRESSION OF SOFTWARE LIMITS
2ND SPINDLE CLOCKWISE
ROTATION (M3) / AUTOMATIC
2ND SPINDLE COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
ROTATION / BLOCK
2ND SPINDLE STOP (M5)
2ND SPINDLE ORIENTATION (M19)
O229.0
O13.0
104
O229.1
O13.1
105
O229.2
O13.2
106
O229.3
O13.3
107
O229.4
O13.4
108
O229.5
O13.5
109
O229.6
O13.6
110
O229.7
O13.7
111
PLC>NC
CCJOG1P
CCJOG1N
CCJOG2P
CCJOG2N
CCJOG3P
CCJOG3N
CCJOG4P
CCJOG4N
BYTE 13
JOG 1ST
JOG 1ST
JOG 2ND
JOG 2ND
JOG 3RD
JOG 3RD
JOG 4TH
JOG 4TH
AXIS POSITIVE DIRECTION

AXIS NEGATIVE DIRECTION
O230.0
O14.0
112
O230.1
O14.1
113
O230.2
O14.2
114
O230.3
O14.3
115
O230.4
O14.4
116
O230.5
O14.5
117
O230.6
O14.6
118
O230.7
O14.7
119
PLC>NC
CCJOG5P
CCJOG5N
CCJOG6P
CCJOG6N
CCJOG7P
CCJOG7N
CCJOG8P
CCJOG8N
BYTE 14
JOG 5TH
JOG 5TH
JOG 6TH
JOG 6TH
JOG 7TH
JOG 7TH
JOG 8TH
JOG 8TH

PLC>NC
O231.0
O231.1
O231.2
O231.3
O231.4
O231.5
O231.6
O231.7
O15.0
O15.1
O15.2
O15.3
O15.4
O15.5
O15.6
O15.7
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
CCJRAPID
CCJHIGH
CCJMED
CCJLOW
CCEXVORS
CCINKX
CCINK100
CCINK10
BYTE 15
MANUAL FEED RAPID
MANUAL FEED FAST
MANUAL FEED MEDIUM
MANUAL FEED SLOW
EXTERNAL FEED
INCREMENT STEPS X
INCREMENT STEPS 100
INCREMENT STEPS 10
O232.0
O16.0
128
O232.1
O16.1
129
O232.2
O16.2
130
O232.3
O16.3
131
O232.4
O16.4
132
O232.5
O16.5
133
O232.6
O16.6
134
O232.7
O16.7
135
PLC>NC
CCINK1
CCREFANF
CCNULSET
CCRESTL
CCRESTA
CCE100%
CCEINTIP
CCTIPMMU
BYTE 16
INCREMENT STEP 1
REFERENCE POINT APPROACH
ZERO SET
CANCEL DIST. TO GO
CONTROL RESET
100% FEED ASYNCHRONOUS AXES
JOG (MM/MIN)
JOG (MM/U)
O233.0
O17.0
136
O233.1
O17.1
137
O233.2
O17.2
138
O233.3
O17.3
139
O233.4
O17.4
140
O233.5
O17.5
141
O233.6
O17.6
142
O233.7
O17.7
143
PLC>NC
CCVSEXT
CCSPEXT
CCGETAUT
CCZAEEIN
CCSPUMK
CCSPKONS
CCSP0VQ
CCSP100%
BYTE 17
FEED POT EXTERNAL
SPINDLE POT EXTERNAL
AUTOMATIC GEARRANGE SELECTION (M40)
PIECE COUNTER ON
SPINDLE REVERSE
CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED
(NOT) SPINDLE COMMAND 0 VOLT
SPINDLE OVERRIDE 100%
CC 220 M only

CC 220 T only
For CC220T: 2ND 2.SPINDLE CLOCKWISE ROTATION; for CC220M: AUTOMATIC

For CC220T: 2ND SPINDLE COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION; for CC220M:
BLOCK
44
CC220
DigitalInterface
Address
Address
Address
decimal
Symb.PG4
Remarks
O234.0
O18.0
144
O234.1
O18.1
145
O234.2
O18.2
146
O234.3
O18.3
147
~ O234.4
O18.4
148
~ O234.5
O18.5
149
~ O234.6
O18.6
150
~ O234.7
O18.7
151
PLC>NC
CCGETR1
CCGETR2
CCGETR3
CCGETR4
CCGETR5
CCGETR6
CCGETR7
CCGETR8
BYTE 18
RECEIPT
RECEIPT
RECEIPT
RECEIPT
RECEIPT
RECEIPT
RECEIPT
RECEIPT
O235.0
O19.0
152
O235.1
O19.1
153
PLC>NC
CCSPRE
CCSPLI
CCPLCTOP
CCSPRICT
CCAWGET1
CCAWGET2
CCAWGET3
CCAWGET4
BYTE 19
SPINDLE CLOCKWISE ROTATION M03 (MANUAL)
SPINDLE COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION M04
(MANUAL)
SPINDLE STOP M05 (MANUAL)
SPINDLE ORIENTATION M19 (MANUAL)
SELECT GEARRANGE 1 (MANUAL)
~O236.0
O20.0
160
~O236.1
O20.1
161
~O236.2
O20.2
162
~O236.3
O20.3
163
O236.4
O20.4
164
O236.5
O20.5
165
O236.6
O20.6
166
O236.7
O20.7
167
PLC>NC
O
CCAWGET5
CCAWGET6
CCAWGET7
CCAWGET8
CC4KREIS
CCRESTRT
CCKONTUR
CC84TST
BYTE 20
SELECT GEARRANGE 5 (MANUAL) / 1 (2ND
QUADRAN T PROGRAMMING
AUTOMATIC RESTART M2/M30
RETURN TO CONTOUR
SINGLE BLOCK G84 (TEST)

O237.0
O21.0
168
O237.1
O21.1
169
O237.2
O21.2
170
O237.3
O21.3
171
O237.4
O21.4
172
O237.5
O21.5
173
O237.6
O21.6
174
O237.7
O21.7
175
PLC>NC
O
CCDNCQTG
CCVS100%
CCEG100%
CCZAEDEK
CCSTZUEW
CCMESGEW
CCTEACHV
CCTEACHS
BYTE 21
DNC/PLC RECEIPT
SET FEED POT TO 100%
SET RAPID POT TO 100%
COUNTE R DECREMENT
TOOL LIFE MONITOR ON
THREAD GUAGE/REMACHINE
TEACH IN FEED
TEACH IN SPINDLE
O238.0
O22.0
176
O238.1
O22.1
177
O238.2
O22.2
178
O238.3
O22.3
179
O238.4
O22.4
180
O238.5
O22.5
181
O238.6
O22.6
182
O238.7
O22.7
183
PLC>NC
O
CCHANDR1
CCHANDR2
CCHANDR3
CCHANDR4
CCHANDR5
CCHANDR6
CCHANDR7
CCHANDR8
BYTE 22
HANDWHEEL 1ST AXIS
HANDWHEEL 2ND AXIS
HANDWHEEL 3RD AXIS
HANDWHEEL 4TH AXIS
HANDWHEEL 5TH AXIS
HANDWHEEL 6TH AXIS
HANDWHEEL 7TH AXIS
HANDWHEEL 8TH AXIS
O239.0
O23.0
184
O239.1
O23.1
185
O239.2
O23.2
186
O239.3
O23.3
187
O239.4
O23.4
188
O239.5
O23.5
189
O239.6
O23.6
190
O239.7
O23.7
191
PLC>NC
O
CCMSSP1A
CCMSSP2A
CCMSSP3A
CCMSSP4A
CCMSSP5A
CCMSSP6A
CCMSSP7A
CCMSSP8A
BYTE 23
INHIBIT
INHIBIT
INHIBIT
INHIBIT
INHIBIT
INHIBIT
INHIBIT
INHIBIT
O235.2
O235.3
O235.4
O235.5
O235.6
O235.7
O19.2
O19.3
O19.4
O19.5
O19.6
O19.7
CC 220 M only

CC 220 T only
154
155
156
157
158
159
GEARRANGE 1
GEARRANGE 2
GEARRANGE 3
GEARRANGE 4
GEARRANGE 5 / 1 (2ND SPINDLE)
MEAS. SYS. MONITOR 1ST AXIS

MEAS. SYS. MONITOR 2ND AXIS
MEAS. SYS. MONITOR 3RD AXIS
MEAS. SYS. MONITOR 4TH AXIS
~ Only four speeds are possible with CC 220 T with

2nd spindle" option.
45
SP)
SP)
SP)
SP)
DigitalInterface
Address
Address
Address
decimal
Symb.PG4
CC220
Remarks
O240.0
O24.0
192
O240.1
O24.1
193
O240.2
O24.2
194
O240.3
O24.3
195
O240.4
O24.4
196
O240.5
O24.5
197
O240.6
O24.6
198
O240.7
O24.7
199
PLC>NC
BYTE 24
2ND SPINDLE:AUTOMATIC GEAR SELECTION
2ND SPINDLE: REVERSE SPINDLE DIRECTION
2ND SPINDLE: CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED
2ND SPINDLE:(NOT) SPINDLE COMMAND 0 VOLT
2ND SPINDLE:SET SPINDLE POT TO 100%
2ND SPINDLE:EXTERNAL SPINDLE POT
O241.0
O25.0
200
O241.1
O25.1
201
O241.2
O25.2
202
O241.3
O25.3
203
O241.4
O25.4
204
O241.5
O25.5
205
O241.6
O25.6
206
O241.7
O25.7
207
PLC>NC
O
CCDRKOM1
CCDRKOM2
CCDRKOM3
CCDRKOM4
CCDRKOM5
CCDRKOM6
CCDRKOM7
CCDRKOM8
BYTE 25
DRIFT COMP. OFF 1ST AXIS
DRIFT COMP. OFF 2ND AXIS
DRIFT COMP. OFF 3RD AXIS
DRIFT COMP. OFF 4TH AXIS
O242.0
O26.0
208
O242.1
O26.1
209
O242.2
O26.2
210
O242.3
O26.3
211
O242.4
O26.4
212
O242.5
O26.5
213
O242.6
O26.6
214
O242.7
O26.7
215
PLC>NC
\
I
I
I
>
I
I
/
BYTE 26
O243.0
O27.0
216
O243.1
O27.1
217
O243.2
O27.2
218
O243.3
O27.3
219
O243.4
O27.4
220
O243.5
O27.5
221
O243.6
O27.6
222
O243.7
O27.7
223
PLC>NC
CCUMSCHD
CCUMSCHF
CCREFCAC
CCCAAKSP
The meaning of these signals is set

according to machine parameter P6516
CCFRKOST
BYTE 27
SWITCHOVER TURNING MODE
SWITCHOVER MILLING MODE
REFERENCE POINT APPROACH CAXIS
CAXIS ACTIVE (PLC)
START MILL. HEAD COMP.
FEEDRATE REDUCTION
REMACH INE THREAD WITHOUT ROUGHING
CCGEWMOS
PLC>NC
O244.0
O28.0
224
O244.1
O28.1
225
O244.2
O28.2
226
O244.3
O28.3
227
O244.4
O28.4
228
O244.5
O28.5
229
O244.6
O28.6
230
O244.7
O28.7
231
BYTE 28
O245.0
O29.0
232
O245.1
O29.1
233
O245.2
O29.2
234
O245.3
O29.3
235
O245.4
O29.4
236
O245.5
O29.5
237
O245.6
O29.6
238
O245.7
O29.7
239
BYTE 29 for CPL
PLC>NC
CC 220 M only
CC 220 T only
46
DigitalInterface
Address
Address
Address
decimal
Symb.PG4
CC220
Remarks
O246.0
O30.0
240
O246.1
O30.1
241
O246.2
O30.2
242
O246.3
O30.3
243
O246.4
O30.4
244
O246.5
O30.5
245
O246.6
O30.6
246
O246.7
O30.7
247
PLC>NC
BYTE 30 for CPL
O247.0
O31.0
248
O247.1
O31.1
249
O247.2
O31.2
250
O247.3
O31.3
251
O247.4
O31.4
252
O247.5
O31.5
253
O247.6
O31.6
254
O247.7
O31.7
255
PLC>NC
BYTE 31 for CPL
47
CC220
DigitalInterface
4.1.2
Signals from CNC to PLC

Address
Address
Address
decimal
Symb.PG4
Remarks
O176.0
I0.0
0
O176.1
I0.1
1
O176.2
I0.2
2
O176.3
I0.3
3
O176.4
I0.4
4
O176.5
I0.5
5
O176.6
I0.6
6
O176.7
I0.7
7
NC>PLC
CCDRIV1P
CCDRIV1N
CCDRIV2P
CCDRIV2N
CCDRIV3P
CCDRIV3N
CCDRIV4P
CCDRIV4N
BYTE
POS.
NEG.
POS.
NEG.
POS.
NEG.
POS.
NEG.
0
TRAVEL COMMAND 1ST AXIS
TRAVEL COMMAND 1ST AXIS
TRAVEL COMMAND 2ND AXIS
TRAVEL COMMAND 2ND AXIS
TRAVEL COMMAND 3RD AXIS
TRAVEL COMMAND 3RD AXIS
TRAVEL COMMAND 4TH AXIS
O177.0
I1.0
8
O177.1
I1.1
9
O177.2
I1.2
10
O177.3
I1.3
11
O177.4
I1.4
12
O177.5
I1.5
13
O177.6
I1.6
14
O177.7
I1.7
15
NC>PLC
I
CCDRIV5P
CCDRIV5N
CCDRIV6P
CCDRIV6N
CCDRIV7P
CCDRIV7N
CCDRIV8P
CCDRIV8N
BYTE
POS.
NEG.
POS.
NEG.
POS.
NEG.
POS.
NEG.
1
NC>PLC
O178.0
O178.1
O178.2
O178.3
O178.4
O178.5
O178.6
O178.7
I2.0
I2.1
I2.2
I2.3
I2.4
I2.5
I2.6
I2.7
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
BYTE 2
CCINPOS1
CCINPOS2
CCINPOS3
CCINPOS4
CCINPOS5
CCINPOS6
CCINPOS7
CCINPOS8
1ST
2ND
3RD
4TH
5TH
6TH
7TH
8TH
O179.0
I3.0
24
O179.1
I3.1
25
O179.2
I3.2
26
O179.3
I3.3
27
O179.4
I3.4
28
O179.5
I3.5
29
O179.6
I3.6
30
O179.7
I3.7
31
NC>PLC
I
CCMST_1E
CCMST_2E
CCMST_4E
CCMST_8E
CCMST_1Z
CCMST_2Z
CCMST_4Z
CCMST_8Z
BYTE 3
MST AUX.FUNCT. 1/1
MST AUX.FUNCT. 2/2
MST AUX.FUNCT. 4/4
MST AUX.FUNCT. 8/8
MST AUX.FUNCT. 10/16
O180.0
I4.0
32
O180.1
I4.1
33
O180.2
I4.2
34
O180.3
I4.3
35
O180.4
I4.4
36
O180.5
I4.5
37
O180.6
I4.6
38
O180.7
I4.7
39
NC>PLC
I
CCMST_1H
CCMST_2H
CCMST_4H
CCMST_8H
CCST_1T
CCST_2T
CCST_4T
CCST_8T
BYTE 4
ST AUX.FUNCT. 1000/4096
O181.0
I5.0
40
O181.1
I5.1
41
O181.2
I5.2
42
O181.3
I5.3
43
O181.4
I5.4
44
O181.5
I5.5
45
O181.6
I5.6
46
O181.7
I5.7
47
NC>PLC
I
CCST_1ZT
CCST_2ZT
CCST_4ZT
CCST_8ZT
CCST_1HT
CCST_2HT
CCST_4HT
CCST_8HT
BYTE 5
ST AUX.FUNCT. 1*10**4/2**16
ST AUX.FUNCT. 2*10**4/2**17
ST AUX.FUNCT. 4*10**4/2**18
ST AUX.FUNCT. 8*10**4/2**19
T AUX.FUNCT. 1*10**5/2**20
T AUX.FUNCT. 2*10**5/2**21
T AUX.FUNCT. 4*10**5/2**22
T AUX.FUNCT. 8*10**5/2**23
48
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
POSITION
POSITION
POSITION
POSITION
POSITION
POSITION
POSITION
POSITION
CC220
DigitalInterface
Address
Address
Address
decimal
O182.0
O182.1
O182.2
O182.3
O182.4
O182.5
O182.6
O182.7
NC>PLC
BYTE
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
O183.0
I7.0
56
O183.1
I7.1
57
O183.2
I7.2
58
O183.3
I7.3
59
O183.4
I7.4
60
O183.5
I7.5
61
O183.6
I7.6
62
O183.7
I7.7
63
NC>PLC
I
CCMSTR
CCSSTR
CCTSTR
CCHSTR
CCHIFU5
CCHIFU6
CCHIFU7
CCCPLSTR
BYTE 7
1.CHANGE SIGNAL (MSTROBE)
2.CHANGE SIGNAL (SSTROBE)
3.CHANGE SIGNAL (TSTROBE)
4.CHANGE SIGNAL (HSTROBE)
5.CHANGE SIGNAL
6.CHANGE SIGNAL
7.CHANGE SIGNAL
CPL CHANGE SIGNAL
NC>PLC
I8.0
I8.1
I8.2
I8.3
I8.4
I8.5
I8.6
I8.7
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Remarks
CCT_1M
CCT_2M
CCT_4M
CCT_8M
CCT_1ZM
CCT_2ZM
CCT_4ZM
CCT_8ZM
O184.0
O184.1
O184.2
O184.3
O184.4
O184.5
O184.6
O184.7
I6.0
I6.1
I6.2
I6.3
I6.4
I6.5
I6.6
I6.7
Symb.PG4
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
O185.0
I9.0
72
O185.1
I9.1
73
O185.2
I9.2
74
O185.3
I9.3
75
O185.4
I9.4
76
O185.5
I9.5
77
O185.6
I9.6
78
O185.7
I9.7
79
I10.0
I10.1
I10.2
I10.3
I10.4
I10.5
I10.6
I10.7
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
O187.0
I11.0
88
O187.1
I11.1
89
O187.2
I11.2
90
O187.3
I11.3
91
O187.4
I11.4
92
O187.5
I11.5
93
O187.6
I11.6
94
O187.7
I11.7
95
BYTE
2*10**6/2**24
2*10**6/2**25
4*10**6/2**26
8*10**6/2**27
1*10**7/2**28
2*10**7/2**29
4*10**7/2**30
8*10**7/(+/)
CCAUTO
CCSEMI
CCMDI
CCMANUEL
CCBREFAN
CCREFANG
CCRAPID
CCPRGACT
AUTOMATIC MODE
SINGLE BLOCK MODE
MANUAL MODE
JOG MODE
TRAVERSE TO REFERENCE POINT MODE
REFERENCE POINTS REACHED ALL AXES
RAPID
PROGRAM RUNNING
NC>PLC
I
CCTEST
CCRESETE
CCSLASHE
CCMULQUI
CCPRGANW
CCSATZVL
CCF0%
CCPRGVHD
BYTE 9
DRY RUN TEST
CONTROL RESET
BLOCK SLASH
MULTIRECEIPT
MANUAL PROGRAM SELECTION
GO BLOCK
FEED 0%
PROGRAM EXISTS
NC>PLC
O186.0
O186.1
O186.2
O186.3
O186.4
O186.5
O186.6
O186.7
AUX.FUNCT.
AUX.FUNCT.
AUX.FUNCT.
AUX.FUNCT.
AUX.FUNCT.
AUX.FUNCT.
AUX.FUNCT.
AUX.FUNCT.
BYTE 10
CCEXPRAN
CCNCBERT
CCDREZER
CCEILG0%
CCMZA1
CCMZA2
CCMZA4
CCCPLDST
EXTERNAL PROGRAM SELECTION

NC READY (AFTER EXT.PRG.SELECT)
SPINDLE UP TO SPEED
RAPID 0%
MZA MODE VALUE 1
MZA MODE VALUE 2
MZA MODE VALUE 4
CPL DIALOGUE STROBE
NC>PLC
I
CCM0_M1
CCM2_M30
CCG33
CCG63
BYTE 11
PROGRAM STOP AT M0 OR M1
PROGRAM END AT M2 OR M30
THREAD CUTTING ACTIVE (G33)
G63 ACTIVE
CCSCHFKT
CCAM01
CCHIFUSP
SWITCH FUNCTION MODE

OPTIONAL STOP
INHIBIT AUX.FUNCT.
CC 220 M only
CC 220 T only
49
CC220
DigitalInterface
Address
Address
Address
decimal
O188.0
O188.1
O188.2
O188.3
O188.4
O188.5
O188.6
O188.7
I12.0
I12.1
I12.2
I12.3
I12.4
I12.5
I12.6
I12.7
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
Symb.PG4
NC>PLC
Remarks
I
CCEND1
CCEND2
CCEND3
CCEND4
CCEND5
CCEND6
CCEND7
CCEND8
O189.0
I13.0
104
O189.1
I13.1
105
O189.2
I13.2
106
O189.3
I13.3
107
O189.4
I13.4
108
O189.5
I13.5
109
O189.6
I13.6
110
O189.7
I13.7
111
NC>PLC
CCEND9
CCEND10
CCEND11
CCEND12
CCEND13
CCEND14
CCEND15
CCEND16
NC>PLC
RANGE 1
RANGE 2
RANGE 3
RANGE 4
RANGE 5
RANGE 6
RANGE 7
RANGE 8
BYTE 13
TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 9
BYTE
14
O191.0
I15.0
120
O191.1
I15.1
121
O191.2
I15.2
122
O191.3
I15.3
123
O191.4
I15.4
124
O191.5
I15.5
125
O191.6
I15.6
126
O191.7
I15.7
127
NC>PLC
I
CCREFER1
CCREFER2
CCREFER3
CCREFER4
CCREFER5
CCREFER6
CCREFER7
CCREFER8
BYTE 15
REFERENCE POINT REACHED 1ST AXIS
REFERENCE POINT REACHED 2ND AXIS
REFERENCE POINT REACHED 3RD AXIS
REFERENCE POINT REACHED 4TH AXIS
NC>PLC
O192.0
O192.1
O192.2
O192.3
O192.4
O192.5
O192.6
O192.7
I16.0
I16.1
I16.2
I16.3
I16.4
I16.5
I16.6
I16.7
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
LIMIT
LIMIT
LIMIT
LIMIT
LIMIT
LIMIT
LIMIT
LIMIT
FEED IN MM/REV. (G95)

CUTTING SPEED CONSTANT (G96)
SPINDLE IS ORIENTED
TOOL LIFE EXPIRED
LIFE OF BASIC AND ALTERNATIVE TOOLS EXPIRED
RAPID POT 100% SET
SPINDL E POT 100% SET
TARGET ACHIEVED
I14.0
I14.1
I14.2
I14.3
I14.4
I14.5
I14.6
I14.7
12
CCG95
CCG96
CCSPPOS
CCWZSTZ
CCGESSTZ
CCEIL100
CCSPI100
CCSTZERR
O190.0
O190.1
O190.2
O190.3
O190.4
O190.5
O190.6
O190.7
BYTE
TRAVEL
TRAVEL
TRAVEL
TRAVEL
TRAVEL
TRAVEL
TRAVEL
TRAVEL
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
O193.0
I17.0
136
O193.1
I17.1
137
O193.2
I17.2
138
O193.3
I17.3
139
O193.4
I17.4
140
O193.5
I17.5
141
O193.6
I17.6
142
O193.7
I17.7
143
BYTE
16
CCPLCTHT
CCTRUDER
CCSPIND0
CCSPIRIT
CCCAAKNC
CCG32
SPINDLE STOP
IDLING SPEED REACHED
SPINDLE POT 0%
SPINDLE AT REFERENCE POINT
CAXIS ACTIVE (CNC)
THREAD CUTTING ACTIVE
CCUMKRER
REVERS E RANGE REACHED
NC>PLC
I
CCFRKOAK
CCWANAKT
CCPROOPT
CCLINKAK
CCSVLOKR
CCOWZKR
BYTE 17
MILL. HEAD COMP. ON
REENTRY ACTIVE
PROGRA M OPTIMISATION ACTIVE
LINKING ACTIVE
STEP MODE WITHOUT CORR.
TEST RUN WITHOUT CORR.
CCPRGABW
CANCEL PROGRAM
CC 220 M only
CC 220 T only
410
CC220
DigitalInterface
Address
Address
Address
decimal
O194.0
O194.1
O194.2
O194.3
O194.4
O194.5
O194.6
O194.7
NC>PLC
BYTE
18
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
O195.0
I19.0
152
O195.1
I19.1
153
O195.2
I19.2
154
O195.3
I19.3
155
O195.4
I19.4
156
O195.5
I19.5
157
O195.6
I19.6
158
O195.7
I19.7
159
NC>PLC
I
CCEXPOS1
CCEXPOS1
CCEXPOS1
CCEXPOS1
CCEXPOS1
CCEXPOS1
CCEXPOS1
CCEXPOS1
BYTE 19
EXT.POS.REACHED 1ST AXIS
NC>PLC
BYTE
TRAVERSED
TRAVERSED
TRAVERSED
TRAVERSED
TRAVERSED
TRAVERSED
TRAVERSED
TRAVERSED
1ST
2ND
3RD
4TH
5TH
6TH
7TH
8TH
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
AXIS
20
DNC/NC START
DNC/NC FEED HOLD
DNC FEED HOLD OFF
CCDRESET
CCDEIN
DNC CONTROL RESET

DNC ON
O197.0
I21.0
168
O197.1
I21.1
169
O197.2
I21.2
170
O197.3
I21.3
171
O197.4
I21.4
172
O197.5
I21.5
173
O197.6
I21.6
174
O197.7
I21.7
175
NC>PLC
I
CCDREFAN
BYTE 21
DNC/REFERENCE POINT TRAVERSE
CCDPRANW
CCDRPABR
DNC PROGRAM SELECT

DNC/QUIT TRAVERSE TO REFERENCE POINT
CCLSV2OK
DNC/LSV2 CONNECTION O.K.
NC>PLC
O198.0
O198.1
O198.2
O198.3
O198.4
O198.5
O198.6
O198.7
I22.0
I22.1
I22.2
I22.3
I22.4
I22.5
I22.6
I22.7
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
POINT
POINT
POINT
POINT
POINT
POINT
POINT
POINT
CCDSTART
CCDHALT
CCDHALTA
I20.0
I20.1
I20.2
I20.3
I20.4
I20.5
I20.6
I20.7
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
Remarks
CCRFEND1
CCRFEND2
CCRFEND3
CCRFEND4
CCRFEND5
CCRFEND6
CCRFEND7
CCRFEND8
O196.0
O196.1
O196.2
O196.3
O196.4
O196.5
O196.6
O196.7
I18.0
I18.1
I18.2
I18.3
I18.4
I18.5
I18.6
I18.7
Symb.PG4
BYTE
22
2ND SPINDLE:SPINDLE ORIENTED

2ND SPINDLE:SPINDLE AT REFERENCE POINT
2ND SPINDLE: SPEED REACHED
2ND SPINDLE: IDLING SPEED REACHED
2.SPINDLE:SPIN DLE STOP
2ND SPINDLE ACTIVE
2.SPINDLE:SPIN DLE POT 0%
2ND SPINDLE:SPINDLE POT 100% SET
NC>PLC
O199.0
I23.0
184
O199.1
I23.1
185
O199.2
I23.2
186
O199.3
I23.3
187
O199.4
I23.4
188
O199.5
I23.5
189
O199.6
I23.6
190
O199.7
I23.7
191
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
CC 220 M only
Only with CC 220 T with 2nd SPINDLE" option
411
BYTE 23
ASYNCHRONO US SWITCH 1ST AXIS
ASYNCHRONO US SWITCH 2ND AXIS
ASYNCHRONO US SWITCH 3RD AXIS
ASYNCHRONO US SWITCH 4TH AXIS
ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCH 6TH AXIS
CC220
DigitalInterface
Address
Address
Address
decimal
Symb.PG4
Remarks
O200.0
I24.0
192
O200.1
I24.1
193
O200.2
I24.2
194
O200.3
I24.3
195
O200.4
I24.4
196
O200.5
I24.5
197
O200.6
I24.6
198
O200.7
I24.7
199
NC>PLC
CCD1A
CCD2A
CCD3A
CCD4A
CCD5A
CCD6A
CCD7A
CCD8A
BYTE 24
DNC/1ST AXIS
DNC/2ND AXIS
DNC/3RD AXIS
DNC/4TH AXIS
DNC/5TH AXIS
DNC/6TH AXIS
DNC/7TH AXIS
DNC/8TH AXIS
O201.0
I25.0
200
O201.1
I25.1
201
O201.2
I25.2
202
O201.3
I25.3
203
O201.4
I25.4
204
O201.5
I25.5
205
O201.6
I25.6
206
O201.7
I25.7
207
NC>PLC
\
I
I
I
>
I
I
/
BYTE
O202.0
I26.0
208
O202.1
I26.1
209
O202.2
I26.2
210
O202.3
I26.3
211
O202.4
I26.4
212
O202.5
I26.5
213
O202.6
I26.6
214
O202.7
I26.7
215
NC>PLC
BYTE 26
1ST AXIS PAIR COUPLED
2ND AXIS PAIR COUPLED
O203.0
I27.0
216
O203.1
I27.1
217
O203.2
I27.2
218
O203.3
I27.3
219
O203.4
I27.4
220
O203.5
I27.5
221
O203.6
I27.6
222
O203.7
I27.7
223
NC>PLC
BYTE
27
O204.0
I28.0
224
O204.1
I28.1
225
O204.2
I28.2
226
O204.3
I28.3
227
O204.4
I28.4
228
O204.5
I28.5
229
O204.6
I28.6
230
O204.7
I28.7
231
NC>PLC
BYTE
28
O205.0
I29.0
232
O205.1
I29.1
233
O205.2
I29.2
234
O205.3
I29.3
235
O205.4
I29.4
236
O205.5
I29.5
237
O205.6
I29.6
238
O205.7
I29.7
239
NC>PLC
BYTE
29
412
25
The meaning of these signals is set

according to machine parameters P6516
and P6517
for CPL
CC220
DigitalInterface
Address
Address
Address
decimal
Symb.PG4
Remarks
O206.0
I30.0
240
O206.1
I30.1
241
O206.2
I30.2
242
O206.3
I30.3
243
O206.4
I30.4
244
O206.5
I30.5
245
O206.6
I30.6
246
O206.7
I30.7
247
NC>PLC
BYTE
30
for CPL
O207.0
I31.0
248
O207.1
I31.1
249
O207.2
I31.2
250
O207.3
I31.3
251
O207.4
I31.4
252
O207.5
I31.5
253
O207.6
I31.6
254
O207.7
I31.7
255
NC>PLC
BYTE
31
for CPL
CCGEWAKT
CCG86
CCG84
CC 220 M only
CC 220 T only
413
THREAD CYCLE ACTIVE

G86 ACTIVE
G84 ACTIVE
DigitalInterface
4.1.3
CC220
PLC input addresses of the MTB1 I/O inputs

Address
Address
MTB1 I/O inputs
O208.0
O208.1
O208.2
O208.3
O208.4
O208.5
O208.6
O208.7
I32.0
I32.1
I32.2
I32.3
I32.4
I32.5
I32.6
I32.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
O209.0
O209.1
O209.2
O209.3
O209.4
O209.5
O209.6
O209.7
I33.0
I33.1
I33.2
I33.3
I33.4
I33.5
I33.6
I33.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
O210.0
O210.1
O210.2
O210.3
O210.4
O210.5
O210.6
O210.7
I34.0
I34.1
I34.2
I34.3
I34.4
I34.5
I34.6
I34.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X23,
X23,
X23,
X23,
X23,
X23,
X23,
X23,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
O211.0
O211.1
O211.2
O211.3
O211.4
O211.5
O211.6
O211.7
I35.0
I35.1
I35.2
I35.3
I35.4
I35.5
I35.6
I35.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X24,
X24,
X24,
X24,
X24,
X24,
X24,
X24,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
O212.0
O212.1
O212.2
O212.3
O212.4
O212.5
O212.6
O212.7
I36.0
I36.1
I36.2
I36.3
I36.4
I36.5
I36.6
I36.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X25,
X25,
X25,
X25,
X25,
X25,
X25,
X25,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
O213.0
O213.1
O213.2
O213.3
O213.4
O213.5
O213.6
O213.7
I37.0
I37.1
I37.2
I37.3
I37.4
I37.5
I37.6
I37.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X26,
X26,
X26,
X26,
X26,
X26,
X26,
X26,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Remarks
Note: All signals relayed to the PLC via the MTB1 I/O must be present for at least 2 PLC cycles before they can
be interpreted as HIGH or LOW signals.
414
DigitalInterface
Address
Address
MTB1 I/O inputs
O214.0
O214.1
O214.2
O214.3
O214.4
O214.5
O214.6
O214.7
I38.0
I38.1
I38.2
I38.3
I38.4
I38.5
I38.6
I38.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X27,
X27,
X27,
X27,
X27,
X27,
X27,
X27,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
O215.0
O215.1
O215.2
O215.3
O215.4
O215.5
O215.6
O215.7
I39.0
I39.1
I39.2
I39.3
I39.4
I39.5
I39.6
I39.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X28,
X28,
X28,
X28,
X28,
X28,
X28,
X28,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Note:
CC220
Remarks
All signals relayed to the PLC via the MTB1 I/O must be present for at least 2 PLC cycles before they
can be interpreted as HIGH or LOW signals.
415
DigitalInterface
4.1.4
CC220
PLC output addresses of the MTB1 I/O outputs

Address
Address
MTB1 I/O outputs
O248.0
O248.1
O248.2
O248.3
O248.4
O248.5
O248.6
O248.7
O32.0
O32.1
O32.2
O32.3
O32.4
O32.5
O32.6
O32.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
O249.0
O249.1
O249.2
O249.3
O249.4
O249.5
O249.6
O249.7
O33.0
O33.1
O33.2
O33.3
O33.4
O33.5
O33.6
O33.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X12,
X12,
X12,
X12,
X12,
X12,
X12,
X12,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
O250.0
O250.1
O250.2
O250.3
O250.4
O250.5
O250.6
O250.7
O34.0
O34.1
O34.2
O34.3
O34.4
O34.5
O34.6
O34.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X13,
X13,
X13,
X13,
X13,
X13,
X13,
X13,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
O251.0
O251.1
O251.2
O251.3
O251.4
O251.5
O251.6
O251.7
O35.0
O35.1
O35.2
O35.3
O35.4
O35.5
O35.6
O35.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X14,
X14,
X14,
X14,
X14,
X14,
X14,
X14,
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Note:
Remarks
All signals relayed to the PLC via the MTB1 I/O must be present for at least 2 PLC cycles before they
can be interpreted as HIGH or LOW signals.
416
DigitalInterface
4.1.5
CC220
Signals to the machine (PIC 250 with I/O 24/0.2)

Address
PIC 250
Outputs of PLC
module I/O 24/0.2
O36.0
O36.1
O36.2
O36.3
O36.4
O36.5
O36.6
O36.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
27
50
09
33
26
17
08
49
O37.0
O37.1
O37.2
O37.3
O37.4
O37.5
O37.6
O37.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
25
16
07
32
23
15
06
48
O38.0
O38.1
O38.2
O38.3
O38.4
O38.5
O38.6
O38.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
22
14
05
31
21
13
04
30
O39.0
O39.1
O39.2
O39.3
O39.4
O39.5
O39.6
O39.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
20
12
03
29
36
11
02
28
O40.0
O40.1
O40.2
O40.3
O40.4
O40.5
O40.6
O40.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
X11,
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
19
10
01
47
18
34
35
37
Remarks
If a second I/O card is used, the address range O41.0 to O45.7 is in addition used for a further
40 outputs.
If the PCI/OS is used in conjunction with PIC 250 and an external PLC extension device, the
addresses O36.0 to O63.7 can be used, subject to the capacity of the PLC I/O.
417
DigitalInterface
4.1.6
CC220
Signals from the machine (PIC 250 with I/O 24/0.2)

Address
PIC 250
Inputs of PLC
module I/O 24/0.2
I40.0
I40.1
I40.2
I40.3
I40.4
I40.5
I40.6
I40.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
48
47
50
49
33
32
17
16
I41.0
I41.1
I41.2
I41.3
I41.4
I41.5
I41.6
I41.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
46
15
31
45
30
14
29
44
I42.0
I42.1
I42.2
I42.3
I42.4
I42.5
I42.6
I42.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
13
12
28
43
11
27
42
10
I43.0
I43.1
I43.2
I43.3
I43.4
I43.5
I43.6
I43.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
26
41
09
25
24
08
40
07
I44.0
I44.1
I44.2
I44.3
I44.4
I44.5
I44.6
I44.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
23
39
06
22
38
05
21
04
I45.0
I45.1
I45.2
I45.3
I45.4
I45.5
I45.6
I45.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
X22,
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
37
20
03
36
19
02
01
18
Remarks
418
DigitalInterface
Address
PIC 250
Inputs of PLC
module I/O 24/0.2
I46.0
I46.1
I46.2
I46.3
I46.4
I46.5
I46.6
I46.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X22,
X22,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
34
35
15
07
14
06
13
05
I47.0
I47.1
I47.2
I47.3
I47.4
I47.5
I47.6
I47.7
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
PORT
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
X21,
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
12
04
11
03
10
02
09
01
CC220
Remarks
If a second I/O card is used, the address range I48.0 to I55.7 is in addition used for a further 64
inputs.
If the PCI/OS is used in conjunction with PIC 250 and an external PLC extension device, the
addresses I40.0 to I63.7 can be used, subject to the capacity of the PLC I/O.
419
DigitalInterface
SignalDescriptions
4.2
CC220
Signal descriptions
Key to abbreviations
APP
= Application
BA
= Mode
CPL
= Customer Programming Language
DNC
= Direct Numerical Control
GBA
= Group mode
H/L signal
= High/low signal
HiFu
= Auxiliary function
IF
= Interface
MDI
= Manual Data Input
MP
= Machine parameter
MPP
= Machine parameter program
MTB
= Machine Tool Builder
NC / CNC
= (Computer) numerical control
P 7009
= Machine parameter P 7009
REF.PNT.
= Reference point
RWED
= Read, W rite, Execute, Delete
PLC
= Programmable logic controllers
STROBE
= Change signal
SW
= Software
SWL
= Software limit switch
VS
= Feedrate
VSHALT
= Feed hold
MTM
= Machine tool manufacturer
Notes on signal descriptions

A description of the interface signals may be found under the corresponding PIC
address (in the Bit coupl." column in the interface tables).
1. The input and output signals and their meanings are described in relation to the
PLC or the PIC 250!
2. In the diagrams, as opposed to point 1:
I stands for a CNC input and O for a CNC output.
3. Words in upper case characters have only a direct, literal meaning with regard
to interface, softkey, programming, etc.
They are printed in bold typeface to give them particular emphasis.
e.g.
TRAVEL COMMAND (Interface)
OPTIONAL STOP (Softkey)
WAIT (Programming)
4. Words in normal case characters with speech marks are terms intended to be
emphasised within the sentence. They may or may not refer to IF signals or soft
keys.
e.g.
Modes interlock"
All axes have reached ref. pnt."
420
DigitalInterface
SignalDescriptions
CC220
5. Help signals are given in diagrams for greater clarity. These signals are only
intended to identify a particular event in the diagrams. They appear in normal
case characters.
Program activation
(Help signal)
PROGRAM EXISTS
(IF signal, softkey or program command)
6. For signal evaluation it should be remembered that certain signals are only
available in conjunction with supplied options.
421
DigitalInterface(Description)
CNCInputs
4.2.1
CC220
Control inputs (PLC outputs)

O0.0 O0.7
DRIVE ON
1 input signal per axis
General
The DRIVE ON signal is a static axisrelated signal that should only be turned on
(e.g. powerup) and off (e.g. emergency stop) at certain times.
If DRIVE ON is deactivated during a travel movement, it will be necessary to select
CONTROL RESET before restarting.
H signal
Closes the position control circuit of the relevant CNC axis and activates lag moni
toring.
L signal
Opens the position control circuit of the relevant axis and deactivates lag moni
toring.
Interrupts interpolation when the axis is involved in a movement.
Set value output of zero volts as jump function.
Sets the position set value equal to the actual position.
Switches machine on and off.
For emergency stop conditions.
For driving the axis over external set value.
Deactivating or shutting down a CNC axis.
Dismantling of axes.
Notes
If there is no DRIVE ON to an axis (DRIVE ON = LOW), it should not be jogged (PLC

interlocked!) or programmed. Exception: dry run test.
If there is no DRIVE ON to the spindle and it is driven by M3, M4, M13, then inter
polation is delayed until DRIVE ON is given. Delay means no set value or travel
command output.
The PLC must detect an idling condition in order to signal DRIVE ON. As a rule,
DRIVE ON should not be turned on by the travel command.
When axes are jammed DRIVE ON may not be set to LOW because of the jam.
Instead the start enable must be cancelled at the drive booster.
During GO BLOCK, DRIVE ON must be given for the axes involved.
422
CNCInputs
CC220
Switchon conditions
An axis that is shut down with DRIVE ON = LOW is excluded from the REFERENCE
POINTS REACHED ALL AXES modes interlock. The output signal REFERENCE
POINTS REACHED ALL AXES is cancelled after first startup at a later time. Deci
sion criterion for continued sequence in the PLC logic either with the abovemen
tioned general signal or with the single signal REFERENCE POINT REACHED.
Diagram: Switchon sequence
MACHINE/CNC ON
CNC INTERNAL TEST SEQUENCE
Contact READY2 (PS 200)
HYDRAULICS (ETC.) ON
DRIVE ON
423
CNCInputs
O1.0 O1.7
FEED ALLOW
CC220
General
With the FEED ALLOW signal it is possible to perform a controlled override of one or
more axis movements or to deactivate them.
If the signal of an axis involved in an interpolation is absent, then that movement is
not executed. A movement is intentionally (slope) interrupted. The axes come to a
stop without an inposition message with travel commands present.
The evaluation of this signal is always active, even with the spindle.
H signal
Allows one or more axis movements.
L signal
Prevents or interrupts one or more axis movements.
Application
Interlock conditions at the machine for an orderly and safe processing sequence.
Notes
This signal has the same effect on the spindle(s) as the SPINDLE SET VALUE 0
VOLT signal, but the Sword is not set to 0".
424
CNCInputs
O2.0 O2.7
REFERENCE POINT
CC220
General
O2.0 to O2.7 only have relevance for incremental encoders. Refer to 016.1 if using a
distance coded measuring system".
After activating operating mode REFERENCE POINT APPROACH (see signal
016.1), the reference to an axis must be started via the relevant signals 013.0 to
O14.7 (JOG MODE).
The speed of the reference approach per axis can be set via machine parameters
(P502 to P504). The direction in which the axis approaches the reference point can
be preset via interface signals O3.0 to O3.7.
The control recognises that the reference point cam has been reached via signals
O2.0 to O2.7. From this point onwards the marker search logic" is activated in the
CNC. At the next zero reference mark pulse of the measuring system in the direc
tion of travel, the marker search logic defines the current position as the reference
point and stores this position in relation to the limit switch values.
NOTES!
The maximum following travel range is traversed during the first ref. pnt. ap
proach: P 1505 to P 1506. The axes must therefore be within the travel range
when the machine is switched on. If this is not the case it is possible that an axis
will remain at a standstill during the Reference Point Approach, because the
limit switches respond.
The ref. pnt. and the ref. pnt. marker are displaced by the ref. pnt. offset. Both
the ref. pnt. marker and the ref. pnt. itself are overrun during ref. pnt. approach.
For this reason the limit switches must be positioned far enough away.
If the axis is at the reference point cam before the start of the Reference Point
Approach (cam pressed, i.e. signal O2.x = HIGH), then the opposite travel
direction (in relation to the DIRECTION OF REFERENCE signal) is selected and
the standard sequence is reselected with the signal change from O2.x.
During Reference Point Approach, the PLC sets the PLC output signal REFER
ENCE POINT APPROACH if it initiated the reference.
If all axes have traversed to the reference point at least once, the signal REFER
ENCE POINT APPROACH MODE is set by the CNC to LOW level and the signal
REFERENCE POINTS REACHED ALL AXES to HIGH level.
H signal
Activates the marker search logic. At the next zero reference mark pulse of the
measuring system in the direction of travel, the marker search logic defines the cur
rent position as the reference point and stores this position in relation to the limit
switch values.
L signal
Marker search logic is switched off, i.e. not active.
425
CNCInputs
CC220
SOFTWARE
Ref. pnt. reduction
Ref. pnt. reduction
Slope reduction
+ Slope reduction
Software limit
switch
Software limit
switch +
Emergency
stop
Ref. pnt. cam
Emergency stop
Ref. pnt. cam

neg. ref. pnt. direction
pos. ref. pnt. direction

Mech. travel range
HARDWARE
Reference Point Approach (sequence)
Referencepointcam
EMERG.STOPcam
R
1
P502
1 = repeatreferencepointapproach
2 = firstreferencepointapproach
R = referencepointmarker
P503
P503
P504
D1
P504
D3
IS
D2
IS
P502=Referencepointspeed
P503=1stReductionreferencepoint
P504=2ndReductionreferencepoint
D1
=Doublebacklashcompensation(P1509)(accordingtospeed+9901)
D2
=ReferencepointOffsetinpos.direction(P1502)
D3
=ReferencepointOffsetinneg.direction(P1502)
IS
=ActualPositionsettingfacility
Remarks:
ForrepeatReferencePointApproachthetransitionpointfrom
P502toP503iscomputed.
D1toD3canbesetto0.
Ifnecessary,D1andD2mustbeallowedforwhenpositioning
theEMERG.STOPcam.
Notes
The switch/cam track/marker arrangement should conform to the above diagram.
It is possible to traverse several reference points with one axis using machine para
meter P114, IF input signal INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR and the signal DIREC
TION OF REFERENCE (input).
426
CNCInputs
O3.0 O3.7
DIRECTION OF REFERENCE.
CC220
H signal
Causes axis to traverse to reference point in negative direction.
L signal
Causes axis to traverse to reference point in positive direction.
Notes
During the reference point traverse the direction of travel does not change when the
signal changes.
The DIRECTION OF REFERENCE signal is axisrelated and can be set statically to
HIGH or LOW if the reference point is to be approached always from the same
direction.
If the direction input is dependent on the axis position and signalled to the CNC, this
can be performed with the relevant cam track using a camoperated switch, for
example.
If using a distance coded measuring system, the cam track must be at least twice
as long as the distance between two cyclic markers (see also O16.1).
Example:
Cam is pressed:
Cam is not pressed:
Reference Point Approached in neg. direction.

reference point approached in pos. direction.
+Direction
Direction
RR
Travelrange
R = Referencepoint
427
CamTrack
CNCInputs
O4.0 O4.7
(NOT) REDUCTION
CC220
General
O4.0 to O4.7 only have relevance for incremental encoders. Refer to 016.1 if using a
distance coded measuring system".
This signal does not need to be evaluated or activated in most cases because it is
only relevant to the first ref. pnt. approach after switching on or after a ref. pnt. has
been cleared.
The signal is evaluated statically and is axisrelated; the speed change is con
trolled.
H signal
Reference point is approached the first time at full speed (definable in MP 502).
L signal
Reference point is approached the first time at reduced speed (definable in MP 503).
Application
Dynamic evaluation of the signal (from High to Low) is not feasible unless an ap
preciable amount of time can be saved on first Reference Point Approach due to
long traversing distances.
Since this will be the exception rather than the rule, this additional switch evaluation
process should be disregarded (added cost).
Note
During the second and subsequent Reference Point Approaches, the reference
point is approached at full speed (MP 502) and a reduction is calculated and in
itiated automatically by the NC.
The reference point can be cleared with the INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR" sig
nal. After this the reference point reduction is not active until the first approach, if
Low level is present at the (NOT) REDUCTION input.
Particular feature of rotary axes
With repeated ref. pnt. approaches the speed is reduced and the reference point is
approached within one revolution. This also applies when a number of axis rota
tions have already taken place.
428
CNCInputs
CC220
O5.0
TRANSFER ALLOW
1 input signal
General
This signal is static in operating modes Automatic, Single Block/Single Step (NC
mode), Manual Data Input (MDI mode) and Switch Function (machine mode).
H signal
Allows the next or the same block to be executed
(depending on transfer stop; MP: P 2002).
L signal
Inhibits the execution of the next block or the active block
(depending on transfer stop; MP: P 2002).
Application
Used for dedicated control of the program sequence at the machine.
Initiated by freely programmable conditions in the PLC or alternatively by auxiliary
functions programmed in the part program (e.g. M6: tool change, pallet change,
etc.), TRANSFER ALLOW can also be temporarily suppressed.
Note
With exclusively auxiliary functions the execution of the next block can only be in
hibited when TRANSFER ALLOW is suppressed during the change signal dur
ation (strobe).
Diagram
see diagram under I3.0 to I7.7 MULTIPLE OUTPUT.
429
CNCInputs
O5.1
EDIT INHIBIT
CC220
1 input signal
General
This signal acts statically on part programs and tables of various types. Also on MP
file L444 and lead screw error compensation files L101L108.
Exception: W tables, e.g. for tool and workpiece handling.
H signal
Changing programs and tables is not possible.
L signal
Changing programs is possible with the RWED protection standard.
Application
A keyswitch prevents the changing of programs and tables by unauthorised per
sonnel.
Note
The keyswitch is not part of the control system and should be provided by the MTM
at the toolsetting panel.
430
CNCInputs
CC220
O5.2
BLOCK SLASH
1 input signal
General
This signal acts statically on those blocks in the part program identified with a slash
/".
H signal
Effect is active, i.e. blocks with slash identification are masked as long as the blocks
are not in the editing memory. If blocks within the editing memory should be
masked, this must be done with the program using WAIT (see CPL description).
L signal
The blocks identified by a slash /" are executed normally.
Application
One of a number of alternatives for flexible part program configuration.
In the simplest instance this input signal is combined with the NC output signal of
the same name BLOCK SLASH (I9.2).
Additional interlock conditions derived from the PLC can also be included.
431
CNCInputs
O5.3
CC220
1 input signal
General
This is a statically transmitted Not signal which is nonlatching in the CNC and acts
on all axes and spindles. It is always an H signal in normal modes. This signal has
the effect of Drive Off.
H signal
Regular CNC mode.
L signal
Interrupts an ongoing movement and/or interpolation or inhibits it.
Sets all set value outputs to 0 volts by jump function.
The message EMERGENCY STOP ACTIVE" is displayed in the main menu of
group mode diagnostics under faults.
Application
EMERGENCY STOP is detected when a hazard situation arises at the machine.

This can be caused automatically by the PLC or manually. The EMERGENCY
STOP condition is latched in the PLC and transmitted continuously to the CNC
by a Low signal for as long as the EMERGENCY STOP situation lasts.
Before the signal is transmitted again (emergency stop condition cleared), CON
TROL RESET must be signalled to achieve a starting condition in the CNC.
Special feature
If EMERGENCY STOP is initiated while a spindle is running (M3, M4), the spindle
logic will call for control reset" from the PLC before reacceleration.
Control reset can be induced manually or with an IF signal (O16.4). In either case
an output signal (I9.1) is sent to the PLC as an acknowledgement.
Notes
The machine must be shut down immediately in the event of a malfunction or

the failure of control elements.
Refer to section Other signals, Ready 2".
Ensure that the machine shutdown cannot be inhibited in any other way!
432
CNCInputs
O5.4
NC START
CC220
1 input signal
General
This signal is not static and is defined in the form of a pulse (duration: min. approx.
150 ms). Active in modes Automatic, Single block/Single step, MDI and under
Switch functions".
L / H slope
Starts a program or axis movement or executes a block, as long as the input signal
(NOT) FEED HOLD has High level.
Application
The NC START" key is located in the setup panel of the machine and falls within
the remit of the MTM.
From this button, the signal is looped to the PLC and returned to the CNC depend
ing on a number of interlock conditions. In principle, NC START should not be
possible unless NC READY has High level.
Notes
A flipflop function must be provided in the PLC in conjunction with (NOT)

FEED HOLD, because (NOT) FEED HOLD is not selflatching in the CNC.
In operating modes NC (execute) and MDI, NC START should only be sig

nalled by the PLC to the CNC when the CNC output signal REFERENCE
POINTS REACHED ALL AXES (I8.5) is set. If the output of auxiliary functions
in Switch functions" mode (softkey) is required without the reference point
being traversed, then the signal NC START can be enabled with the simulta
neous active signal SWITCH FUNCTIONS MODE.
If a program is selected before the machine is switched on (all signals DRIVE

ON at LOW), the power may be switched on only when the program selected
is cancelled.
The signals NC READY and PROGRAM RUNNING in the Machine on"
branch must be linked with AN". The message Cancel program" should be
displayed via the machine status display (MSD).
433
CNCInputs
CC220
O5.5
(NOT) FEED HOLD
1 input signal
General
This signal is static, nonlatching and is a Not signal.
It does not affect auxiliary functions or asynchronous movements and only
affects synchronous axis movements.
Auxiliary axes are held with FEED ALLOW.
H signal
Precondition for normal CNC mode, e.g. program sequence after NCSTART or jog
mode.
L signal
Controlled interrupt or inhibition of axis movements.
No effect on spindle speed.
Acts on the output signal PROGRAM RUNNING (Low signal).
Application
Inclusion of machinedependent safetycritical machine functions or prevention of
Feed hold" during active thread cutting (G 33) and thread tapping (G 84).
Note
NC START and FEED HOLD must be configured as flipflop functions in the PLC
because NC START must be able to clear the FEED HOLD conditions.
434
CNCInputs
CC220
O5.6
LOCAL/REMOTE (DNC)
1 input signal
General
A static signal only relevant in conjunction with DNC operation.
H signal
Signifies that certain operations can no longer be performed by the host computer
(DNC LOCAL mode).
L signal
No restrictions on the host computer (DNC REMOTE mode).
Application
The setting is usually performed by means of an external switch on the machine
panel. The DNC mode can be changed at any time by setting or resetting the input
signal (I5.6). The operator is not restricted in any way in terms of operating at the
control in either mode.
In LOCAL mode the HOST only has a limited range of DNC functions at its disposal.
It is intended for manual operations at the machine. DNC functions which inhibit
manual operation or which might endanger the operator (Reference Point Ap
proach, start program) are interlocked in the CNC. This only applies to com
mands sent directly from the HOST to the CNC. Operations by the PLC are not
inhibited by LOCAL mode. If transparent communication between HOST and
PLC is possible then suitable interlocking in the PLC program must ensure
that disturbing or hazardous functions cannot be initiated in this way.
The following DNC functions cannot be initiated by the HOST in LOCAL mode:
File transfers
Read in to existing W tables
Delete files
Reset alarms
Start programs
Select program / table
Reference Point Approaches
Initiate CONTROL RESET
Link in background
Direct execution via DNC interface
The REMOTE mode is provided for automatic production control. The HOST com
puter can apply the full range of DNC functions.The user must ensure that their
automatic production control is not disrupted by operator intervention at the
CNC.
435
CNCInputs
CC220
O6.0
OPTIONAL STOP
1 input signal
General
This signal acts statically on M1 blocks in the part program.
H signal
The signal is active on the next M1 block if the block is not yet active in the edit mem
ory. The program is interrupted as with M0.
If an M1 block in the edit memory is to be effectively captured, this must be done
with the program using WAIT (see CPL description).
L signal
No effect.
Application
One of a number of alternatives for flexible part program configuration and/or fulfil
ling and calling control functions at the machine.
In the simplest case this input signal must be combined with the CNC output signal
of the same name OPTIONAL STOP.
Additional interlock conditions on the part of the PLC are possible.
436
CNCInputs
CC220
O6.1
DIRECT CALL
1 input signal
General
If the control is located in the uppermost plane of MDI mode, a program defined in
machine parameter P4016 can be activated using the DIRECT CALL softkey or the
interface signal 6.1. NC START starts the program.
NC and/or CPL commands are permissible in this program. M30specific oper
ations are not performed, i.e. the command M30 acts as if the program defined in
P4016 were a subprogram.
The softkey DIRECT CALL does not appear if the value 0 is entered in P4016. In this
case the interface signal will also be inactive.
L / H slope
The program defined in P4016 is activated with rising slope.
Diagram
DIRECT CALL (O6.1)

MDI MODE (I8.2)
NC READY (I10.1)
NC START (O5.4)
PROGRAM RUNNING (I8.7)
O6.3
1 input signal
General
If the control is located in the uppermost level of MACHINE mode, a program de
fined in machine parameter P4011 under [MAC] can be started using the CPL DIA
LOGUE softkey or the interface signal 6.3, if the CPL expansion option (CPL dia
logue and graphics) is applied at the control.
The uppermost level of machine mode can be selected with the IF signal Machine
mode".
L / H slope
The CPL program defined in P4011 under [MAC] is activated with rising slope at
6.3.
437
CNCInputs
O6.4
MODE INHIBIT
CC220
1 input signal
General
The MODE INHIBIT signal is used to determine whether the operator can select all
modes at the CNC (machine, execute, diagnostics, correction, etc.), or only move
within a single mode.
L/H slope or H/L slope
There is a change in the uppermost level (entry level) of the currently active mode.
H signal
Only the functions of the currently active mode can be used. A change to other
modes is not possible (GOM keys are disabled).
L signal
Changing to all other modes is permitted.
Note
A particular mode can be selected automatically after turning on the control in con
junction with machine parameter P 9916 (GOM powerup state) and then fixed for
the operator with MODE INHIBIT.
O6.5
MULTI STROBE
1 input signal
General
This signal allows the PLC to perform a selective transfer of various data to the mul
tiple input of the CNC (O8.0 O11.7 DATA LINE MULTIMODE). The PLC cannot
edit the data while MULTI STROBE has High level!
L / H slope
Instructs the CNC to accept the data.
H / L slope
Transfer time terminated by PLC.
Diagram
DATA
MULTI STROBE (I)
MULTIRECEIPT (O)
438
CNCInputs
O6.6
CC220
1 INPUT SIGNAL
General
Incremental or absolute positional set values can be defined for synchonous or

asynchronous axes using the multiple data input (DATA LINE MULTIMODE) (see
signals O7.0 O7.7, MULTIMODE VALUE). The PLC cannot edit this signal while
MULTI STROBE has High level.
H signal
Data at the multiple data input are interpreted incrementally by the CNC.
L signal
Data at the multiple data entry are interpreted absolutely by the CNC.
Application
Axis control from the PLC; transfer of values which can be evaluated by the CPL for
a variety of purposes, e.g. correction value, zero offsets, etc.
Note
Not required for external program selection and MSD data (machine status dis
play).
439
CNCInputs
O6.7
SIGN (+/) (L/H)
CC220
1 input signal
General
This signal can also be seen in context with the multiple data input (DATA LINE
MULTIMODE) of the CNC. It allows the transfer of signed data in BCD format (see
also signals O7.0 O7.7, MULTIMODE VALUE).
The PLC cannot edit this signal while MULTI STROBE has High level.
!
H signal
Data at the multiple data input are interpreted as negative values by the CNC.
L signal
Data at the multiple data input are interpreted as positive values by the CNC.
Application
As for ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL signal.
Driving of axes
CPL data
Note
Sign decoding is not required for external program selection and MSD data.
440
CNCInputs
O7.0 O7.7
MULTIMODE VALUE 1128
CC220
8 input signals
General
This 8bit MULTIMODE channel must be seen in context with the multidata input.
The data lines (CNC inputs 8.011.7: DATA LINE MULTIMODE) are interpreted dif
ferently by the NC depending on which 8bit word is present here. While the MULTI
STROBE (O6.5) signal has HIGHlevel, the PLC may not alter MULTIMODE data!
Applications
Machine errors and status display (MSD)

Transfer of axis set values from PLC to CNC
External program selection
Data exchange between PLC and a CPL task.
Changing the feed, spindle, rapid override values by the PLC (in exceptional
cases only, when the potentiometers have been connected at the PLC and not
at the CNC).
Switching drilling axes
Machine errors and status display (MSD)

The machine error and status display (MSD) function enables the machinetool
manufacturer to display plaintext messages regarding operating status and ma
chine errors at the CNC panel.
The CNC provides screen pages which can each display 32 MSD texts. The sum of
all machine errors or status texts can be displayed in the DIAGNOSTIC mode by
means of the MSD softkey. A machine error flashes in reverse video, while a true
machine state is shown in continuous reverse video.
In all other CNC modes, only one MSD text can be displayed in the top line of the
panel (machine errors only, machine status is not displayed here). Where several
errors/statuses exist simultaneously, only the machine error with the highest prior
ity is shown. Priorities are defined by corresponding text numbers in the MSD file.
The MSD text with the lowest text number has the highest priority.
Preconditions for machine error and status display:
the PLC signals to the CNC the machine errors and status via the digital inter
face (each time an error/status changes)
the corresponding plaintext messages (max. 224, up to 2048 with CNCPLC

word coupling) are filed in an ASCII file (with DFS header) with the identifier P
in the RAM, EPROM or EEPROM (e.g. P999999999). The file number used
must be defined in machine parameter P9915, where up to 21 file numbers
can be specified (for different languages). One of these MSD language files
can then be activated as required. The following format must be applied for
an MSD text in this file:
(E<Text number>,<max. 28 characters of text>) <LF> for machine errors
(Z<Text number>,<max. 28 characters of text>) <LF> for machine status
(B<Text number>,<max. 28 characters of text>) <LF> for mode message
(LSV2DNC only).
441
CNCInputs
CC220
Assignment of text numbers to screen pages:

1 to 32:
Page 1, status text 132
33 to 64:
65 to 96:
97 to 128:
129 to 160:
161 to 192:
193 to 224:
Example: The second status text on the third screen page is assigned the text
number 66.
The transfer of machine errors and statuses from the PLC to the CNC is performed
by selecting
the required MSD page using the CNC inputs MULTIMODE VALUE (7.0 to
7.7):
The PLC selects the correct MSD page with the codes shown below. The sig
nals at the CNC inputs (8.011.7) are then interpreted as MSD statuses of the
selected MSD page. CNC input 8.0 is assigned to the first status text of the
selected page, and input 11.7 to the 32nd status text.
Value
O7.7
Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
Page 4
Page 5
Page 6
Page 7
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
O7.0
L
L
L
H
L
H
H
L
H
L
H
H
H
H
decimal:
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
the required MSD statuses of that page using the DATA LINE MULTIMODE
multiple data input of the CNC (8.011.7). If an MSD condition is true, the
PLC must transmit a High signal on the data line concerned.
If the PLC has set all necessary signals it instructs the CNC to accept the data by
setting the MULTI STROBE signal (6.5). The CNC MULTIRECEIPT output signal
(9.3) tells the PLC that the CNC has accepted the data.
442
CNCInputs
CRT
Page 1
CNC Interface
Text selection
1
.
.
16
17
.
.
32
(within a page)
Page 2
1
.
.
16
17
.
.
32
.
.
.
Page selection
Page 7
1
.
.
16
17
.
.
32
CC220
8.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11.7
7.0
.
.
.
.
.
7.7
DATA LINE MULTIMODE:

static signals for the duration of
the transfer
MULTIMODE VALUE:
static signals for the duration of
the transfer
DATA transfer:
MULTI STROBE (6.5)
MULTIRECEIPT (9.3)
Transfer of MSD data from the PLC to the CNC
Transfer of axis positional and feed set values from PLC to CNC
Certain applications with synchronous and/or asynchronous axes require an exter
nal set value input for positioning or feed. Whether or not external set value inputs
are permitted for positioning values of an axis can be defined with machine para
meter P112 (only relevant for asynchronous axes). Whether or not external set
value inputs are permitted for feed values of an axis can be defined with interface
signal O15.4 EXTERNAL FEED.
The external set value input can be defined either BCD or binary coded, depending
on the definition in machine parameter P113, in the unit increments" (for positional
inputs), or mm/min or degrees/min (for feed inputs). For BCDcoded positional
data, the sign can be specified by the PLC via CNC input 6.7.
It is also possible to define the positional set value as a location number (e.g. tool
locations D1 D48). Please refer to the manual Machine parameters", parameter
P110.
Using the CNC input 6.6, the PLC can stipulate whether the CNC interprets the de
fined positioning value incrementally or absolutely.
The speeds to be run can be selected by the PLC in two ways:
by the interface signals MANUAL FEED RAPID, FAST, MEDIUM, SLOW (see
O15.0 to O15.3), to which fixed values are assigned for each axis in machine
parameters P505P508, or
by external speed input via the multiinterface, if the CNC input signal 15.4
has High level (see interface signal O15.4 EXTERNAL FEED).
Programming the relevant axis from the part program is possible even with an ex
ternal set value input of the axis position or the axis feed, provided this information
is output to the PLC as an auxiliary function via the CNC multiple output (see CNC
outputs 3.0 to 7.7). This output information can then be evaluated, processed and
443
CNCInputs
CC220
modified by the PLC and returned to the control.

When External set value input" for position and speed is defined in machine para
meter P112 or by interface signal O15.4 EXTERNAL FEED, the multiple input and
the interface signals relevant to this axis are released or activated.
The following codes for the MULTIMODE VALUE signals define the axis for which a
positioning set value is selected:
O7.7
1st axis
2nd axis
3rd axis
4th axis
5th axis
6th axis
7th axis
8th axis
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
O7.0.
L
L
L
L
L
H
L
H
H
L
H
L
H
H
H
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
Value
decimal:
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
The data at the CNC inputs 8.0 to 11.7 are then interpreted as positioning values (in
increments). The following applies independently of the active measuring system
(metric/inch):
1mm =
10 (P103) Increments for linear axes, and
1 degree = 10 (P103) Increments for rotary axes.
The end position is defined as the actual machine position (if O6.6 ABSOLUTE/IN
CREMENTAL = Low), so NC internal reference point offsets do not have to be con
sidered.
When grid programming (see machine parameter P108), the position is pro
grammed directly without decimal places!
(9.3) tells the PLC that the CNC has accepted the data and the axes are traversed.
The signals to the MULTIRECEIPT I0.0 to I1.7 (POS/NEG TRAVERSE COMMAND
xth AXIS) are output delayed.
The PLC can query whether the given end position of an axis has been reached via
the CNC interface outputs I19.0 to I19.7 (EXT. POS. REACHED 1ST to 8TH AXIS).
As soon as synchronous or asynchronous axes are started via the multiinterface,
the corresponding CNC interface outputs I19.x are set to Low level. This also
applies when the axis does not traverse at all due to an error!
After reaching the end position, the CNC firstly generates the axisspecific signal
AXIS IN POSITION (I2.x) and then sets I19.x to High level. This output remains set
until the corresponding axis is restarted via an external set value input, or control
reset is entered.
a new set value can be entered for externally programmed axes which cannot
reach their predetermined values. For this the FEED ALLOW (O1.0 to 1.7) of the axis
in question is removed and the new set value is transmitted via the multiinterface.
The remaining distance to go is then automatically deleted.
If an axis is stopped via FEED ALLOW (O1.0 to 1.7), the signal E19.x of the axis in
question remains at Low level! If a new set value is stipulated, the signal will not
change until the new position has reached High.
When setting the signal MULTI STROBE (6.5), the following preconditions must be
fulfilled for the axes to be traversed:
An undefined multimodecode leads to the warning OPTION INACTIVE".

Interface outputs E19.x are in this case not described.
444
CNCInputs
CC220
If necessary, the reference point for the axis to be traversed must have been
approached (except in test operation). Otherwise the warning NO REF.
POINTS" will appear.
NC status NC WAITING" (not applicable for externally programmable,
asynchronous axes). If not, the warning PROGRAM IS ACTIVE" will appear.
High level at at least one of the inputs O15.0 to O15.4 (feedrate selection).
Otherwise the feedrate=0 and the axis comes to a standstill without warn
ing. If High level exists at input 15.4 (external feed), the selected axis must be
allocated a feedrate value via the multiinterface.
Where software limit switches have been supressed the predetermined set
value must not lie past the limit switch; otherwise the warning LIMIT SWITCH
x.AXIS" is issued and the axis will not be traversed.
An axis already in motion cannot be restarted (except by removing FEED
ALLOW; see above). Otherwise the warning AXIS MOVING" appears.
The following codes for the MULTIMODE VALUE signals define the axis for which a
feedrate set value is selected: The data at CNC inputs 8.0 to 11.7 are then interp
treted as feedrate values (in 0.1 mm/min or in 0.1degrees/min):
O7.7
1st axis
2nd axis
3rd axis
4th axis
5th axis
6th axis
7th axis
8th axis
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
O7.0.
H
L
H
L
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
Value
decimal:
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Changes in speed are possible by overwriting the current value or switching over to
manual feed. The transferal of a new feedrate set value is also permitted during the
traversing movement of the axis in question, but only becomes active with axes that
were not started via jog mode or Reference Point Approach, or during traversing
movement. The entry 0" is allowed as feedrate and means no movement". The
rapid traverse value (of an axis) defined in P501 cannot be exceeded here by a
preset value which is too large.
(9.3) then tells the PLC that the CNC has accepted the data.
445
CNCInputs
CC220
External program selection

If the PLC wishes to select a program in the CNC, it must first check whether that
program exists in the CNC (Program search" function). This is also possible while
a program is running. If the program is available, the CNC issues the PROGRAM
EXISTS signal (9.7) at the same time as the CNC MULTIRECEIPT signal (9.3).
Once this is done the PLC can then activate the program (Program activate" func
tion). This is on the precondition that the reference points are approached and
FEED HOLD is present. If the program is available in the CNC and is executable
(RWED protection), the CNC outputs the EXTERNAL PROGRAM SELECTION sig
nal, which must be present for at least the duration of a CPL strobe (see machine
parameter P 4012) or during a linkage run if this is required.
The NC signal is then issued and an NC start can be activated.
"Program activate" deselects an already active program.
The following codes for the MULTIMODE VALUE signals specify whether the Pro
gram search" or Program selection" has been initiated. The data at the CNC in
puts 8.0 to 11.7 are then interpreted as program numbers.
O7.7
L
L
Program search:
Program activate:
L
L
L
L
H
H
L
L
O7.0
L
L
L
L
L
H
Value
decimal:
16
17
If the PLC has set all necessary signals (MULTIMODE VALUE, DATA LINE MULTI
MODE), it instructs the CNC to accept the data by setting the MULTI STROBE signal
(6.5). The CNC MULTIRECEIPT output signal (9.3) then tells the PLC that the CNC
has accepted the data.
Diagram: Program activate:
DATA AT MULTIPLE
INPUT (BINARY/BCD)
Program activate
(8 coded inputs)
MULTI STROBE (I)
MULTIRECEIPT (O)
EXT. PROGRAM SELECT (O)
(* see below)
NC READY (O)
NC START (O)
PROGRAM RUNNING
Signal must be present for at least as long as the MULTISTROBE signal
is present following MULTIRECEIPT (L/H slope).
446
CNCInputs
CC220
Diagram: Program search

DATA AT MULTIPLE
INPUT (BINARY/BCD)
Program search
(8 encoded inputs)
MULTI STROBE (I)
MULTIRECEIPT (O)
PROGRAM EXISTS (O)
Note:
Error messages can be initiated by the program selection e.g.
Programming error in the part program
Table or subroutine not available
Memory overflow
Program in control (when FEED HOLD is missing)
Data acceptance by CPL

The following code for the MULTIMODE VALUE signals stipulates that data at CNC
inputs 8.0 to 11.7 are to be interpreted as CPL data. The PLC can stipulate which
CPL Task (CPL in dialogue" and/or CPL under execution") should receive the
value.
Transferal to:
CPL in dialogue" and
CPL under execution":
Only to CPL under execution":
Only to CPL in dialogue":
O7.7
Value
decimal:
O7.0
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
H
18
36
37
The PLC can transmit the data either BCD or binaryencoded as defined in ma
chine parameter P113 (for BCDencoded data the sign can be defined by the PLC
at CNC input 6.7).
If the value exists in BCD format, then a BCD/binary conversion into integer format
must be performed before it is used in CPL as a numerical value (e.g. filing the value
into a variable).
(6.5). The CNC MULTIRECEIPT output signal (9.3) then tells the PLC that the CNC
has accepted the data.
The CPL data are initially bufferstored by the CNC. These data can be accessed in
the appropriate CPL program by using the MIC" command (see CPL program
ming manual).
NOTE
For the transferal of CPL data to the PLC see I3.0 to I7.7 and I10.7.
447
CNCInputs
CC220
Drilling axis changeover

Apart from making it possible to define the drilling axis via machine parameter
P6507 and to change over to other axes using G function 78, this mutlimode func
tion facilitates the changeover of the drilling axis through the PLC interface with
selected and deselected part programs as well. For this the following multimode
value is necessary:
O7.7
Change over drilling axis:
O7.0
H
H
Value
decimal:
1
Precondition for the changeover is the signals O5.0 TRANSFER ALLOW and O5.5
(NOT) FEEDRATE HOLD being at LOW level.
Which axis is changed over to is determined by using interface signals O8.0 to
O11.7 (see description O8.0 to O11.7 DATA LINE MULTIMODE in this manual), as
the appropriate axis number (18) must be present there in binary or BCD format
(e.g. binary: 1st axis = O8.0 at HIGH, 2nd axis = O8.1 at HIGH, 3rd axis = O8.0 and
O8.1 at HIGH etc.). The entry of 0" means: no changeover via interface.
You give the compensation direction via the signal O6.7 SPECIAL CHARACTERS
+/.
The active drilling axis and the compensation direction are displayed in group
mode COMPENSATION softkey PROGRAM PARAMETER.
Diagram
TRANSFER ALLOW
(NOT) FEED HOLD
Data at multimode input
7.07.7
Data at 8.011.7 DATA LINE MUL
TIMODE and
6.7 SPECIAL CHARACTER +/
MULTI STROBE (I)
MULTIRECEIPT (O)
NOTE!
For changeover of the drilling axis the programming has top priority via G78.
If G79 is active (no programmed changeover), the last drilling axis selected
via the interface prevails. If no drilling axis was selected via interface, the set
ting in machine parameter 6507 prevails.
As the value 0" could also be preset via interface, the control interprets this
value (axis number) as if no selection had been carried out via the interface. In
this case the machine parameter setting or the programming (G78/79) is ef
fective.
After switching on the CNC, the drilling axis which is defined 6507 is the active
one.
After control reset the last interface setting made becomes ineffective. If this
last value was 0", P 6507 becomes relevant again.
If drilling axis changeover takes place during an active program, no pre
pared blocks may exist at this time (> CPL command WAIT).
448
CNCInputs
CC220
Changing the Feed, Spindle, Rapid Override Values by the PLC

Potentiometers for axis and spindle speeds are usually directly connected at the
panel or MTB I/O. The CNC the evaluates the data and mofifies the active override
values (feed, rapid, spindle) accordingly.
In exceptional cases it is possible to modify the override values via the CNC inter
face (only possible for potentiometerswhich are parameteredwith YES" under
parameter IF" in machine parameters P 2503 and P 2506).
To achieve this, potentiometers or other suitable controls (digital or analog) must
be connected up to the PLC for adjusting the override values (e.g. switches). The
PLC then interrogates their data or settings, decodes them and transmits them in
digital form to the CNC via the DATA LINE MULTIMODE CNC inputs.
The following codes for the CNC MULTIMODE VALUE inputs (7.0 to 7.7)define the
potentiometer (18) to which these data are assigned.
O7.7
Pot.1 (abs)
Pot.2 (abs)
Pot.3 (abs)
Pot.4 (abs)
Pot.5 (inc)
Pot.6 (inc)
Pot.7 (inc)
Pot.8 (inc)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
O7.0
L
H
H
L
H
L
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
Value
decimal:
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Depending on the assigned potentiometer numbers the transferred data for feed/
rapid and spindle speed are computed absolutely or incrementally in the CNC (see
Machine parameters" manual, Parameter group 2500).
Potentiometer data are transferred via the DATA LINE MULTIMODE CNC inputs.
Machine parameter P 113 determines how the CNC interprets the transferred data
(binary or BCD encoded).113.
Absolute potentiometer data can only be transferred within the numerical range 0
to 255, and incremental data in the numerical range 128 to +127.
For BCDencoded data the sign can be defined by the PLC through CNC input 6.7,
while with binaryencoded data a negative number in twos complement must be
transferred.
(6.5). The CNC MULTIRECEIPT output signal (9.3) then informs the PLC once the
CNC has accepted the data.
449
CNCInputs
O8.0 O11.7
DATA LINE MULTIMODE
CC220
32 input signals
Data can be transferred from the PLC to the CNC down this 32bit wide data chan
nel. The purpose the data is intended for is defined by the CNC input signal MULTI
MODE VALUE (7.0 to 7.7).
The way in which the data are interpreted by the CNC (binary/BCD) is determined
by machine parameter P 113 (exception: MSD data are always decimal decoded).
The value ranges of the transferred data vary according to the setting:
20 230, +/ Binary (negative values as twos complement)
1 8 x 107
BCD (sign across CNC input 6.7)
1 32
Decimal (always only 1bit or input signal of max. 32)
After it accepts the data triggered by the MULTISTROBE CNC input (6.5) the
CNC gives the MULTIRECEIPT output signal (9.3) to the PLC in acknowledgment.
The latter can then transmit more data to the CNC.
The DATA LINE MULTIMODE signals must remain static and present throughout
the transfer procedure.
Diagram
DATA AT MULTIPLE
INPUT (32 BIT)
MULTIMODE VALUE
(8bitencoded inputs)
MULTI STROBE (I)
MULTIRECEIPT (O)
* SIGNS (+/) (E)
*ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL (I)
* depends on data type
450
CNCInputs
O12.0
AUXILIARY FUNCTION RECEIPT
CC220
1 input signal
General
This signal must be seen in conjunction with the ouput of auxiliary functions across
the multiple count of the CNC (CNC outputs 3.0 to 6.7). It is used for reliable data
acceptance by the PLC.
H signal
Is sent by the PLC to the CNC as soon as the PLC has accepted the data output
from the CNC. Once the handshake is completed, more data can be transmitted
from the CNC.
L signal
Initiated by the negative slope of the corresponding strobe signal (see CNC out
puts 7.0 to 7.7, STROBE"), the L signal must be transmitted from the PLC to the
CNC.
Diagram
Data at Multiple Output

Delay time
STROBE M, S, T (O)
AUX. FUNCT. RECEIPT (I)
Application
Output of switching and auxiliary function M, S, T etc., acceptance of data by the
PLC and shortening of the strobe duration at maximum setting.
The strobe should be set to a time of approx. 200 ms in the Auxiliary Function Re
ceipt mode (see Machine parameters" manual, P2008).
Important: Machine parameter P2003 Delete data after issue" must be set to NO
in Auxiliary Function Receipt (handshake) mode!
451
CNCInputs
O12.1
OPTIONAL JUMP ON
CC220
1 input signal
General
This statistically defined signal acts with a G23 programmed in the part program.
H signal
The jump with programmed G23 is performed as log, as the block with G23 has not
been not processed by block initialisation at the time of the L/H slope. If the function
is also required to be active for program blocks already processed at the time of the
L/H slope, then WAIT must be programmed in the block before G23 (see CPL de
scription).
L signal
Jump at G23 is not executed.
Application
One of a number of options for flexible part program configuration depending on
workpiece machining.
O12.3
1 input signal
General
This is a special signal used only in exceptional circumstances. It is a static signal
that must be given for the period of the desired software limit suppression. SW limit
suppression is active for the axes defined in machine parameter P 1504.
H signal
Suppression of SW limit switch is active. There is no range monitoring.
!
L signal
Suppression of SW limits is not active. The SW limit switch values stored in machine
parameter group 1500 are active.
Application
Special cases, e.g. individual axis replacement.
Note
With active SW limit suppression, both machine and PLC must be secured by the
safety critical conditions being fulfilled!
Before suppression is cancelled, the axis must be moved into the permitted SWL
(software limit switch) range.
With synchronous axes this signal must be set before NC START (Program start) in
order to induce SWL suppression. With asynchronous axes, suppression can also
be performed within an ongoing program.
452
CNCInputs
CC220
O12.4 AUTOMATIC
1 input signal
O12.5 SINBLOCK
1 input signal
(only with CC220M; functionality with CC220T see next page)
General
The operating modes AUTOMATIC and SINBLOCK can also be selected through
CNC interface inputs 12.4 or 12.5 except through softkeys.
Function
If the two signals are not active, the user can as before choose between the operat
ing modes automatic and single block in the softkey level PROGRAM CHECK.
Activating one of the two interface signals causes a changeover to the correspon
ding operating mode (see table 1). In this condition a selection via AUTOMATIC or
SINBLOCK softkey is not possible (if attempted, the message ACTIVATION NOT
PERMITTED" will appear). If both signals are active, the AUTOMATIC signal has
priority.
If the two interface signals SINBLOCK and AUTOMATIC are deactivated, the last
selected status is retained and can be changed again with a softkey.
AUTOMATIC
SINBLOCK
L
L
L
H
H
H
Table1
L
H
H > L
L
H
> L L
Function
AUTOMATIC/SINBLOCK via softkey
SINBLOCK active, softkeys disabled
SINBLOCK remains active, softkeys allowed
AUTOMATIC active, softkeys disabled
AUTOMATIC active, softkeys disabled
AUTOMATIC remains active, softkeys allowed
Note
The setting and deleting of breakpoints remains unaffected by a changeover via
interface.
453
CNCInputs
CC220
O12.4
2nd SPINDLE CLOCKWISE ROTATION (M03)
1 input signal
(only with CC220T; functionality with CC220M see previous page)
L / H slope
Signal change from L to H causes the issue of a positive spindle speed set value.
The level of the set value depends on the gear level selected, the spindle speed
programmed and the setting of the spindle potentiometer.
H signal
No effect (see also note under SPINDLE STOP signal, O12.6).
L signal
No effect.
Note
Effective in every operating mode.
The CNC issues no auxiliary functions of the rotary direction at the interface.
All necessary logical linkages with the inputs must be realised in the PLC via the
MTM.
To be linked only for setup in the PLC program.
O12.5
2nd SPINDLE ANTICLOCKWISE ROTATION (M04)
1 input signal
(only with CC220T; functionality with CC220M see previous page)
L / H slope
Signal change from L to H causes the issue of a negative speed set value. The level
of the set value depends on the gear level selected, the spindle speed pro
grammed and the setting of the spindle potentiometer.
H signal
Has no effect (see also note with SPINDLE STOP signal, O12.6).
L signal
No effect.
Note
MTM.
454
CNCInputs
CC220
O12.6
2nd SPINDLE STOP (M05)
1 input signal
H / L slope
Signal change from H to L causes a spindle speed set value of 0 V to be issued. The
spindle is held stationary in the position control circuit.
Note
As interrogation only takes place at a signal change, a static signal remains after
execution of the command without the function being modified.
Note
The CNC issues no auxiliary functions at the interface.
MTM.
O12.7
2nd SPINDLE DIRECT (M19)
1 input signal
L / H slope
Signal change from L to H causes introduction of the orientation procedure.
H signal
No effect (see also note with SPINDLE STOP signal, O12.6).
L signal
No effect.
Note

Also effective after M5.
MTM.
455
CNCInputs
O13.0 O14.7
JOG +/
CC220
16 input signals
General
These signals arrive from the setup panel, are looped via the PLC (with the aid of
MTB1 I/O if required), gated and passed on to the CNC.
They function together with
Jog Mode (see CNC output 8.3 and CNC input 16.6/16.7)
Manual feeds and incrementals (see CNC inputs 15.0 to 16.0)
Feed potentiometer (NC panel or MTB1 I/O Port)
Rerence Point Approach (see CNC output 8.4, CNC input 16.1)
Zero set (see CNC input 16.2)
H signal
Triggers one of the above functions provided the conditions are fulfilled.
Depending on the jog direction keys and other interlock conditions, these signals
are sent to the CNC for the duration of the key depression.
For functions Reference Point Approach and Zero set (Start function), the slope is
evaluated by the CNC (pos.neg. and neg.pos.).
L signal
In Jog Mode an ongoing axis movement will be aborted, otherwise no effect.
Application
Manual traversing of axes in toolsetting mode, initiates Reference Point Approach
and Zero set.
Note
The jogging of auxiliary axes is permitted by the CNC while a part program is being
executed. Allowance must be made for any machinedependent interlocks.
The jog signals required for the spindle axes defined by machine parameter
P 7001 or, where the case,P 7100 (2nd spindle) must not be evaluated. There are
separate input signals for this (spindle keys).
456
CNCInputs
O15.0 O16.0
MANUAL FEEDS AND INCREMENTALS
CC220
8 input signals
General
The following 9 input signals are active in the JOG MODE and for external set value
selection for asynchronous axes:
O15.0
O15.1
O15.2
O15.3
O15.4
O15.5
O15.6
O15.7
O16.0
MANUAL FEED RAPID

MANUAL FEED FAST
MANUAL FEED MEDIUM
MANUAL FEED SLOW
EXTERNAL FEED (*)
INCREMENT X (increment selectable with MP 509)
INCREMENT 100
INCREMENT 10
INCREMENT 1
*: the signal EXTERNAL FEED is used to programme the feedrate of individual axes
via the multiinterface (see O7.0 O7.7 MULTIMODE VALUE 1128, sect. Trans
feral of axis position and feedrate set values from the PLC to the CNC").
The values for the manual feeds are defined in machine parameters P 505 to
P 508. Of the signals listed above, only one may be present at any one time.
If a number of signals are simultaneously present, the lowest speed is selected for
continuous traversing (true only for EXTERNAL FEED !); for incremental traversing
the signal with the most increments is decoded.
If a new speed is preselected during an axis movement (jogging), the axes will con
tinue to move at the old speed until the jog key is released.
The IF signal must be defined in the following time sequence
Select manual feed or increment
Jog
457
CNCInputs
CC220
O16.1
1 input signal
General
Reference Point Approach" is an operating mode (see CNC output 8.4, GMREF
ERENCE POINT APPROACH) which can be selected via softkey (manually) or via
this interface signal (via PLC). In the automatic area, the reference points can be
approached without any action be taken by the user, if certain conditions to be
determined by the project designer are met. Additional interlocks or conditions
should be taken into account on the PLC side.
L / H slope
The operating mode is activated with the positive slope, if FEED HOLD is not pres
ent at the CNC side (with NC or MANUAL INPUT operating mode).
H / L slope
The operating mode is deactivated with the negative slope.
Application with incremental measuring systems
Explanations and operating procedures for Reference Point Approach under ap
plication of an incremental measuring system can be found in signal descriptions
for O2.0 O4.7.
Application of a distance coded measuring system
Distance coded measuring systems are not in normal operation different from in
cremental measuring systems. Both systems allow changes of position to be de
termined by taking into account pulses provided by the encoder if the absolute
position is known.
The differences consist only in the position acquistitoning after switching on the
CNC.
The reason for this is that a coded reference marking" is also issued in addition to
the cyclic reference marking".
While the cyclic reference marking is being issued according to a constant number
of pulses, the coded reference marking changes its position by a definite number of
pulses per cyclic reference marking crossed. Guided by the maximum measuring
range (traverse path) of the distance coded encoder, every distance between
cyclic and coded reference marking occurs only once among the many possible
rotation values. The determination of the absolute machine positions is thus al
ready possible after the reading of a maximum of 2 reference markings (less than 2
rotations with rotary encoders); reading 2 markings may require the crossing of 3
markings.
The parameters necessary for position calculation are to be entered in machine
parameters P 104, P 105, P 115, P 116, P 502and P 1514 to P 1517.
458
CNCInputs
CC220
Procedure for Reference Point Approach" (determining the absolute ma

chine positions):
Although with a distance coded measuring system no reference point need now be
approached, the determination of the absolute machine positions after switching
on the CNC is, as is the case with a normal incremental encoder, triggered by the
REFERENCE POINT softkey in group operating mode MACHINE or via interface
signal O16.1.
After activating the REFERENCE POINT APPROACH group mode, the Reference
Point Approach" of an axis must be started via the corresponding signals O13.0 to
O14.7 (JOG MODE).
The speed of the Reference Point Approach" for each axis is thus set via machine
parameter (P 502).
The control controls the traverse movement necessary for reading a cyclic and a
coded reference marking (approach cycle). The direction of the traverse move
ment corresponds to the preset by the signal O3.0 to O3.7 direction for Refer
ence Point Approach.
After recognition of the second marking, the control stops the axis and recalculates
the machine position. Finally, the marker last crossed is approached and the axis is
brought to a standstill.
End position of the axis

Direction of approach:
2nd marking
Direction of approach:
S:
1st marking
Direction dependent on interface signal O3.x

Switchon position of the axis
CAUTION!
Software and hardware limits must lie within the travel range of the distance
coded measuring system. It is not possible for this range to be left mechan
ically!
The traverse path of the approach cycle must lie within the software limit
switches.
The cam path for the signal O3.0 to 3.7 DIRECTION REFERENCE POINT APP.
must be at least twice as long as the distance between 2 cyclic markers.
459
CNCInputs
CC220
O16.2
ZERO AXES
1 input signal
General
ZERO AXES is an operating mode that can be selected with a softkey (manually) or
via this interface signal (with PLC).
Otherwise the same process occurs as manually, if the conditions for this are met.
For synchronous axes only!
L / H slope
The operating mode is activated with the positive slope when FEED HOLD is pres
ent on the CNC side (FEED HOLD is only necessary for ZERO AXES during a run
ning program).
H / L slope
The active operating mode is deactivated again with the negative slope, i.e. when
ZERO AXES is completed. Fixed timecontrolled sequence by the PLC.
Application
Subfunction within an automatic sequence.
Note
ZERO RESET is initiated with the Jog keys (Plus or Minus).
O16.3
CLEAR DIST. TO GO
1 input signal
General
This function can be initiated by softkey or IF signal; FEED HOLD must first be ac
tive, however.
L / H slope
Clears the distance to go of the currently active block and the blocks already pro
cessed when FEED HOLD is present.
The cleared preprocessed blocks are then reprocessed.
This signal should be defined as a fixed pulse (approx. 200500 ms).
H / L slope
No effect.
Application
Automated program interruption enables the initiation of further measures (strat
egies) irrespective of the actual status of the processing/machine.
Note
Any additionally required interlocks and conditions must be provided for in the
PLC. Conditions in the preprocessed blocks are not rechecked.
460
CNCInputs
O16.4
CONTROL RESET
CC220
1 input signal
General
Control reset can be initiated by softkey or IF signal. This function must be used
with the utmost caution, due to the farreaching consequences for the control sys
tem and the machine (switchon status).
L / H slope
The positive slope executes external Control Reset, provided FEED HOLD and
other CNC internal conditions are true (FEED HOLD is only required for NC and
MDI modes).
Control Reset is equivalent to powering up the CNC with active software (SW) limit
switches. The signal must be selected as a pulse with a certain duration (approx.
200 .... 500 ms).
The CNC output signal CONTROL RESET (9.1) is also issued during this time.
H / L slope
No effect.
Application
Total program abort, i.e. to initiate emergency strategies when a reject workpiece
has been detected.
Restarts the processing of a workpiece or sets the control to a defined reset status.
Note
Control Reset sets all G codes to switchon status (according to machine para
meter group 3000), resets all error messages and deselects an active program
(see also signal description of (NOT) EMERGENCY STOP, CNC input 5.3).
The following CNC outputs (or modes) are also reset:
AUTOMATIC MODE (8.0)
SINGLE BLOCK MODE (8.1)
MDI MODE (8.2)
JOG MODE (8.3)
REFERENCE POINT APPROACH MODE (8.4)
SWITCH FUNCTION MODE (11.5)
EXT.POS.REACHED x.AXIS (19.x)
After a CONTROL RESET, the spindle stops with the slope acceleration (deceler
ation) defined in the machine parameter and is held stationary by position control.
461
CNCInputs
CC220
O16.5
(ANALOG OVERRIDE 100%)
1 input signal
1st effect
General
The feed potentiometer is effective for all axes in the system. Since this is not always
desirable however, the feed override values can be deactivated for auxiliary axes.
H signal
Allows CNCcontrolled auxiliary axes to be traversed with the 100% value of the se
lected speed.
L signal
CNCcontrolled auxiliary axes are assigned the feed override value of the selected
speed.
Application
Tool change axes
Gantry axes (conveyors for tools/workpieces)
Pallet pusher axes
Note
This signal is always transmitted under normal conditions.
2nd effect
General
Using a potentiometer, it is possible to modify the voltages present at analog out
puts while the program is running.
H signal
Analog outputs are set at 100% of the programmed value.
The analog output potentiometer has no effect.
L signal
The analog output potentiometer is effective.
462
CNCInputs
CC220
O16.6
O16.7
JOG (mm/min)
JOG (mm/rev)
1 input signal
1 input signal
General
JOG with interface is possible in all group modes. Changing from one group
mode to another (e.g. from. machine to manual) does not abort JOG in this case.
L / H slope
A positive slope activates the JOG mode in mm/min or mm/rev.
H / L slope
A negative slope deactivates the JOG mode in mm/min or mm/rev.
Application
Additional external setup panel.
Note
All Mode signals" operate on the rising or falling" principle. Care must be taken to
ensure that the PLC interlocks are made in such a way that only one signal is trans
mitted to the CNC at any one time.
If the JOG mode was activated with the interface signal, it can also be deselected by
means of the following operations:
Pressing the group mode key MACHINE again when you are already in the
group mode MACHINE
Pressing the Level Return key in the group mode MACHINE
Pressing the JOG softkey
Reference Point Approach
Zero Reset
463
CNCInputs
O17.0
O17.1
FEED POT EXTERNAL
SPINDLE POT EXTERNAL
CC220
1 input signal
1 input signal
General
Machine parameters can be used to define potentiometer connections for Rapid,
Feed and Spindle (see Machine parameters" manual, parameter group 2500).
Two potentiometer groups can also be defined (internal/external potentiometers).
When using two groups of potentiometers, these signals can be used to switch be
tween the internal and external potentiometers.
Precondition: one common potentiometer for Rapid and Feed.
Note: With 220T and 2nd spindle option, potentiometer combination for 1st and
2nd spindle takes place via machine parameter 2509.
H signal
Switches from internal to external potentiometers; external potentiometers are ac
tive (for external potentiometers see also descriptions of CNC inputs 7.0 to 7.7,
MULTIMODE VALUE)
L signal
Internal potentiometers are active.
Application
For additional, external manual setup panel.
O17.2
AUTOMATIC GEAR RANGE SELECTION (M40)
1 input signal
General
This signal is only required when the mutual spindle keys are used to reinstate the
original start condition (M40).
L / H slope
A change from Low to High activates automatic gear range selection (equivalent to
programming M40 or the M code defined in machine parameter 7017 for automatic
gear range selection).
H / L slope
No effect.
Note
The signal is active in all modes.
The CNC does not issue any auxiliary function.
All logical operation with inputs must be implemented in the PLC by the MTM.
464
CNCInputs
O17.3
PIECE COUNTER ON
CC220
1 input signal
General
The Piece Counter option is active when the input signal Piece counter on" is set.
The part program is then run until the actual pieces are identical with a specified
quantity.
H signal
The piece counter is activated by the Prog. No. entry and the set interface signal.
The interface signal Target achieved" is reset. The actual pieces are automatically
reset to Zero".
L signal
The piece counter is deactivated.
Note
When the interface signal Piece counter on" is set, the piece counter remains ac
tive even after Control Reset".
O17.4
SPINDLE REVERSE
1 input signal
H signal
Effective in every operating mode. Reverses the polarity of the output spindle set
point voltage and hence the spindle rotary direction as well.
The signal is acrive on Idling speed, CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED (see CNC input
17.5) and the SPINDLE ORIENT function (see CNC input 19.3).
L signal
The programmed or interfaceselected speed is active.
With CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED a positive spindle setpoint voltage is issued.
465
CNCInputs
CC220
O17.5
1 input signal
H signal
The control issues one positive or negative setpoint voltage per gear range which
corresponds to the constant spindle speed defined in machine parameter P 7006
(see also CNC input 17.4).
L signal
The control issues the setpoint voltage that corresponds to the programmed
spindle speed.
Note
The CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED input is effective in all modes.
O17.6
(NOT) SPINDLE SET VALUE 0 VOLT
1 input signal
H signal
Permits the CNC to issue a spindle set value.
L signal
Inhibits the issue of a spindle set value controlled by the CNC. No idling possible.
Note
The input (NOT) SPINDLE SET VALUE 0V is effective in all modes as a general
Spindle set value issue allow (spindle drive ready, no overload etc. ), except with
the SPINDLE ORIENT. function.(NOT) SPINDLE SET VALUE 0V operates like the
FEED ALLOW signal of the spindle axis, but also sets the SWord to 0".
466
CNCInputs
O17.7
SET SPINDLE POT 100%
(Spindle override 100%)
CC220
1 input signal
General
A button on the machine panel can be used to override the instantaneous position
of the spindle potentiometer and set the active spindle override value to 100%.
H signal
Is transmitted by the interface control to the CNC (for at least 40 ms). Depending on
P 7514 (=NO), the spindle override value is automatically set to 100% if this signal
is recognised. Spindle 100% remains until the potentiometer value is manually
changed to 100% and a further change occurs thereafter (reverse >3%,. or >2%
incr.).
If P 7514 = YES, spindle override remains set for as long as this interface signal is
present. Thereafter, the value entered is issued again.
L signal
Is transmitted from the interface controller to the CNC when the spindle 100% func
tion key is not operated. The button signal is passed on to the CNC.
Note
The input signal corresponds to the standard SPINDLE OVERRIDE 100%.
Is set with interface signal G84, for instance.
This signal has no effect so long as the (NOT) SPINDLE 0V signal (see CNC input
17.6) is Low.
467
CNCInputs
O18.0 18.7
RECEIPT GEAR RANGE
CC220
8 input signals
The RECEIPT GEAR RANGE signals 18 are used to transmit the current gear
range to the CNC. If there is no parity between the preselected and the actual gear
range, a voltage is issued which corresponds to the idling speed defined in the ma
chine parameter program P 7009 (or P 7109 for 2nd spindle).
Preselection of gear range can be made automatically using M40, directly with
M41M48 or with the interface signals SELECT GEAR RANGE (see CNC inputs
19.4 to 20.3).
Note: The M codes for the gear ranges can be freely defined using machine para
meter 7017 or 7117 (2nd spindle).
There must be a skew of at least 100 ms between one signal change (gear range
changeover):
RANGE 1
RANGE 2
D t > 100 ms
CAUTION!
When 2nd spindle is applied (CC220T), only signals 18.0 to 18.3 are available for
the 1st spindle (receipt gear range 14) ! In this case, signals 18.4 to 18.7 for re
ceipt gear range 14 are allocated to the second spindle!
468
CNCInputs
CC220
O19.0
SPINDLE CLOCKWISE M03 (MANUAL)
1 input signal
L / H slope
Signal change from L to H causes the issue of a positive spindle speed set value.
The level of the set value depends on the gear level selected, the spindle speed
programmed and the setting of the spindle potentiometer.
H signal
No effect (see also note under SPINDLE STOP signal).
L signal
No effect.
Note
MTM.
O19.1
SPINDLE ANTICLOCKWISE M04 (MANUAL)
1 input signal
L / H slope
Signal change from L to H causes the issue of a negative speed set value. The level
of the set value depends on the gear level selected, the spindle speed pro
grammed and the setting of the spindle potentiometer.
H signal
No effect (see also note with SPINDLE STOP signal).
L signal
No effect.
Note
MTM.
469
CNCInputs
O19.2
CC220
1 input signal
H / L slope
Signal change from H to L causes a spindle speed set value of 0 V to be issued. The
spindle is held stationary in the position control circuit.
Note
As interrogation only takes place at a signal change, a static signal remains after
execution of the command without the function being modified.
Note
MTM.
O19.3
SPINDLE ORIENT M19 (MANUAL)
1 input signal
L / H slope
Signal change from L to H causes introduction of the orientation procedure.
H signal
L signal
No effect.
Note

Also effective after M5.
MTM.
Optional extended level
470
CNCInputs
O19.4 O20.3
SELECT GEAR RANGE
CC220
1 signal per gear range
L / H slope
When the signal changes from L to H, the system checks whether the preselected
gear range is active. If there is no coincidence between the preselected and actual
gear ranges, a voltage is issued which corresponds to the idling speed P 7009 (or P
7109 for 2nd spindle) defined in the machine parameter program (see also CNC
inputs 18.0 to 18.7, RECEIPT GEAR RANGE).
H signal
L signal
No effect.
Note
MTM.
CAUTION!
When 2nd spindle is applied (CC220T), only signals 19.4 to 19.7 are available for
the 1st spindle (select gear range 14) ! In this case, signals 20.0 to 20.3 for gear
range selection 14 are allocated to the second spindle!
471
CNCInputs
O20.4
QUADRANT PROGRAMMING
CC220
1 input signal
General
This function is used to enable the programs created with quadrant programming
years ago to be executed with new controls as well. The signal must be statically
selected.
H signal
Quadrant programming active.
L signal
Full circle programming active.
Note
The NC will only change from quadrant to full circle programming when no pro
gram is selected.
The selector switch must be provided by the MTM at the NC setup panel.
O20.5
1 input signal
General
Used for program repeats and has the same effect as NC START after M2/M30.
H signal
Automatically initiates NC START after M2/M30. The signal can always remain
present.
L signal
No effect.
Application
Sequential processing of repeat workpieces, e.g. processing from bar stock.
472
CNCInputs
CC220
O20.6
RETURN TO CONTOUR
1 input signal
General
This signal is derived from a key at the setup panel and operates in conjunction
with the 4 reentry cycles. The signal initiates a Return to Contour after one of the 4
reentry cycles has been selected by softkey. It also functions after block search.
L / H slope
Initiates return cycle and should be regarded like NC START in terms of import
ance. The machine approaches the approach position and then stops.
Pulse duration is the duration of key depression.
H / L slope
After H / L slope the program is continued after the approach.
Application
For example following a tool failure, tool inspection, block search.
Note
This signal can also be combined with NC START.
It is effective during Return to Contour and Go Block.
O20.7
1 input signal
General
For safety reasons (tap breakage), the tapping cycle G84 may only be run in auto
matic mode. For testing (without workpiece machining) the G84 cycle can also be
run in single block mode by selecting this signal.
H signal
Allows single block operation for tapping cycles G84.
L signal
Allows normal operation in auto mode (softkey). In single block mode (softkey) an
error message appears without execution of G84.
Application
Only for test purposes, commissioning.
473
CNCInputs
O21.0
DNC/PLC RECEIPT
CC220
1 input signal
General
This signal only acts in conjunction with the DNC interfaces LSV2 and BAB.
This signal need only be decoded when at least one of the functions Start pro
gram", CNC Control reset" or Reference Point Approach" is to be carried out by
the host computer (cell computer) (Remote operation).
Once the CNC signal has issued a function request to the PLC by setting a DNC
specific output signal (DNC/NCSTART", DNC/CONTROL RESET", DNC/REF
ERENCE POINT APPROACH" etc.), it will wait for the signal DNC/PLC RECEIPT".
As soon as this signal goes HIGH, the NC immediately decodes the input signals
relevent for the particular function request (the PLC must set all necessary signals
in the same PLC cycle as the DNC/PLC RECEIPT signal).
If the condition of all signals is as it should be for starting the desired function, this is
taken as a positive receipt. If not, the desired function is momentarily interlocked by
the PLC. The CNC accordingly transmits a function receipt or error message to the
HOST.
Once the control has finished decoding, it resets the output signal of the desired
function (DNC/NC START", DNC/CONTROL RESET", DNC CONTROL RESET",
DNC / REFERENCE POINT APPROACH" etc.). The input signal DNC/PLC RE
CEIPT" must stay set HIGH until that time, and the input signals assigned to that
function must not change within this period. Furthermore, the input signals belong
ing to the functions may not change during this period.
474
CNCInputs
O21.1
SET FEED POT 100%
CC220
Effect with 220T

1 input signal
General
By programming G63 or a button at the machine panel it is possible to suppress the
instantaneous setting of the feed potentiometer and to set the active feed override
value (mm/rev or mm/min) to 100%.
H signal
P 7514 (= NO), the feed override value is automatically set to 100% when this signal
is detected. Feedrate 100% is then held in mode until G66 is programmed or the
feed potentiometer is first manually turned to 100% and then to another value (ro
tary adjustment >3%, or>2% incr.). or >2% incr.).
If P 7514 = YES, the override remains set for as long as this interface signal is pres
ent. Thereafter, the value entered is issued again.
L signal
Is transmitted by the interface controller to the CNC when the Set Feed 100% but
ton is not actuated. The button signal is passed on to the CNC.
O21.2
SET RAPID POT 100%
Effect with 220T

1 input signal
General
A button at the machine panel can be used to suppress the instantaneous setting of
the rapid potentiometer and to set the active rapid override value to 100%.
H signal
P 7514 (= NO), the rapid traverse override value is automatically set to 100% when
this signal is detected. Rapid 100% is then held in mode until the rapid potentio
meter is first manually turned to 100% and then to another value (rotary adjustment
>3%, or >2% incr.). or >2% incr.).
If P 7514 = YES, the override remains set for as long as this interface signal is pres
ent. Thereafter, the value entered is issued again.
L signal
Is transmitted by the PLC to the CNC when the Rapid 100% button is not actuated.
The button signal is passed on to the CNC.
475
CNCInputs
CC220
O21.1
SET FEED POT 100%
Effect with 220M

1 input signal
General
By programming G63 or a button at the machine panel it is possible to suppress the
instantaneous setting of the feed potentiometer and to set the active feed override
value (mm/rev or mm/min) to 100%.
H signal
Is transmitted by the interface control to the CNC (for at least 40 ms). The feed over
ride value is automatically set to 100% and held in mode when this signal is de
tected.
L signal
A changeover to the current feed override value occurs.
O21.2
SET RAPID POT 100%
Effect with 220M

1 input signal
General
A button at the machine panel can be used to suppress the instantaneous setting of
the rapid potentiometer and to set the active rapid override value to 100%.
H signal
Is transmitted from the interface controller to the CNC (for a duration of at least 40
ms). The feed override value is automatically set to 100% and held in mode when
this signal is detected.
L signal
A changeover to the current rapid override value occurs.
O21.3
COUNTER DECREMENT
1 input signal
General
Every time the interface signal Counter decrement" is set, the actual piece count is
decremented by 1".
The interface signal is permitted at any time within the active piece counter. How
ever, the actual piece count cannot assume a value of < zero".
L / H slope
The positive slope of the signal decrements the current count by 1".
Application
If the workpiece gauging system detects a reject component, the actual count can
be decremented by 1" by setting the Counter decrement" interface signal.
476
CNCInputs
CC220
O21.4
1 input signal
General
The interface signal activates the logic for the tool life monitoring system.
H signal
Tool life monitor is active.
O21.5
THREAD GAUGE / REMACHINE
1 input signal
General
Once all programmed rough and finished cuts have been executed in thread cycle
G330, the gauging position can be approached. The latter movement is initiated by
the interface signal Thread gauge / remachine".
On completion of thread machining, this signal is checked at G330; if active, the
programmed gauging position is approached. If active, the programmed gauging
position is approached.
H signal
If active, the programmed gauging position is approached.
L signal
If, after gauging, the signal is cancelled, the thread cycle is terminated after the next
NC start and the NC program continues to execute.
Note
IF signal Thread cycle active" is set when G330 is called. The signal is reset when
all thread cuts have been executed and the Thread gauge / remachine" signal is
reset.
O21.6
TEACH IN FEED
1 input signal
General
Actuating the Feed Correction Teach in" button on the toolsetting panel enters the
instantaneous percentage value of the feed potentiometer into the tool wear table
and assigns it to the currently active tool. The signal is only effective when P 7514 is
parameterised!
H signal
The input signal enters the current feed potentiometer value into the active tool
table.
477
CNCInputs
CC220
O21.7
TEACH IN SPINDLE
1 input signal
General
Operating the Spindle Correction Teach in" button on the toolsetting panel enters
the instantaneous percentage value of the feed potentiometer into the tool wear
table and assigns it to the currently active tool. The signal is only effective when
P 7514 is parameterised!
H signal
The input signal enters the current spindle potentiometer value into the tooltable.
O22.0 O22.7
HANDWHEEL
General
Handwheel operation is only possible when G94 (G94: feed in mm/min) is active,
the interface signal I8.3 (JOG MODE) and according to axis one of the signals
O22.0 to O22.7 exist statically. The digital handwheel is effective in contrast to the
analog handwheel not just at synchronous axes but also at asynchronous auxili
ary axes. In addition, G94 has no influence on the digital handwheel.
H signal
Activates the handwheel function for the axis concerned.
L signal
Deactivates the handwheel function for the axis concerned.
Note
If an axis is activated with the HANDWHEEL signal, steps must be taken in the PLC
to prevent Jog movements being performed.
Hirth axes cannot be traversed with the handwheel.
The Feed Allow of the axis concerned must also be set up with the High signal.
If one of the signals O15.0 to 16.0 (manual feed/increment) is present, the axis will
traverse with the corresponding value. If one of the signals O15.0 to 16.0 is present,
these signals are given priority. Where a number of signals are present, the lowest
vale is selected. If no signals are present, the INCREMENT 1" value is used.
Note
For the digital handwheel, only the signals INCREMENT(S) O15.5 to 16.0 are rel
evant.
478
CNCInputs
O23.0 O23.7
INHIBIT MEASURING SYSTEM MONITOR
CC220
General
This signal is only required in special cases. It is used for temporarily masking the
measuring system monitor or cancelling the Reference Point Approach.
H signal
The monitor of the measuring system and reference point is inactive.
L signal
Monitor of measuring system and reference point is active.
Depending on machine parameter P114, the reference point must be newly ap
proached when a changeover from H signal to L signal occurs.
Application
Measuring system switchover to one or more axes by means of a separating filter
(prevents Emergency Stop), dismantling complete axes, alternate use of two refer
ence points on one axis.
Note
It is essential to remember that the measuring sytem monitor is only masked for the
duration of the switchover (the measuring system interrupt) so as not to affect the
safe operation of the machine.
See also Machine parameters", P114.
479
CNCInputs
O24.0
2nd spindle: AUTOM. GEAR RANGE SELECTION
CC220
1 input signal
General
This signal is only required when the mutual spindle keys are used to reinstate the
original start condition (M40).
L / H slope
A change from Low to High activates automatic gear range selection (equivalent to
programming M40 or the M code defined in machine parameter 7117 for automatic
gear range selection).
H / L slope
No effect.
Note
The signal is active in all modes.
The CNC does not issue any auxiliary function.
All logical operation with inputs must be implemented in the PLC by the MTM.
O24.1
2nd spindle: SPINDLE REVERSE
1 input signal
H signal
Effective in every operating mode. Reverses the polarity of the output spindle set
point voltage and hence the spindle rotary direction as well.
The signal is active on Idling speed, CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED (see CNC input
24.2) and the SPINDLE ORIENT function (see CNC input
12.7).
L signal
The programmed or interfaceselected speed is active.
With CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED a positive spindle setpoint voltage is issued.
480
CNCInputs
CC220
O24.2
2nd spindle: CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED
1 input signal
H signal
The control issues one positive or negative setpoint voltage per gear range which
corresponds to the constant spindle speed defined in machine parameter P 7106
(see also CNC input 17.4).
L signal
The control issues the setpoint voltage that corresponds to the programmed
spindle speed.
Note
The CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED input is effective in all modes.
O24.3
2nd spindle: (NOT) SPINDLE SET VALUE 0 VOLT
1 input signal
H signal
Permits the CNC to issue a spindle set value.
L signal
Inhibits the issue of a spindle set value controlloed by the CNC. No idling possible.
Note
The input (NOT) SPINDLE SET VALUE 0V is effective in all modes as a general
Spindle set value issue allow (spindle drive ready, no overload etc. ), except with
the SPINDLE ORIENT. function. (NOT) SPINDLE SET VALUE 0V operates like the
FEED ALLOW signal of the spindle axis, but also sets the SWord to 0".
481
CNCInputs
O24.4
2nd spindle: SET SPINDLE POT 100%
(Spindle override 100%)
CC220
1 input signal
General
A button on the machine panel can be used to override the instantaneous position
of the spindle potentiometer and set the active spindle override value to 100%.
H signal
Is transmitted by the interface control to the CNC (for at least 40 ms). When this sig
nal is detected, the spindle override value is automatically set to 100%. Spindle
100% remains until the potentiometer value is manually changed to 100% and a
further change occurs thereafter (reverse >3%, or >2% incr.).
L signal
Is transmitted by the PLC to the CNC when the set spindle 100% function button is
not actuated. The button signal is passed on to the CNC.
Note
Is set with interface signal G84, for instance.
This signal has no effect so long as the (NOT) SPINDLE 0V signal (see CNC input
24.3) is Low.
O24.5
2nd spindle: EXTERNAL SPINDLE POTI
1 input signal
H signal
Changeover from internal (see Machine parameters 2511) to external (see ma
chine parameter 2510) potentiometer; external potentiometer is effective for the
2nd spindle (for external potentiometers see also the descriptions of the CNC in
puts 7.0 to 7.7, MULTIMODE VALUE).
Note: Whether 1st and 2nd spindle should be allocated to a common spindle po
tentiometer can be defined via machine parameter 2509.
L signal
Internal potentiometer is ineffective.
Application
For additional, external manual setup panel.
O25.0 O25.7
DRIFT COMP OFF
Effect with Drift compensation expansion level.

General
The signals exist in association with the drift compensation" expansion level. The
functionality of the expansion level is described in detail in the Machine para
meters" manual under parameter group 6600.
H signal
As long as HIGH level exists, the drift compensation for the corresponding axis is
switched off. If the signal becomes HIGH during a compensation process, the latter
is aborted.
482
CNCInputs
CC220
Diagram
t2
Traverse command (e.g. 1 axis)
IN POSITION 1ST AXIS
Controller enable to drive
DRIFT COMP OFF 1ST AXIS
t1
Notes on the diagram:

t1: contains the waiting period (P 6601) and the Offset correction time (the value
must be determined empirically, or can be derived from the INPOS signal).
t2: corresponds to the waiting period until axis standstill (P 6601).
If the traverse command goes away, the delay time t2 is first started. After t2 has
expired, drift compensation becomes active.
The drift compensation can now be switched off via interface signal either after
evaluation of the INPOS signal or after t1 has expired.
If the traverse command becomes active again, the controller enable can be given
for the drive, and the drift compensation can be cleared again.
NOTE!
Drift compensation has no effect on spindles or ANALOG axes.
Switching off the drift compensation via interface signal is only possible with SERVOi.
O25.0 O25.7
DRIFT COMP OFF
Effect with Cross Compensation expansion level

General
With this signal, the effect of the cross compensation can be switched off axially.
H signal
The current correction value becomes inactive with the rising edge of the signal.
This causes a set value stepchange on the corresponding axis.
L signal
The current correction value becomes active again with the falling edge of the sig
nal. This causes a set value stepchange on the corresponding axis.
NOTE!
Circular compensation has no effect on spindles or ANALOG axes.
Switching off the circular compensation via interface signal is only possible with
SERVOi.
483
CNCInputs
CC220
O26.0 O26.7
The meaning of this signal can be defined according to machine parameters
MACHINE MODE
H signal
switchover to Machine" mode takes place with the positive edge of the signal.
L signal
No effect
Mirror switch
General
In NC" and Manual input" modes, axes can be mirrored via the signal. The mirror
image always results around the program zero point. The programmable mirror
imaging (G38) must not be active. As many signals are needed as axes are mir
rored. > MPP
H signal
The corresponding axis is mirrored.
L signal
No mirroring of the accompanying axis
O27.0 O27.3
CAXIS signals
Switchover only with stationary

spindle/axis
There are 3 different switchover possibilities that can be programmed with freely
selectable M functions.
Switchover CAxis Spindle.
Switchover spindle CAxis with ref. point approach by the Caxis.
Switchover spindle CAxis without ref. point approach by the CAxis.
The switchover is usually performed with the spindle at rest or with the CAxis posi
tioned.
The following input and output signals are provided for this facility:
Inputs
O27.0 SWITCHOVER ON TURNING MODE
O27.1 SWITCHOVER ON MILLING MODE
O27.2 REFERENCE POINT APPROACH CAXIS
O27.3 CAXIS ACTIVE (PLC)
Outputs
E16.4 CAXIS ACTIVE (CNC)
There are a number of configurations for CAxis applications:
common axis with a single axis number for spindle and driven tool, Caxis is
defined as a separate synchronous axis; a common or separate drive can be
chosen for spindle and Caxis.
484
CNCInputs
CC220
separate axes with different axis numbers for spindle, Caxis and driven tool.
It is possible to have a separate or common measuring system for Caxis and
spindle.
Sequence generally:
TRANSFER ALLOW is first cancelled and finally reinstated.
IF signals SWITCHOVER MILLING MODE", SWITCHOVER TURNING MODE
, REFERENCE POINT APPROACH CAXIS" are set or reset depending on the
programmed M code.
Give INHIBIT MEASURING SYSTEM MONITOR" if necessary.
Turn on measuring system if necessary.
Turn on analog input if necessary.
If spindle and driven tool are on separate axes, DRIVE OFF must be given in
Milling mode for the spindle and in Turning mode for the driven tool. DRIVE OFF
must also be given in Turning mode for the Caxis. If the spindle lies on the
driven tool, only the drive for the Caxis has to be switched depending on the
operating mode. Turning: DRIVE OFF for the Caxis, Milling mode: DRIVE ON
for the Caxis
PLC reports the machine status with signal CAXIS ACTIVE.
(Low = Turning; High = Milling)
Note
The Caxis can be manually traversed in the active Milling mode with the following
functions:
Jog (+/) continuous with Rapid, Fast, Medium, Slow.
Jog (+/) increment in 1, 10, 100, X increments.
Handwheel (+/) analog/digital corresponding to the general stipulations.
As the signals can only be seen in conjunction with Caxis applications, they are not
individually described, but the sequence is shown operationally in 3 diagrams.
Diagram 1: Switchover to spindle
MCODE
TRANSFER ALLOW
MACHINE STOP
INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. 7.A.*
DRIVE ON 7.A.
DRIVE ON 8.A.
CAXIS ACTIVE (PLC)
CAXIS ACTIVE (CNC)
See remark in Diagram 3"
485
CNCInputs
CC220
Diagram 2: Switchover to Caxis without Ref. pt. approach

MCODE
TRANSFER ALLOW
MACHINE STOP
DRIVE ON 7.A.
DRIVE ON 8.A.
CAXIS ACTIVE (PLC)
CAXIS ACTIVE (CNC)
See remark in Diagram 3"
Diagram 3: Switchover to Caxis with Ref. pt. approach

MCODE
TRANSFER ALLOW
MACHINE STOP
DRIVE ON 7.A.
DRIVE ON 8.A.
CAXIS REF. PT. APPROACH
CAXIS ACTIVE (PLC)

REF. PT. REACHED 7.A.
CAXIS ACTIVE (CNC)
The drives of the spindle and Caxis must always be switched.
*
Inhibit measuring system monitor 7. axis (Caxis) must only be given when the spindle
turns too fast for the Caxis.
= random or unknown condition.
486
CNCInputs
O27.0 O27.3
CAXIS SIGNALS
CC220
Floating switchover
General
It is possible to switch over floating", i.e. from full speed without spindle stop on the
Caxis. The zero marker of the Caxis encoder is recorded even during the braking
process of the spindle. The referencing of the Caxis is no longer necessary. The
Caxis (spindle) is not positioned on the zero marker either any longer, but now
brakes as quickly as possible and remains defined at the resulting position
(00359,9990).
The handling of the interface signal between NC and PLC is greatly simplified and
reduced.
The switchovers up to this point remain preserved for reasons of compatability. The
new switchovers receive their own machine parameters and M codes. The new
switchover is only applicable with machines with a combined spindle/Caxis drive.
CAUTION!
The rapid switchover from S to C is distinct from the previous type.
With rapid switchover, the Caxis will after switchover be in an arbitrary, random
position. It will not be on the reference point or on C=0.000 !
This must be taken into account when generating part programs.
Switchover with rotating spindle

The spindle rotates at the programmed speed. All spindle enables are set. The C
axis has no enables.
In the part program, one switchover is programmed to C. The M function is issued
to the PLC at the interface.
The NC checks internally if the current spindle speed has exceeded the max. per
missible speed of the Caxis (P7610). If this is the case, the spindle brakes immedi
ately until this speed is reached. The acceleration parameters of the spindle are
thus laid down as a basis.
If the spindle speed is less than or equal to the max. permissible Caxis speed, the
spindle is slowed down to such a point that it undergoes at least one full switchover.
This one switchover is internally used to establish the zero marker of the Caxis en
coder. After this has taken place, the spindle stops as quickly as possible with its
acceleration. The NC reports to the PLC that the spindle is stationary and the Caxis
is active and referenced.
As soon as the NC reports to the PLC that the Caxis is active, the PLC switches the
drive over to the Caxis, removes all enables from the spindle, switches the
DriveOn of the Caxis, reports Caxis active to the NC and gives the Feed Enable
for the Caxis.
DriveOn of the spindle and the Caxis may not be set simultaneously.
The switchover is complete.
487
CNCInputs
CC220
Switchover with rotating spindle

Outputs of the NC are stable 1
Inputs of the NC must be 1
Inputs/outputs of the NC 1 or 0
I/O signals PLC/drive
I/O from view of PLC
Speed
Sis
SP7610
Time
M58
M58 Receipt
S Drive On
S Feed Enable
S stat.
C in NC active
C is referenced
O12.0
O0.s
O1.s
I16.0
I16.4
I15.c
Drive is in Cmode
C in PLC active
C Drive On
C Feed Enable
O27.3
Meas. sys. Sp. Caxis
O23.c
O0.c
O1.c
Switchover time
% O0.s and O0.c may not be set simultaneously !
% The sequence O27.3 to I16.0 is definite.
Switchover with stationary spindle

Speed
Sis
M58
M58 Receipt
S Drive On
S stat.
Time
C in NC active
C is referenced
O12.0
O0.s
O1.s
I16.0
E16.4
I15.c
Drive is in Cmode
C in PLC active
C Drive on
C Feed Enable
O27.3
Meas. sys. Sp. Caxis
O23.c
Switchover time
488
O0.c
O1.c
CNCInputs
CC220
Switchover with stationary spindle

Spindle is stationary.
In the part program, one switchover is programmed to C. The M function is issued
to the PLC at the interface. The PLC notes this, and gives the enables for the spindle
as if an M3 S ....." were programmed.
The spindle executes a switchover as quickly as possible in exact correspondence
with its parameters P 7610, P7004, P7005 and P7015. This switchover is internally
used to establish the zero marker of the Caxis encoder. After this has taken place,
the spindle stops as quickly as possible with its acceleration. The NC reports to the
PLC that the spindle is stationary and the Caxis is active and referenced.
As soon as the NC reports to the PLC that the Caxis is active, the PLC switches the
drive over to the Caxis, removes all enables from the spindle, reports Caxis active
to the NC and gives the Feed Enable for the Caxis.
Completion of the switchover from Caxis to spindle
It should be ensured that the Caxis is stationary. The M function is issued to the
PLC. The PLC then switches the drive over to the spindle, removes all enables from
the Caxis and deletes the signal Caxis active. The NC deletes the signal that the
Caxis in the NC is active.
489
CNCInputs
CC220
O27.5
START MILLING HEAD COMPENSATION
1 input signal
General
The activation of the milling head compensation takes place exclusively via the
PLC. After execution of the milling head compensation, the PLC at first enters the
corresponding shift values into the compensation window between the NC and
PLC (only with word coupling; with systems without word coupling, the values must
be entered in the NC side with the CPL command FXC") and activates these by
setting the signal O27.5. The milling head compensation is not active until the ref.
pt. of the particular axis has been approached !
A milling head change takes place with a deselected program through program
ming an M function under GM Manual input. The PLC executes the change, de
livers and activates the appertaining compensation values.
A milling head change can also be carried out with an active program. On the PLC
side it should be ensured that traverse movements of the axis are complete (signal
IN POSITION), the program execution has been stopped (signal TRANSFER
ALLOW), and the traverse movements of the axes have been stopped (signal
(NOT) FEED HALT). Furthermore, care should be taken on the programm/techni
cal side that when activating a milling head compensation, no milling radius
compensation is activated and no more prepared blocks exist (CPL command
WAIT, or delete blocks already prepared with signal DELETE DISTANCE TO GO).
H signal
Activates the milling head radius compensation values entered in the correction
memory (display of values under GM CORRECTION, softkey EXTERNAL ZERO
POINT SHIFTS; only with word coupling!).
NOTE
After switching on the CNC, the milling head compensation is not active and must
be activated anew if necessary by the PLC!
For milling head compensation see also signal I17.0 MILLING HEAD COMPENSA
TION ACTIVE.
O27.6
FEED RATE REDUCTION
1 input signal
General
A maximum speed for synchronous axes can be defined with machine parameter
P512 Reduced path speed". The reduction is made effective by the interface sig
nal.
This reduction is not effective in Jog mode or reference point travel.
H signal
The reduced path speed is effective.
L signal
No limit of the path speed below the value entered in machine parameter P511.
490
CNCInputs
O27.7
REMACHINE THREAD WITHOUT ROUGHING
CC220
1 input signal
General
If required, a thread can be remachined either with all rough cuts or only with the
finish cuts. Remachining without all rough cuts is achieved when the interface sig
nal Remachine thread without roughing" is active. The IF signal is only active
when the IF signal Gauge/remachine thread" is active.
H signal
Remachine thread without all rough cuts.
L signal
Remachine with all rough cuts and all finish cuts.
491
Digitalinterface(Description)
CNCOutputs
4.2.2
CC220
Control outputs (PLC inputs)
I0.0 I1.7
POS./NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND
2 output signals per axis
General
The control reports its readiness for travel or the traversing of one or more axes to
the PLC by means of the directional travel command (continuous signal).
H signal
For the duration of a programmed axis movement following NC Start even

with no FEED ALLOW.
For the duration of a jog button operation even with no FEED ALLOW.
A movement interruption by FEED HOLD does not cancel the travel command.
The travel command is not cancelled by FEED ALLOW, EMERGENCY STOP,
DRIVE ON or FEED 0% either.
L signal
No movement is programmed or preselected.

After program deselection.
After CONTROL RESET.
Application
Release a jam (trigger allow), directional interlock in PLC. The travel commands
should not be combined with either DRIVE ON" or FEED ALLOW" to ensure a
continuous program sequence with interpolation.
Note
In Jog Mode the TRAVEL COMMAND is always given inversely to AXIS IN POSI
TION when the drive is operating correctly.
492
CNCOutputs
CC220
No travel command is given when the axes are traversed with the handwheel.
In programmed axis mode the negative slope of the TRAVEL COMMAND and the
positive slope of AXIS IN POSITION no longer coincide, since the travel command
has already been cancelled when Command position equals Actual position" is
detected internally by the CNC.
Diagram 1: Jog Mode
SK Jog
JOG + (I)
TRAVEL COMMAND + (O)
AXIS IN POSITION (O)
FEED ALLOW (I)
Axis running
Diagram 2: Programmed Mode
NC START (I)
TRAVEL COMMAND + (O)
AXIS IN POSITION (O)
FEED ALLOW (I)
Axis running
(NOT) FEED HOLD (I)
493
CNCOutputs
I2.0 I2.7
AXIS IN POSITION
CC220
8 output signals
General
Using the axisrelated IF signals AXIS IN POSITION, the CNC tells the matching
logic that the selected position has been reached.
H signal
The axis is within the InPosition window adjustable using machine parameter
P1508.
L signal
A movement is executed or
although a travel command is present, no movement can take place because
FEED ALLOW is absent or FEED HOLD is present.
Note
See notes and diagrams under POS./NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND signal.
Application
Axis jamming.
Various interlocks at the PLC.
494
CNCOutputs
CC220
I3.0 I7.7
MULTIPLE OUTPUT (AUX. FUNCT.)
Up to 6 auxiliary and switch functions (M, S, T etc.) as well as CPL data can be trans
ferred to the PLC via the Multiple Output.
The Multiple Output at the CNC end of the following CNC outputs:
I3.0 to I6.7
32bit data channel (BCD or binary)
BCD: 1 .. 8 x 107; Binary: 20 ... 230, +/
I7.0 to I7.7
8 change signals (6 auxiliary functions + 1 x CPL + 1 x
spare)
O12.0
AUX. FUNCT. RECEIPT (Input)
To ensure reliable data transfer, a handshake must be performed between CNC
and PLC with the aid of the CNC input signal AUXILIARY FUNCTION RECEIPT. With
this signal the PLC tells the CNC that it has read the data at CNC outputs 2.0 to 7.7.
Several auxiliary functions can be programmed in one block. The auxiliary func
tions transferred via the Multiple Output are defined in machine parameter P 2001.
The auxiliary functions themselves are issued to the interface serially but bitparal
lel (size according to definition) with change signal. The AUX. FUNCT. RECEIPT
signal allows the time of the auxiliary function output to be shortened.
The internal Feed Stop can be defined for every auxiliary function (see Machine
parameter P 2002).If several auxiliary functions are programmed in a single block,
one of which is defined by MPP as Feed Stop, then an internal Feed Stop will be
active for all auxiliary functions of that block.
The transfer of the next block can be inhibited by cancelling the TRANSFER
ALLOW signal if this signal is cancelled while the signal is being changed. The
transfer inhibit is cancelled when the signal is turned on again.
FEED HOLD has no effect on the output of auxiliary functions.
CPL data can be output in both BCD and binary form according to the internal
workings of the Multiple Output.
Please note that the transfer of CPL data to the PLC is possible from CPL in dialog"
as well as from CPL under execution". The PLC can detect, via signals I7.7 and
I10.7 (CPL DIALOG STROBE), from which CPL task the data originate. Valid here
are:
Data from CPL under execution":
Strobe on I7.7
Data from CPL in dialog":
Strobe on I7.7 and I10.7
The length of the CPL change signal (I7.7 or I10.7) can be defined with machine
parameter 2008.
495
CNCOutputs
CC220
Diagram: Handshake mode
New block
(no Feed Stop)
Axis running
Data
Internal Delay
T1
CHANGE SIGNAL M
T1
T1
Preset time
CHANGE SIGNAL S
CHANGE SIGNAL T
TRANSFER ALLOW
Internal FEED STOP
(independent of MP 2002)
= no fixed time (system dependent)
Note
The PLC must ensure that the AUXILIARY FUNCTION RECEIPT signal is cancelled
immediately after the negative slope of the CHANGE SIGNAL.
Machine parameter group 2000 must be used for the Multiple Output.
For handshake mode, machine parameter P 2003 is set to NO. A change signal
time (see P 2008)of approx. 200 ms must also be selected.
Floating auxiliary function output
For auxiliary functions which have no internal switching function, a floating output
can be defined via machine parameter.
An output is floating" when subsequent blocks are already being processed dur
ing auxiliary function output, provided that the transfer allow remains present.
The handshake traverse for secure data transfer remains valid.
496
CNCOutputs
I8.0
AUTOMATIC MODE
CC220
1 output signal
H signal
AUTOMATIC MODE is issued at the interface when a program is selected.
L signal
After program deselection, for SINGLE BLOCK or after CONTROL RESET.
Note
AUTOMATIC MODE is also affected by the CNC input signals AUTOMATIC (O12.4)
and SINGLE BLOCK (O12.5) (these signals are only present with
CC 220M!).
Diagram:
SK PROGRAM SELECT
SK AUTOMATIC (O)
SK BLOCK (O)
SK CONTROL RESET (O)
PROGRAM ACTIVE
SK JOG MODE
PROGRAM DESELECT
497
CNCOutputs
I8.1
SINGLE BLOCK MODE
CC220
1 output signal
H signal
SINGLE BLOCK MODE is issued at the interface when the softkey SINGLE BLOCK
or SINGLE STEP is activated.
A precondition is that a program has been selected.
L signal
In AUTOMATIC MODE, after program deselection or after CONTROL RESET.
Note
SINGLE BLOCK MODE is also affected by the CNC input signals AUTOMATIC
(O12.4) and SINGLE BLOCK (O12.5) (these signals are only present with
CC 220M!).
Diagram:
SK AUTOMATIC (O)
SK SINGLE BLOCK (O)
SK PROGRAM DESELECT
SK PROGRAM SELECTION
(NOT) FEED (I)
MACHINE MODE
SK SWITCHING FUNCTION (O)
498
CNCOutputs
I8.2
MANUAL DATA INPUT MODE
CC220
1 output signal
H signal
MDI MODE is only issued when it is permitted, the MANUAL MODE is selected and
a function in the MDI mode has been entered.
If you stay in this mode, the signal continues to be present.
L signal
When manual mode is deselected by a mode change, the NC executes the input
data following NC Start and then cancels the signal. If no output data are avialable,
LOW signal is output after group mode is quit.
CONTROL RESET cancels the signal directly.
Diagram: (MDI MODE can also be replaced by SWITCH FUNCTION MODE)
SK AUTOMATIC (O)
SK MDI (O)
SK CONTROL RESET (O)
499
CNCOutputs
I8.3
JOG MODE
CC220
1 output signal
H signal
After actuating the JOG softkey or following a rising slope at the CNC interface input
(O16.6/O16.7).
L signal
If JOG MODE was activated by SK JOG, this signal is cancelled again by means of
the following operations:
Approach reference point
Zero Reset
Renewed operation of SK JOG
Negative slope at digital interface JOG (O16.6/O16.7)
Renewed pushing of the group mode key MACHINE again when already in the
group mode MACHINE
Pushing the level return key in the MACHINE MODE.
Switching to group mode NC (execute), MANUAL INPUT,
PROGRAM MEMORY (edit) or CORRECTION (from MACHINE MODE or
DIAGNOSTIC MODE).
If Jog was activated by the JOG interface signal (O16.6/O16.7), a switch to other
group modes does not abort Jog mode.
Note
When switching to the DIAGNOSTIC group mode (from MACHINE MODE), the IF
signal JOG MODE stays on.
4100
CNCOutputs
I8.4
APPROACH REFERENCE POINT
CC220
1 output signal
H signal
The signal is given when the REFERENCE POINT softkey is actauated or G74 or
G174 or CNC input signal 16.1 (REFERENCE POINT APPROACH) is active.
L signal
The signal dispappears when all reference points are reached or the Software limit
switch range monitor" condition is fulfilled for all axes.
Independent of started or nonstarted axes, the signal disppears when the follow
ing operation are performed:
Jog Mode (SK)
Zero Reset (SK)
Switching function (SK)
Direct operations of group modes except for Diagnostic (only when REFERENCE
POINT APPROACH mode is initiated by interface signal O16.1 and not by softkey).
Level return in Machine group mode.
Although FEED HOLD interrupts the Reference point approach, it does not inter
rupt the status and so does not interrupt the IF signal either.
Diagram
SK REFERENCE POINT
REF. PT. APPROACH (O)
SK JOG MODE (O)
START REF. PT. APPROACH
(NOT) FEED HOLD (O)
AXES TRAVERSE TO REF. PT.
REF. PT. REACHED (A)
ALL AXES
4101
CNCOutputs
I8.5
CC220
1 output signal
H signal
This signal appears at the interface when all axes have reached their reference
point.
Exceptions:
Masked asynchronous axes (P106 = yes).
Axes that require no ref. pt. (P 1510 = yes).
Axes for which DRIVE ON is not present.
This signal stays on for as long as the SOFTWARE LIMITS RANGE MONITORING"
condition is fulfilled by the CNC.
L signal
After switching on CNC.
Exception: If the DRIVE ON signals of all axes are LOW, then this signal has HIGH
level after switching on.
Diagram
SWITCH ON CNC
REF. PT. APPROACH (O)
ALL AXES REFERENCED
SK CONTROL RESET
START REF. PT. APPROACH
Note
The individual REFERENCE POINT REACHED signals (CNC outputs 15.0 to 15.7)
always form the sumcheck signal REF. PT. REACHED ALL AXES.
The individual signals are also present for as long as the condition SOFTWARE LI
MITS RANGE MONITORING is fulfilled.
After the reference point is approached again, the signals stay on (see also CNC
outputs 18.0 to 18.7, REFERENCE POINT REACHED ALL AXES).
If an axis was masked with DRIVE ON while approaching a reference point, the REF.
PT. REACHED ALL AXES signal still appears when all axes that were switched on
with DRIVE ON have reached their reference points.
If a masked axis is now switched on for the first time, the REFERENCE POINTS RE
ACHED ALL AXES signal is cancelled. The PLC can now initiate the required Refer
ence point approach for the axis concerned. Evaluation of the individual REF. PT.
REACHED signals is also possible.
4102
CNCOutputs
CC220
I8.6
RAPID (TRAVERSE)
1 output signal
H signal
The CNC transmits this signal for as long as G0 or G10 is active in the Jog, NC (ex
ecute) or MDI modes.
L signal
In all other CNC modes.
Note
The RAPID output signal is only formed by synchronous axes.
I8.7
PROGRAM RUNNING
1 output signal
General
The output signal PROGRAM RUNNING is used to capture the execute time or the
running time of a part program.
H signal
For each programmed axis movement but not in Jog mode.

In AUTO MODE during a program running time.
In SINGLE STEP MODE as long as the active block is being executed.
In MDI MODE as long as the input block is being executed.
Also in FEED 0% (Potentiometer setting)
L signal
In MDI MODE and AUTOMATIC/SINGLE STEP modes when there is no block
to execute or when the active input block has been executed.
In all modes when FEED HOLD is on.
In Jog mode.
After M0/M1, M2/M30.
4103
CNCOutputs
I9.0
TEST WITHOUT MOVEMENT
CC220
1 output signal
General
This function selected with the ALL AXES INHIBIT softkey is used for program test
without axis movement.
H signal
When ALL AXES INHIBIT softkey is active.
Note
If the Reference points have not yet been approached following switchon, then this
is not necessary when ALL AXES INHIBIT is active, either (performed CNC inter
nally).
Only Transfer Allow may be selected for a perfect program run so that a program
can be run under the control of the PLC.
Other signals such as:
DRIVE ON
FEED ALLOW
can be given, but need not be, because they are simulated CNCinternally. This
means that program test is also possible without the machine turned on. The entire
interface remains active even during a Test Without Movement.
I9.1
CONTROL RESET
1 output signal
H signal
The signal is on for as long as the CONTROL RESET softkey is pressed.
A pulse of at least 250 ms is present at I9.1 following external CONTROL RESET
(see CNC Input 16.4).
Note
CONTROL RESET can be used to induce defined conditions at the machine and
CNC in certain circumstances.
CONTROL RESET must be used with the utmost caution especially when gener
ated externally. See also the Note under CNC Input signal 16.4.
4104
CNCOutputs
I9.2
BLOCK SLASH
CC220
1 output signal
H signal
Is on when BLOCK SLASH softkey is active.
L signal
BLOCK SLASH softkey is not active.
Note
If you wish the BLOCK SLASH softkey to be active, this output must be gated with
the input of the same name (O5.2).
I9.3
MULTIRECEIPT
1 output signal
General
This signal must be seen in conjunction with the Multiple Input (see O6.5,
O7.0O11.7) and tells the PLC that data have been accepted by the CNC.
If invalid MULTIMODE signals are present at the NC input or the option for a particu
lar mode is not applied, the OPTION INACTIVE display will appear and no MULTI
RECEIPT is given.
Diagram
MULTISTROBE (I)
MULTIRECEIPT (O)
New data (at the earliest)
4105
CNCOutputs
CC220
I9.4
1 output signal
General
Programs can be selected and activated in a variety of ways:
By manual input at the CNC panel
By PLC at Multiple input (see CNC Inputs 7.0 to 7.7)
By DNC from the HOST computer (see CNC Output 21.2)
H signal
Appears when program number is acknowledged (press ENTER key).
L signal
Appears when of linking the selected program is complete.
Diagram: (a program is active)
Program number input
ENTER key
Program activation
Possible Linking Run
MANUAL PROGRAM
SELECT
4106
CNCOutputs
I9.5
GO BLOCK
CC220
1 output signal
General
GO BLOCK is one of 4 ways of direct entry to the program. From the beginning to
the preselected block, the CNC computes all data without axis movement and
waits until the signal RETURN TO CONTOUR (CNC input 20.6) is tripped.
H signal
After operating the GO BLOCK softkey and entering the block number (ENTER),
the signal appears at the interface.
L signal
Appears when GO BLOCK is terminated. This happens when the last auxiliary func
tions have been issued following RETURN TO CONTOUR.
Note
The interface remains active during the computer run. The PLC must ensure that
DRIVE ON of all axes involved is present during Go Block.
Machine parameter P2010can be used to define which of these 2010 possibilities
is to be activated:
No output of auxiliary functions (M, S, T etc.)
Output of auxiliary functions last programmed in a block
Output of all auxiliary functions (normal mode)
Diagram
Computer run
AUX. FUNCT. INHIBIT (O)
GO BLOCK (O)
RETURN TO
CONTOUR (I)
REENTRY ACTIVE (O)
Output of the last aux. functions
Ouput of the last aux. func
tions in the programmed
block
Approach the position
Time response of the IF signals with Go Block and Ouput of the last Aux. Func
tions.
The interface signals GO BLOCK and AUX. FUNCT. INHIBIT are set as soon as the
computer run starts (see CNC ouput 11.7). At the end of the computer run, the AUX.
FUNCT. INHIBIT signal is reset and the system waits for the RETURN TO CON
TOUR signal. As soon as the RTURN TO CONTOUR signal arrives, the REENTRY
ACTIVE signal (see CNC output 17.1) is set and the last programmed auxiliary func
tions are issued depending on machine parameter P2010.
4107
CNCOutputs
CC220
When all auxiliary functions are issued or none need be issued the GO BLOCK
signal is reset.
Execution of the selected block can now commence. Any auxiliary functions pro
grammed in this block will be issued and the programmed position approached.
Once the selected block has been executed, the axes are in position and the RE
TURN TO CONTOUR signal is no longer set, the REENTRY ACTIVE signal is can
celled.
I9.6
FEEDRATE 0%
1 output signal
General
An axis movement can be prevented by FEED HOLD, FEED ALLOW or with the feed
potentiometer.
If the feed potentiometer is used (0% setting), the CNC will issue the signal
FEEDRATE 0%.
H signal
When no programmed Rapid is active and the potentiometer value is less than 3%
of the total potentiometer range (see Machine parameters 2503 to 2057, para
meters MIN" and MAX").
I9.7
PROGRAM EXISTS
1 output signal
General
This signal must be seen in conjunction with the PROGRAM SEARCH function via
the Multiple Input of the CNC (see O7.0=7.7 MULTIMODE VALUE). It signals
whether a given program is available in the CNC or not.
H signal
Appears after manual input, input in switch functions, program select by softkey
and external program select by the PLC, provided the program is available in the
CNC.
4108
CNCOutputs
I10.0
EXTERNAL PROGRAM SELECT
CC220
1 output signal
General
A program can be automatically selected (activated) by the PLC via the Multiple
Input of the CNC (see O7.0 to O7.7, MULTIMODE VALUE).
The CNC acknowledges the program selection with this output signal.
H signal
The CNC issues this signal for at least the duration of the MULTIRECEIPT (I9.1) if a
program was able to be activated. If a program must be linked first, then the signal
duration is extended by the linking time.
I10.1
NC READY
1 output signal
General
A selected program cannot be started until the control reports NC READY.
H signal
Appears after manual input, input in switch functions, program selection by softkey
and external program selection. It is cancelled by the CNC by an acknowledge fol
lowing NC START.
Diagram
Program selection
NC READY (O)
NC START (I)
Program running
4109
CNCOutputs
CC220
I10.2
SPINDLE UP TO SPEED (SPINDLE)
1 output signal
H signal
Compares command speed with actual speed. If the difference is greater than the
percentage value defined in machine parameter P 7016, the interface signal
SPINDLE UP TO SPEED is issued. The signal is issued for all programmed speeds
depending on the potentiometer.
L signal
As long as the SPINDLE STOP signal is active, this signal stays LOW unless a pro
grammed command speed is active.
Note: For 2nd spindle see I22.2!
I10.3
RAPID 0%
1 output signal
H signal
The signal appears when a Rapid Override value of 0% is set at the potentiometer.
Note
The RAPID output signal is only formed by synchronous axes.
4110
CNCOutputs
CC220
I10.4 I10.6
MSD MODE VALUE
3 output signals
General
The Machine Error and Status Display (MSD) is accessed via the DIAGNOSTIC GM
and the DIAGNOSTIC MACHINE softkey. This facilitates the display and scrolling of
up to 7 screen pages with 32 MSD texts each. The MSD page currently active at the
CNC is transmitted to the PLC as a binary value.
H signal
The appropriate outputs are set each time one of the 7 pages is selected at the
panel. MSD page 1 is always transmitted to the PLC when the mode is quit and fol
lowing Control reset.
Application
Transmits the MSD page number currently active (displayed) at the CNC to the
PLC.
Examples
Action
Select page 1:
Select page 2:
Select page 3:
:
:
:
Select page 7:
I10.7
CPL DIALOG STROBE
I10.6
I10.5
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
L
H
I10.4
1 output signal
As the transmission of CPL data to the PLC, from CPL in dialog" as well as from
CPL under execution" is possible, the PLC must be able to detect which CPL task
the data originate from. This is possible through change signals I7.7 and I10.7.
Note the following:
Data from CPL under execution": Strobe on I7.7
Data from CPL in dialog":
Strobe on I7.7 and I10.7
(method of procedure for data transfer, see I3.0 to I7.7).
4111
CNCOutputs
CC220
I11.0
PROGRAM STOP AT M0/M1
1 output signal
General
M0 means programmed stop", M1 optional programmed stop". These two M
codes are used for deliberate program interrupts by the programmer or operator.
Start again with NC START.
H signal
Appears when M0 or M1 is active in the part program irrespective of whether the
mode is AUTOMATIC, SINGLE BLOCK / SINSTEP, MDI. The signal is set at the
same time as the M strobe (CHANGE SIGNAL M) and remains statically on.
Note
M0/M1 has no delete or suppress function in the CNC.
M0/M1 is also issued via the Multiple Output.
I11.1
1 output signal
General
M2/M30 is programmed in a separate block at the end of a program; there is no
difference between M2 and M30 internal to the CNC.
H signal
Appears when M2 or M30 becomes active in a main program. The signal is set with
the M strobe (CHANGE SIGNAL M) and remains statically on.
L signal
After the CNC is switched on.
With the next M function.
With the next NC Start.
After CONTROL RESET.
Note
M2/M30 sets all functions to switchon status (except G70/G71 and G14/G15).
M2/M30 is also issued via the Multiple Output.
For VA operation in conjunction with DNC (=P0 mode or direct execution by DNC),
this signal is not issued statically after the end of the program, since the program is
deselected automatically.
4112
CNCOutputs
I11.2
THREAD CUTTING ACTIVE (G 33)
CC220
1 output signal
General
If the THREAD CUTTING option is activated and G 33 is programmed, this signal is
issued at the interface during thread cutting.
H signal
Is issued when a G33 block is present for execution.
L signal
Is issued when another G code from the same group (G0, G1, G2, G3, G5, G10,
G11, G12, G17, G73) becomes active.
Application
e.g. preventing FEED HOLD during thread cutting.
Note
Feed and spindle Override potentiometers are not active during G33 operation.
4113
CNCOutputs
I11.3
G 63 active
CC220
1 output signal
General
G 63 causes Feedrate 100% to be set. The programmer is thus able to prevent a
manual feed override for certain program sections for technological reasons.
H signal
Is output when the block in which G 63 is programmed is available for execution.
The feedrate potentiometer is then no longer active.
L signal
Is issued when the block in which G 66 is programmed is available for execution.
Note
If it is intended for G63 to deactivate the spindle override, then this signal must be
gated with the SPINDLE OVERRIDE 100% input signal (Spindle override 100%, see
O17.7 and O24.4).
I11.5
1 output signal
H signal
Is issued when SWITCH FUNCTION mode is active. If you stay in this mode, the
signal continues to be present.
L signal
If the SWITCH FUNCTION mode is deselected by a mode change or a level return,
the control first executes all input data following NC START and then cancels the
signal.
CONTROL RESET cancels the signal immediately.
Diagram (SWITCH FUNCTION can be replaced by the MDI mode)
SK SWITCH FUNCTION
SWITCH FUNCTION (O)
DIAGNOSTIC GM
DATA INPUT
NC START
Data being executed
4114
CNCOutputs
I11.6
OPTIONAL STOP
CC220
1 output signal
General
You are able to optionally activate a programmed stop by softkey in order to per
form specific activities (program override, visual inspection etc.)
H signal
Appears as soon as the softkey OPTIONAL STOP is pressed in the NC group
mode. The softkey is shown reversed if the function is active.
L signal
Appears when function is not active (softkey OPTIONAL STOP is not shown rev
ersed).
Note
Must be gated with output signal of the same name (O6.0) if the function is required.
I11.7
AUX. FUNCT. INHIBIT
1 output signal
General
During Program Test or Go Block (reentry at any point in the program), the CNC
can inhibit the output of auxiliary functions in order to suppress machine functions
and sequences.
H signal
Appears when AUX. FUNCT. INHIBIT softkey is active; softkey is highlighted (pro
gram test).
Appears when MP 2010 is set to 1 or 2 in conjunction with Go Block (see also dia
gram under Signal I9.5, GO BLOCK).
L signal
When the conditions described under the H signal are cancelled:
AUX. FUNCT. INHIBIT softkey not active.
Computer run to the selected block is completed.
4115
CNCOutputs
CC220
I12.0 I13.7
TRAVEL RANGE 1 ... 16
16 output signals
General
Mechanical switches or switch ranges on the machine can be replaced by elec
tronic ones for certain applications. Machine parameters P 6100 and P 6200 pro
vide 20 possible settings that can be freely assigned to the axes. A distinction is
made between two types of signal output:
16 signals to the digital interface:
4 signals at the High Speed I/O on the Servo loop card (for fast signal output)
Monitoring of the travel limit ranges at the digital interface does not commence
until all axes have referenced.
Monitoring of the travel limit ranges at the High Speed I/O of the servo loop card
commences as soon as the relevant axis has reached its reference point.
H signal
Appears when the particular axis moves within the set travel limit range or reaches
the position defined in the machine parameter.
Note
The travel limit range can also be used for point monitoring, provided minimum and
maximum values are identical.
Application
Replacement of mechanical limit switches.
Monitoring of certain positions where special functions are supposed to take place,
e.g. tool change, pallet change etc.
Working areas of axes can also be monitored in relation to one another with the aid
of the PLC.
Diagram: Travel range/Signal output
1. RANGE
1. RANGE
2. RANGE
3. RANGE
4116
2. RANGE (PT.)
3. RANGE
REF. PT.
CNCOutputs
I14.0
FEED MM/REV (G95)
CC220
1 output signal
General
The CNC allows axes to be jogged in both mm/min and in mm/rev mode.
H signal
Appears when softkey JOG MM/REV and one of the manual feeds FAST, MEDIUM,
SLOW is selected and the modes JOG, NC (execute) or MDI are active.
L signal
In all other modes.
I14.1
1 output signal
General
The CNC signals the modal status of CONSTANT CUTTING SPEED (Vconstant) to
the interface.
H signal
The signal is statically issued following manual entry of G96 in the MDI mode or
programming of G96.
L signal
LOW signal is statically issued following manual entry of G97 in the MDI mode or
when G97 is programmed.
The on condition is G97. Accordingly a LOW signal is present at the interface after
CNC is switched, or following activation of CONTROL RESET.
Application
Signal G97 can be used to bridge the spindle runup monitor in the logic circuit to
form Feed Allow (Feed Allow is normally disabled until the SPINDLE UP TO SPEED
signal is issued by the CNC). However, since the speed can change constantly
when G96 is active and the SPINDLE UP TO SPEED signal is issued depending on
the spindle dynamics, Feed Allow should, in interpolation mode, not be constantly
enabled or disabled.
4117
CNCOutputs
I14.2
SPINDLE IS ORIENTED
CC220
1 output signal
H signal
SPINDLE IS ORIENTED is issued when the spindle has reached the InPosition
range (P 7012), the axisrelated InPosition signal is set and the SPINDLE ORIENT
function (corresponding M code) is still active.
L signal
Is issued when after the SPINDLE ORIENT function new selections (M3/M13,
M4/M14, Gear range change, Control reset, M30 or M2 as main program end) are
active for the spindle.
Note: For 2nd spindle see I22.0!
I14.3
TOOL LIFE EXPIRED
1 output signal
General
The CNC issues this signal when the tool currently fitted reaches the preset tool life
limit, provided the tool life monitor is activated.
H signal
Is issued as a static signal when the life of the active tool has expired, and stays on
until it has been replaced either by a new or an alternative tool.
L signal
Is issued when tool life has not yet expired.
Applications
Used to operate a warning lamp at the machine panel or to prepare the tool
changer to replace the unusable tool with a new one.
4118
CNCOutputs
CC220
I14.4
LIFE OF BASIC AND ALTERNATIVE TOOLS EXPIRED
1 output signal
H signal
Is issued as a static signal when, with the tool life monitor switched on, a tool is
fitted whose basic and alternative tool life has expired.
L signal
Is issued when tool life monitor is off or when a residual basic and alternative tool life
is still available for the fitted tool.
Application
Operates texts within the machine error and status display (MSD).
Holds current machining operation, e.g. to fit a new tool.
I14.5
RAPID POT 100% SET
1 output signal
General
The CNC sends to the PLC the interface signal, which indicates the 100% evalu
ation of the Rapid potentiometer by manual operation of the SET RAPID 100% func
tion key.
H signal
Is issued as a static signal after activation of the SET RAPID POT TO 100% function
(see O21.2). L signal is issued by rotating the rapid potentiometer.
L signal
After the SET RAPID POT TO 100% function is deactivated.
Applications
Used to drive the indicator lamp in the corresponding function key.
Ouput as recorder signal for recording machine data.
4119
CNCOutputs
CC220
I14.6
SPINDLE POT 100% SET
1 output signal
General
ation of the spindle potentiometer by manual operation of the SET SPINDLE 100%
function key. For the 2nd spindle see I22.7!
H signal
Issued as a static signal after activation of the function
SPINDELOVERRIDE100% (see O17.7).
L signal
After deactivation of SPINDLE OVERRIDE 100% function.
Application
I14.7
TARGET ACHIEVED
1 output signal
General
The CNC transmits this interface signal to the PLC when the actual piece count
equals the target piece count. This signal is only decoded when the piece counter
is activated (see O17.3).
H signal
Is issued as a static signal when actual count = target count.
L signal
Is issued when the actual count is not equal to the target count.
Application
Drives indicator lamp in function key for AUTOMATIC RESTART MODE (see
O20.5). Function interlock for the automatic barstock advance.
4120
CNCOutputs
I15.0 E 15.7
REFERENCE POINT REACHED
CC220
8 output signals
General
After switching on the CNC and the machine, the active axes must approach the
reference point. After the axes have referenced, the software limit monitors become
active and these signals are also issued for the corresponding axes (see also I18.0
to I18.7).
H signal
Appears when the reference point of the particular axis is reached. The signal also
remains static on if the reference point is approached again at a later time (unlike
the REF. PT. REACHED ALL AXES signal; see I18.0 to I18.7).
Spindle: HIGH signal is issued after SPINDLE ORIENT is initiated when the first
marker comes, even though the spindle executes several more revolutions. HIGH
signal is also issued as soon as M3 or M4 are entered.
L signal
After the CNC is switched on.
With CLEAR ALL LOGIC (softkey)
With measuring system errors
Note
CONTROL RESET does not affect this output signal.
An axis shut down with DRIVE ON does not need to reference; the signal for the axis
concerned stays LOW or HIGH.
The REFERENCE POINT REACHED signals together form the group signal REF.
PTS. REACHED ALL AXES (I8.5).
Diagram
SK REFERENCE POINT
JOG 1.A ... 4.A (I)
REF. PT. REACHED (O)
1.A ... 4.A
REFERENCE POINTS
REACHED ALL AXES
I16.0
SPINDLE STOP
1 output signal
H signal
The signal appears when the speed defined by machine parameter P7021 is un
dershot. For the 2nd spindle see I22.4!
4121
CNCOutputs
CC220
I16.1
1 output signal
General
The idling speed always becomes active when the command gear range does not
coincide with the actual gear range (O19.4 to O20.3).
This can also happen after the machine is switched on.
H signal
This signal is issued when the actual speed is less than:
P7009 +
P7009 x P7016
100
Note
When a frequency is superimposed on the idling speed (see Machine para
meters" manual, P7010 and P7011), the maximum amplitude of the superimposed
speed is included in the tolerance range. The signal stays on until the gear range is
acknowledged.
For the 2nd spindle see I22.3!
Diagram
SOLD (PROGR.)
SNEW (PROGR.)
IDLING SPEED ACTIVE
ACTUAL SPEED
GEAR RANGE CHANGE
I16.2
SPINDLE POT 0%
1 output signal
H signal
This signal appears when a spindle override value of 0% is set. For the 2nd spindle
see I22.6!
4122
CNCOutputs
CC220
I16.3
SPINDLE ON REFERENCE POINT
1 output signal
H signal
This signal is output when the spindle is oriented but no position has been pro
grammed. It stays on until new selections for the spindle are activated.
For the 2nd spindle see I22.1!
I16.4
CAXIS ACTIVE (CNC)
1 output signal
For description see Caxis signals O27.0 to O27.3.
I16.5
TAPPING ACTIVE
1 output signal
H signal
For the duration of thread tapping.
Note
During thread tapping, only the spindle potentiometer is active.
If the CNC input signal INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR changes during tap
ping, this does not become active until tapping is completed.
Tapping does not start until all the axes involved have reached their InPosi
tion ranges (InPos. range for tapping axes see Machine parameter P 1508,
for the spindle see Machine parameter P 7012).
DRIVE ON linkages for the spindle must be considered!
Additional information on tapping: Programming guide, function G32.
4123
CNCOutputs
CC220
I16.7
REVERS. RANGE REACHED
1 output signal
General
This signal is only present when the Asynchronous Reciprocal Axis" option is ap
plied.
If an axis is reciprocating, this signal will be issued for feedin movements at pro
grammable reversal points.
H signal
Appears when the reciprocal axis has reached an InPosition window at the left or
right hand reversal point programmed in the part program.
Diagram
SPEED PROFILE
Reversal point
REVERS.RANGE REACHED
TRANSFER ALLOW
TRAVEL COMMAND OF THE
FEED AXES
I17.0
MILLING HEAD COMPENSATION ACTIVE
1 output signal
General
The signal is issued by the CNC when the control detects a positive edge at the
CNC input O27.5 START MILLING HEAD COMPENSATION. It remains HIGH for as
long as the activation process of the milling head compensation has been success
fully completed by the CNC, for 350 ms at the least in any case.
If the CNC cannot set the correction values (if, for example, TRANSFER ALLOW and
(NOT) FEED HOLD have not been isolated), HIGH level remains at I17.0. In this
case, the error source must be removed and CONTROL RESET or CLEAR ALL
LOGIC must be carried out.
Diagram
START MILL. HEAD COMP.
O27.5
MILL. HEAD COMP. ACTIVE
I17.0
T0
T1
T0 = at least 350 ms
T1 = maximum 1 s (typ. 500 ms); irrespective of system workload
4124
CNCOutputs
I17.1
REENTRY ACTIVE
CC220
1 output signal
General
Return to Contour can be started in conjunction with Go Block. The CNC outputs
this signal for the duration of the return.
H signal
Appears when the RETURN TO CONTOUR key is pressed if the contour was previ
ously left.
L signal
Appears when the approached position is reached (after return).
Diagram
See under GO BLOCK signal (I9.5).
I17.2
PROGRAM OPTIMIZATION ACTIVE
1 output signal
General
The interface signal is set when the program is selected in program optimization
mode. It identifies the active mode and stays set until the program active in Pro
gram Optimization is either deselected or aborted by a runtime error (timeout).
H signal
Program optimization is active.
L signal
The active program in Program Optimization has been deselected or aborted by a
timeout.
Note
Changing from Program Optimization to another Group Mode does not reset the
signal.
4125
CNCOutputs
I17.3
LINKING ACTIVE
CC220
1 output signal
General
A linking run is executed if a programs link table is not yet available in the control
when that program is selected. Another program can also be linked in the back
ground even though a program is currently being run. The same is also true for a
linking after system initialisation (Reset, Load Back up, Delete logic, Switch on).
H signal
Is issued for as long as a linking run is active.
Application
As no new linking process can be initialised during a linking run, this has to be
properly interlocked in the PLC.
Note
See also MANUAL and EXTERNAL PROGRAM SELECT (I9.4 and I10.0)
I17.4
GO BLOCK WITHOUT COMP.
1 output signal
General
A GO BLock can be executed with this signal with or without compensations. With
word coupling, the PLC transmits the corrections to the CNC from the tool table.
H signal
Appears when the WITHOUT TOOL COMP. softkey is activated within the Go Block.
L signal
Appears when the above mentioned softkey is not active or is deactivated within
the Go Block.
Note
Switching the CNC on or off, or CONTROL RESET has no effect on the preset status
of the softkey.
4126
CNCOutputs
I17.5
TEST RUN WITHOUT COMP.
CC220
1 output signal
General
Test without movement (All Axes Inhibit) can be executed by this signal with or with
out adjustments. With word coupling, the PLC transmits the adjustments to the
CNC from the tool table.
H signal
Appears when the WITHOUT TOOL COMP. softkey is activated within the test
mode.
L signal
Appears when the above mentioned softkey is not active or is deactivated within
the test mode.
Note
Switching the CNC on or off, or CONTROL RESET has no effect on the preset status
of the softkey.
I17.7
PROGRAM DESELECT
1 output signal
General
A PLC connected to the CNC must be able to recognise when an active program at
the CNC is deselected, in order to be then able to initialise closing measures.
H signal
Is always used when an active program is deselected. It remains static on until a
program is selected anew or CONTROL RESET is actuated.
4127
CNCOutputs
CC220
I18.0 I18.7
REFERENCE POINT REACHED ALL AXES
8 output signals
General
REFERENCE POINT REACHED ALL AXES is an essential precondition for the or
dered and safe program sequence of a machine tool.
The CNC transmits the Referencing time to the PLC via the CNC output O8.5, REF
ERENCE POINT APPROACH MODE.
H signal
Appears as soon as the reference point is reached.
Caution: Does not appear for spindle(s)!
L signal
Appears after switching on.
Appears when repeated referencing that is not required by the CNC is per
formed (unlike I15.0 to I15.7, REF. PT. REACHED) and until referencing by each axis
is complete.
I19.0 I19.7
EXT. POS. REACHED 1ST to 8TH AXIS
8 output signals
General
The PLC can inquire via CNC interface outputs I19.0 to I19.7 (EXT. POS. REACHED
1 to 8 axis) whether the preset end position of an axis started via the external sig
nal description has been reached (see also signal description O7.0 to O7.7
MULTIMODE VALUE 1128, section Transfer of feed and axis position set values
from PLC to CNC").
H signal
After reaching the end position, the CNC firstly generates the axisspecific signal
AXIS IN POSITION (I2.x) and then sets I19.x to High level. This output remains set
until the corresponding axis is restarted via an external set value input, or control
reset is entered.
L signal
As soon as synchronous or asynchronous axes are started via the multiinterface,
the corresponding CNC interface outputs I19.x are set to Low level. This also
applies when the axis does not traverse at all due to an error!
If an axis is stopped via FEED ALLOW (O1.0 to 1.7), the signal I19.x of the corre
sponding axis remains at LOW level! If a new set value is stipulated, the signal will
not change until the new position has reached High.
4128
CNCOutputs
CC220
I20.0
DNC/NC START
1 output signal
General
The DNC computer is able to perform a program start, but requires an Enable from
the PLC to do this. The latter decides whether the NC START is performed depend
ing on allow conditions.
H signal (EDNC)
When the DNC computer issues the STR" command.
(Signal approx. 500 ms at HIGH, then back to LOW)
H signal (LSV2DNC)
The signal is set by the CNC on receipt of the DNC command M-CS " when the
input signal LOCAL/REMOTE (DNC) has LOW level (CNC is then in the DNC Re
mote Mode).
DNC/NCSTART
(ByteO20.0)
DNC/PLCRECEIPT
(ByteI21.0)
NCSTART
(ByteI5.4)
HIGHorLOWpossible
Functionisexecuted
FunctionisinterlockedbyPLC
Note:
If no suitable precautions are taken in the PLC program, it is possible that the input
signal NC START was not set as a result of the output signal DNC/NC START but as
the result of simultaneous operation of the NC Start button.
In this case, the control sends a function acknowledge to the HOST in the form of a
status message even though the NC Start" action was not in response to the DNC
call.
In this instance, the input signal DNC/PLC RECEIPT must be subsequently set by
the PLC. The CNC will then reset the DNC/NC START output signal. The PLC will
not perform any other DNC commands until this happens!
4129
CNCOutputs
I20.1
DNC/NC FEED HOLD
CC220
1 output signal
General
The DNC computer can interrupt an ongoing program if the PLC so allows. This in
turn will depend on the momentary machine conditions.
H signal (EDNC)
When the DNC computer issues the STP" command.
(Signal for approx. 500 ms at HIGH, then back to LOW). There is no checkback
from the CNC to the DNC computer.
Note
Feed Hold can, for example, be cleared with the next DNC/NC START or with CON
TROL RESET.
H signal (LSV2DNC)
When the DNC computer sends the telegram M-CH", the CNC first checks for the
following conditions:
is CNC in DNC REMOTE" mode and
has the PLC already acknowledged the last DNC instruction.
If these conditions are met, the CNC sets the output signal DNC/FEED HOLD to
HIGH level.
If the PLC allows FEED HOLD (any gate operations must be considered), it ac
knowledges the command with the DNC/PLCReceipt signal (O21.0) and sets the
interface signal (NOT) FEED HOLD (O5.5) to LOW.
Caution: The PLC must set the LOW signal (NOT) FEED HOLD and DNC/PLC
Receipt within the same PLC run !
DNC/FEEDHOLD
DNC/PLCRECEIPT
(NOT)FEEDHOLD
HIGHorLOWpossible
FunctioninterlockedbyPLC
Functionisexecuted
The CNC resets the DNC/FEED HOLD signal again after it receives the DNC/PLC
Receipt signal.
4130
CNCOutputs
I20.2
DNC/NC FEED HOLD OFF
CC220
1 output signal
Application
The DNC computer can cancel an existing Feed Hold again (LSV2DNC only) pro
vided the PLC permits. This in turn will depend on the momentary machine condi
tions.
H signal
When the DNC computer sends the telegram M-CR", the CNC first checks for the
following conditions:
is CNC in DNC REMOTE" mode and
has the PLC already acknowledged the last DNC instruction.
If these conditions are met, the CNC sets the output signal DNC/FEED HOLD OFF
to HIGH level.
If the PLC allows FEED HOLD to be cancelled, it acknowledges the command with
the DNC/PLCReceipt signal (O21.0) and sets the interface signal (NOT) FEED
HOLD to HIGH.
Caution: The PLC must set the LOW signal (NOT) FEED HOLD and DNC/PLC
Receipt within the same PLC run !
DNC/FEEDHOLDOFF
DNC/PLCRECEIPT
(NOT)FEEDHOLD
HIGHorLOWpossible
FunctioninterlockedbyPLC
Functionexecuted.
4131
CNCOutputs
CC220
I20.6
DNC/CONTROL RESET
1 output signal
General
The DNC computer can request Control Reset from the CNC. Whether CONTROL
RESET is actually performed or not will depend on the PLC permission".
H signal (EDNC)
When the DNC computer issues the CTR" command.
(Signal for approx. 500 ms at HIGH, then back to LOW).
The signal must be gated in the PLC. The PLC then decides whether Control Reset
will actually be initiated or not.
H signal (LSV2DNC)
The signal is set by the CNC on receipt of the DNC command MCN when the
input signal LOCAL/REMOTE (DNC) has LOW level (CNC is then in the DNC Re
mote Mode). The following conditions must also be met for the function to be ex
ecuted:
.
The last DNC command to the PLC is acknowledged
No program is just being executed (NC status is WAITING, READY or

STOPPED)
None of the following diagnostics programs are active:

Machine Parameter Program (D4)
Switch over Texts (D8)
Program EEPROM (D9)
DNC/CONTROLRESET
(ByteO20.6)
DNC/PLCRECEIPT
(ByteI21.0)
CONTROLRESET
(ByteI16.4)
CONTROLRESET
(ByteO9.1)
approx.
250 ms
HIGHorLOWpossible
Functionexecuted
FunctionisinterlockedbyPLC
NonewDNCcommandsarepossible
untilafterthispointintime.
With the CONTROL RESET" output signal (byte O9.1) the CC 220 tells the PLC
that Control Reset has been executed. The signal is present for approx. 250 ms at
the output and is then reset by the CNC.
4132
CNCOutputs
I20.7
DNC ON
CC220
1 output signal
General
A static signal that signals to the PLC whether DNC is active or not.
H signal
DNC is active.
L signal
DNC is switched off.
Application
For interlock purposes in the PLC.
4133
CNCOutputs
CC220
I21.0
DNC/REFERENCE POINT APPROACH
1 output signal
General
Via the PLC, the DNC computer is able to have individual/all axes (except spindle
and ANALOG type axes) approach a reference point, provided the PLC gives the
necessary enables.
With EDNC, singleaxis Reference Point Approach cannot be initialised.
H signal (EDNC)
When the DNC computer issues the RFP" command.
(Signal for approx. 500 ms at HIGH, then back to LOW). This signal is used to start a
Reference Point Approach installed in the PLC.
H signal (LSV2DNC)
The DNC/REFERENCE POINT APPROACH" signal is set by the CNC after receiv
ing the DNC command MRF-", provided the following conditions are met:
.
the input signal LOCAL/REMOTE (DNC)" has LOW level (CNC is now in DNC
Remote mode),
the last command to the PLC has been acknowledged,
NC status is READY", WAITING" or STOPPED",
of the applied axes with DRIVE ON" status, no singleaxis lockout is active,
there is no fault present in the CNC (except DNC fault),
overall lockout is not active.
The applied axes are checked for the presence of these conditions (exception:
spindle and analog" type axes).
At the same time as DNC/REF. PT. APPROACH", the CNC activates the
DNC/1.AXIS" to DNC/8.AXIS" output signals (see I24.0 to I24.7) of all axes for
which Reference Point Approach is permitted and/or desired. This also applies for
an active axis. The output signals of axes for which DRIVE ON" is not set or for
which YES" is entered in Machine Parameter P 106 ("Asynchronous axis/Spindle
not for screen display") are not set.
The PLC confirms the command by setting the CNC input signal DNC/PLC RE
CEIPT", whereupon the CNC resets the DNC/REFERENCE POINT APPROACH"
signal again and checks the CNC input signal REFERENCE POINT APPROACH"
(see O16.1). If the command was not executed by the PLC, the CNC aborts the
function and sends an error message to the HOST. The CNC interprets an active
REFERENCE POINT APPROACH" input signal as a positive receipt from the PLC
(Reference Point Approach is permitted). REFERENCE POINT APPROACH"
must stay on until the reference points have been approached or until the function
is aborted.
The CNC output signal REFERENCE POINT APPROACH MODE" (see I8.4) stays
on for as long as the Reference Point Approach" function is active in the control. In
4134
CNCOutputs
CC220
this condition the PLC must initiate the Reference Point Approach operation for the
selected axes by setting the appropriate CNC input signals JOG 1. AXIS" to JOG 8.
AXIS" (see O13.0 to O14.7). An axis is selected when the CNC output signal which
corresponds to that axis is set, i.e. DNC/1. AXIS" to DNC/8. AXIS".
The start sequence and direction of the Reference Point Approach are arbitrary.
Reference Point Approach is terminated by the CNC either by quitting the function
or when all started axes have reached their reference points. Quitting is possible by
operator input at the control system or by the PLC. To do this, the PLC must reset
the CNC signal REFERENCE POINT APPROACH" before the axes have refer
enced.
Provided the function has been properly completed, the CC 320 M sends a status
message with the Reference points reached" result; following a quit it sends an
appropriate error message to the HOST.
The output signals DNC/1.AXIS" to DNC/8.AXIS" are reset again by the CNC after
completing the Reference Point Approach.
DNC/1.AXIS
(ByteO24.0)
DNC/8.AXIS
(ByteO24.7)
DNC/REFERENCEPOINTAPPROACH
(ByteO21.0)
DNC/PLCRECEIPT
(ByteI21.0)
REFERENCEPOINTAPPROACH
(ByteI16.1)
REFERENCEPOINTAPPROACHMODE
(ByteO8.4)
JOG1.AXIS
(ByteI13.0
JOG8.AXIS
(ByteI14.7)
HIGHorLOWpossible
Functionexecuted
FunctionisinterlockedbyPLC.
4135
NonewDNCcommands
arepossibleuntiltheipoint
CNCOutputs
CC220
I21.2
DNC PROGRAM SELECT
1 output signal
General
Depending on the preselected LOCAL/REMOTE mode, the DNC computer is able
to perform a direct program selection (i.e. without PLC intervention) in the CNC.
During program select and during any linking time, the CNC sends this signal to
the PLC as a message.
H signal (EDNC)
When the DNC computer selects the program i.e. activates it in the CNC.
For command syntax for the HOST see EDNC manual. For diagram see under H
signal (LSV2DNC)".
H signal (LSV2DNC)
The signal is set by the CNC after receiving the DNC command MSP" (Activate
a table or program select), MCS" (Program select with automatic start) or
RPPP" (Direct execution by DNC interface) when the input signal LOCAL/RE
MOTE (DNC)" has LOW level (CNC is then in DNC Remote mode). The following
conditions must also be met for the function to be executed:
.
When selecting a program:

Reference points are known
NC status is WAITING, READY or STOPPED
The program may not be initiated by a CPL program or the Editor
No program may be linked in the background if no Link table exists for
the selected program.
No program may be active yet when a table is activated.
Program/Table must exist in the CNC.
Program/Table may not be protected against execution.
The signal stays on as long as the CNC is linking the selected program or until the
linking run is aborted (e.g. if an error occurs). The PLC may not perform an exter
nal program select during this time.
DNC/PROGRAMSELECT
Linktime
Note
During Direct execution by DNC interface", the DNC/PROGRAM SELECT" signal
is HIGH until the status of the CNC changes to READY (see EDNC and LSV2DNC
Manual).
4136
CNCOutputs
I21.3
DNC/QUIT REF. PT. APPROACH
CC220
1 output signal
General
The signal is set when the computer requests a Quit from the REF. PT. APPROACH
function initiated by the DNC (BABDNC only).
H signal
DNC computer requests quit.
L signal
The signal is reset when the function is completed.
I21.5
DNC/SPE CONNECTION O.K.
1 output signal
General
This output signal tells the PLC the status of the transfer connection between CNC
and DNC computer.
H signal
The transfer connection is ready for operation.
L signal
The transfer connection is not ready.
Note
The signal goes to LOW temporarily if the conditions for the DNC error LINK FAULT
or COMP. NOT READY TO RECEIVE are met. Once the fault is remedied, i.e. the
send command in which the condition occurred has been successfully performed,
the signal goes HIGH again.
The signal goes permanently LOW when a hardware fault is detected at the DNC
interface.
4137
CNCOutputs
CC220
I22.0
2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE IS ORIENTED
1 output signal
H signal
2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE IS ORIENTED is issued when the spindle has reached the
InPosition range (P 7112), the axisrelated InPosition signal is set and the
SPINDLE ORIENT function (corresponding M code) is still active for the 2nd
spindle.
L signal
Is issued when after the SPINDLE ORIENT function (for 2nd spindle) new
selections (M3/M13, M4/M14, Gear range change, Control reset, M30 or M2 as
main program end) are active for this spindle.
Note: For first spindle see I14.2!
I22.1
2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE ON REFERENCE POINT
1 output signal
H signal
This signal is issued when the second spindle is oriented but no position has been
programmed. It stays on until new selections for the second spindle are activated.
For first spindle see I16.3!
I22.2
2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE UP TO SPEED (SPINDLE)
1 output signal
H signal
Compares command speed with actual speed. If the difference is greater than the
percentage value defined in machine parameter P 7116, the interface signal 2ND
SPINDLE: SPINDLE UP TO SPEED is issued. The signal is issued for all pro
grammed speeds depending on the potentiometer.
L signal
As long as signal 2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE STOP is active, this signal stays LOW if
no programmed set speed is active.
Note: For first spindle see I10.2!
4138
CNCOutputs
CC220
I22.3
2ND SPINDLE: IDLING SPEED REACHED
1 output signal
General
The idling speed always becomes active when the command gear range does not
coincide with the actual gear range (O20.0 to O20.3) of the second spindle.
This can also happen after the machine is switched on. After switchon, the CNC
always requests the first gear range.
H signal
This signal is issued when the actual speed is less than:
P7109 +
P7109 x P7116
100
Note
When a frequency is superimposed on the idling speed (see Machine para
meters" manual, P7110 and P7111), the maximum amplitude of the superimposed
speed is included in the tolerance range. The signal stays on until the gear range is
acknowledged.
For first spindle see I16.1!
Diagram
SOLD (PROGR.)
SNEW (PROGR.)
IDLING SPEED ACTIVE
ACTUAL SPEED
GEAR RANGE CHANGE
I22.4
2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE STOP
1 output signal
H signal
The signal appears when the speed defined by machine parameter P7121 is un
dershot. For first spindle see I16.0!
4139
CNCOutputs
CC220
I22.5
2ND SPINDLE ACTIVE
1 output signal
H signal
This signal appears after activation of the second spindle (G202).
L signal
Default status. This signal also appears after activation of the first spindle (G201).
I22.6
2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE POT 0%
1 output signal
H signal
This signal appears when a spindle override value of 0% is set. For first spindle see
I16.2!
I22.7
2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE POT 100% SET
1 output signal
General
ation of the spindle potentiometer by manual operation of the SET 2ND SPINDLE
100% function key. For first spindle see I14.6!
H signal
Issued as a static signal after activation of the function
SET 2ND SPINDLE POT100% (see O24.4).
L signal
After the SET SPINDLE POT TO 100 % function is deactivated.
Application
4140
CNCOutputs
CC220
I23.0 I23.7
ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHOVER 1. 8. AXIS
1 output signal
General
Synchronous axes can be switched to asynchronous mode via G function G178.
With G179/M30/M02, all switched over axes are switched back to synchronous
mode.
Switching back to synchronous mode can also be attained through Program Dese
lect, Control Reset and Delete Logic.
H signal
The corresponding synchronous axis is switched to asynchronous mode.
L signal
Default status. No switchover active.
I24.0 I24.7
DNC 1. AXIS to DNC 8. AXIS
8 output signals
(LSV2DNC only)
The CNC output signals DNC 1.AXIS to DNC 8. AXIS are set for the axes for which
Reference Point Approach is selected and permitted (machine parameter P 106).
For sequence and diagram see under DNC/REFERENCE POINT APPROACH
(I21.0).
I25.0 I25.7
The meaning of this signal can be defined according to machine parameters
Movement ON
General
The signal indicates if a synchronous axis is being moved.
H signal
When the lag is larger than entered machine parameter P6517 for at least one of the
synchronous axes.
Condition is that no P2 error exists.
L signal
With all synchronous axes, the lag is smaller/larger than entered in machine para
meter P6517.
4141
CNCOutputs
CC220
POSITION REACHED
General
With the help of this signal, a switching function can be initiated through a random
axis from a position before the end point has been reached.
H signal
A distance to the end point concerned, defined in machine parameter P6517, has
been reached.
L signal
Default status
When reading in a new block and leaving the last end position
I26.0 I26.1
Coupling 1st or 2nd axis pair active
1 output signal
General
Machine parameter P124 can be used to determine which axes are to be traversed
coupled to each other.
This coupling is activated or deactivated via function G995.
H signal
The coupling of the 1st or 2nd axis pair is active.
L signal
Default status
The coupling of the 1st or 2nd axis pair is not active.
I31.5
THREAD CYCLE ACTIVE
1 output signal
General
This signal is issued where the expansion option Thread cutting" is active and
G330 is activated.
H signal
A G330 block is ready for processing.
L signal
Is issued when another G code from the same group (G0, G1, G2, G3, G5, G73) is
active.
Note
Feed and spindle override pots. are inoperative during G330 operation.
4142
CNCOutputs
I31.6
G 86 active
CC220
1 output signal
H signal
Appears as soon as the block in which drilling cycle G86 is programmed becomes
active.
L signal
On completion of drilling cycle G86. CONTROL RESET resets G86.
Application
Special interlock facilities.
I31.7
G 84 active
1 output signal
H signal
Appears as soon as the block in which drilling cycle G84 is programmed becomes
active.
The feed potentiometer is automatically deactivated.
L signal
Appears on completion of the cycle.
CONTROL RESET resets G84.
Note
If the current spindle override value is to be deactivated as well, then the SPINDLE
OVERRIDE 100% input can also be assigned this signal.
4143
DigitalInterface(Descriptions)
Othersignals
4.3
CC220
Other signals
Ready 2
READY 2 is a hardware relay contact on the PS 75 Power Supply Mode (switch rat
ing: 50 W/24V/ max.2A) that breaks when the following faults occur:
CNCinternal voltage fault

Overtemperature (> 58 C internal)
Measuring system fault
Control loop fault
Computer fault
CAUTION!
The READY2 contact must be networked to the emergency stop circuit!

The control is not ready if the READY2 contact is open! For this reason all dan
gerous functions must be made safe immediately after opening the contact! In
particular, it must be ensured that with an open READY 2 contact no axes are
able to traverse!
When switching off, the power to the drives must first be shut off before the
CNC logic voltage is switched off!
MTB1 I/O Inputs/Outputs
I32.0 to I39.7
MTB1 I/O inputs
and
O32.0 to O35.7
MTB1 I/O outputs
64 input signals
32 output signals
With the MTB1 card, 64 inputs and 32 outputs can be signalled to/from the machine
panel to the PLC. The MTB1 I/O must be installed in the panel enclosure by the ma
chinetool manufacturer.
For connections, supply voltage and addressing of the MTB1 I/O, please refer to
section 1.5.1 MTB I/O".
Caution:
No timecritical signals should be routed via the MTB1 I/O (e.g. strobe signals).
All inputs that are signalled via the MTB1 I/O to the PLC must be present for
at least 2 PLC cycles before the PLC can interpret them as HIGH or LOW signals.
The inputs and outputs of the MTB1 I/O may only be used for the machine
panel (buttons and signal lamps).
The max. cable length allowed at the inputs is 0.5 m.
4144
Othersignals
CC220
High Speed I/O of the control loop card

Apart from the signal inputs/outputs at the digital interface of the CNC, a number of
other inputs/outputs are available at the HighSpeed I/O of the servo loop card
SERVO i.
As a rule, these signals are optional, i.e. they depend on the presence of options.
The terminal assignment of these signals are userconfigurable with machine
parameter group P 9500.
The inputs/outputs at the HighSpeed I/O differ from those of the digital interface by
the reaction of the CNC to an event, e.g. with axisstop.
The reaction time at the digital interface is affected by the block cycle time of the
CNC and by machine parameter P 6006 (I/O start time).
The reaction time at the HighSpeed I/O on the other hand is only affected by the
interpolation time (parametered with machine parameter P 9901, usually set to
10 ms).
4145
Othersignals
CC220
4 HIGHSPEED LIMITS
4 output signals
General
Mechanical switches or switch ranges on the machine can be replaced by elec
tronic ones for certain applications. There are 20 possible settings in machine para
meters P 6100 and P 6200 that are freely assignable to the axes. A distinction is
made between two types of signal output:
16 signals to the digital interface:
4 signals at the High Speed I/O on the Servo loop card (for fast signal output)
Monitoring of the travel limit ranges at the digital interface does not commence
until all axes have referenced.
Monitoring of the travel limit ranges at the High Speed I/O of the servo loop card
commences as soon as the relevant axis has reached its reference point.
H signal
Appears when the particular axis moves within the set travel limit range or reaches
the area defined in the machine parameter.
Note
The highspeed limit switches can also be used for point monitoring when mini
mum and maximum values are identical.
Application
Replacement of mechanical limit switches.
Monitoring of certain positions where special functions are supposed to take
place, e.g. tool change, pallet change etc.
Working areas of axes can also be monitored in relation to one another with the aid
of the PLC.
Diagram: Travel range/Signal output
1. RANGE
1. RANGE
2. RANGE
3. RANGE
4146
2. RANGE (PT.)
3. RANGE
REF. PT.
Othersignals
4 HIGHSPEED INPOS SIGNALS
CC220
4 output signals
General
The CNC uses these signals to tell the PLC that the specified position of an axis (1.
to 4. axis) is reached.
H signal
The axis is within the InPosition window adjustable using machine parameter
P1508.
L signal
A movement is executed or
although a travel command is present, no movement can take place because
FEED ALLOW is absent or FEED HOLD is present.
Note
See notes and diagrams under POS./NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND signal.
Application
Special cases
4147
Othersignals
CC220
TANGENTIAL TOOL GUIDANCE: RAISE
1 output signal
General
With tangental tool guidance, a tool is turned by a rotary or endless axis in such a
way that it is always tangentally guided to the contour programmed in the XY
plane. When moving between 2 programmed blocks, it is usually necessary to turn
the tool by a certain angle. When this turn angle exceeds a certain maximum limit,
the tool must be raised before a turn and then lowered again.
H signal
Is issued before the turn depending on machine parameters P6401 and P 6402 for
time T = P9901 x 6403 (ms).
TANGENTIAL TOOL GUIDANCE: LOWER
1 output signal
General
See above.
H signal
Is issued before the turn depending on machine parameters P6401 and P 6402 for
time T = P9901 x 6404 (ms).
RESOLUTION SWITCHOVER SPINDLE
General
H signal
Is issued when the following conditions are simultaneously met:
Position control active
Endpoint reached (Interpolator)
No Caxis mode
Spindle lag is less than P 7021 (spindle stop).
Application
Drive switchover to 16fold input decoding.
4148
1 output signal
Othersignals
CC220
CONTROLLED SPINDLE STOP
1 output signal
H signal
Is issued when the following conditions are met:
Position control active
Endpoint reached (Interpolator)
No Caxis mode
Spindle stopped in InPos window
(Lag < P1508 of the spindle axis)
L signal
When lag > P7012.
Application
Switchover to control in drive.
(NOT) FAST FEED HOLD
1 input signal
General
This signal is static, nonlatching and is a Not signal.
It does not affect auxiliary functions or asynchronous movements and only
affects synchronous axis movements.
Auxiliary axes are held with FEED ALLOW.
H signal
Precondition for normal CNC operation, e.g. program run after NC Start or Jog
mode.
L signal
Initiates FEED HOLD.
Controlled interrupt or inhibition of axis movements.
No effect on spindle speed.
Acts on the output signal PROGRAM RUNNING (Low signal).
Application
Inclusion of machinedependent safetyrelevant machine functions, e.g. to prevent
Feed Hold" during thread cutting (G 33) and tapping (G 84).
Note
In the PLC, FEED HOLD VIA SERVO INPUT must be decoded.
NC START and FEED HOLD must be configured in the PLC as flipflop functions
because NC START must be able to clear the FEED HOLD conditions.
4149
Othersignals
4150
CC220
DigitalInterface
SignalRegister
4.4
CC220
Signal register
To facilitate quick location of the individual signal descriptions, this register lists all
the signal names together with their addresses in alphabetic order. Other signals
(e.g. HighSpeed I/O) are marked with the corresponding page numbers.
New or altered signals (with respect to previous manual editions) are denoted with
".

2ND SPINDLE ACTIVE
(O16.5)
(I22.5)
(O6.6)
(ANALOG OVERRIDE 100%)

Activate program (MULTIMODE)
AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC GEAR RANGE SELECTION (M40)
AUTOMATIC GEAR RANGE SELECTION (2ND SPINDLE)
AUTOMATIC MODE
ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHOVER 1.8. AXIS
AUX. FUNCT. INHIBIT
AXIS IN POSITION
(O7.0 O7.7)
(O12.4).
(O17.2)
(O24.0)
(I8.0)
(O20.5)
(O12.0)
(I23.0 I23.7)
(I11.7)
(I2.0 I2.7)
BLOCK SLASH
BLOCK SLASH
(O5.2)
(I9.2)
CAXIS ACTIVE (CNC)

CAXIS ACTIVE (PLC)
CAXIS SIGNALS
Change override values via PLC (MULTIMODE)
CHANGE SIGNALS (STROBE)
CLEAR DIST. TO GO
CONTROL RESET
CONTROL RESET
CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED (2ND SPINDLE)
CONTROLLED SPINDLE STOP
CORRECTION ACTUAL COUNT
Coupling 1st or 2nd axis pair active
CPL DATA TRANSFER TO PLC (MULTIMODE)
CPL DATA TRANSFER FROM PLC (MULTIMODE)
CPL DIALOG STROBE
(I16.4)
(O27.3)
(O27.0 O27.3)
(O7.0 O7.7)
(I7.0 I7.7)
(O16.3)
(O16.4)
(I9.1)
(O17.5)
(O24.2)
(page 4130)
(O21.3)
(O26.0 O26.1)
(I7.7 / I10.7)
(O7.0 O7.7)
(I10.7)
(O6.3)
(I14.1)
4151
DigitalInterface
SignalRegister
DATA LINE MULTIMODE
CC220
DIRECT CALL
DNC/1.8. AXIS
DNC/ABORT REFERENCE POINT APPROACH
DNC/CONTROL RESET
DNC/FEED HOLD
DNC/FEED HOLD OFF
DNC/LSV2 CONNECTION O.K.
DNC/NC START
DNC ON
DNC/PLC RECEIPT
DNC PROGRAM SELECT
DNC/REFERENCE POINT APPROACH
DRIFT COMP OFF / 1.8 AXIS
DRIVE ON 1. 8. AXIS
(O8.0 O11.7)
(O6.1)
(I24.0 I24.7)
(I21.3)
(I20.6)
(I20.1)
(I20.2)
(I21.5)
(I20.0)
(I20.7)
(O21.0)
(I21.2)
(I21.0)
(O25.0 O25.7)
(O0.0 O0.7)
EDIT INHIBIT
EXT.POS.REACHED 1.8. AXIS
EXTERNAL FEED
EXTERNAL FEED POT
EXTERNAL PROGRAM SELECT
EXTERNAL SPINDLE POTI
EXTERNAL SPINDLE POT (2ND SPINDLE)
(O5.1)
(I19.0 I19.7)
(O15.4)
(O17.0)
(I10.0)
(O17.1)
(O24.5)
FEED ALLOW 1.8. AXIS
(O1.0 O1.7)
(I14.0)
(I9.6)
(O27.6)
FEED IN MM/REV. (G95)

FEEDRATE 0%
FEEDRATE REDUCTION
G 63 active
G 84 ACTIVE
G 86 ACTIVE
GO BLOCK
GO BLOCK WITHOUT COMP.
HANDWHEEL 1.8. AXIS

HIGHSPEED INPOS SIGNALS
HIGHSPEED LIMITS
HIRTH AXIS ERROR

IDLING SPEED REACHED (2ND SPINDLE)
INCREMENT 1
INCREMENT 10
INCREMENT 100
INCREMENT X
INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR 1.8. AXIS
4152
(I11.3)
(I31.7)
(I31.6)
(I9.5)
(I17.4)
(O22.0 O22.7)
(page 4128)
(page 4127)
(I17.6)
(I16.1)
(I22.3)
(O16.0)
(O15.7)
(O15.6)
(O15.5)
(O23.0 O23.7)
DigitalInterface
SignalRegister
JOG 1.8. AXIS POS./NEG.
CC220
JOG (mm/min)
JOG (mm/rev)
JOG MODE
(O13.0 O14.7)
(O16.6)
(O16.7)
(I8.3)
LIFE OF BASIC AND ALT. TOOLS EXPIRED

LINKING ACTIVE
LOCAL/REMOTE (DNC)
(I14.4)
(I17.3)
(O5.6)
MACHINE MODE
(O26.0 O26.7)
(O15.1)
(O15.2)
(O15.0)
(O15.3)
(I8.2)
(I9.4)
(I17.0)
(O26.0 O26.7)
(O6.4)
(I25.0 I25.7)
(O7.0 O7.7)
(I10.4 I10.6)
(I3.0 I4.3)
(I9.3)
(O7.0 O7.7)
(O6.5)
MANUAL FEED FAST

MANUAL FEED MEDIUM
MANUAL FEED RAPID
MANUAL FEED SLOW
MANUAL MODE
MILLING HEAD COMPENSATION ACTIVE
MIRROR SWITCH
MODE INHIBIT
MOVEMENT ON
MSD DISPLAY (MULTIMODE)
MSD MODE VALENCY 14
MST AUX
MULTIRECEIPT
MULTIMODE VALENCY 1128
MULTISTROBE
NC READY
NC START
NEG./POS. TRAVEL COMMAND 1.8. AXIS
(NOT) FAST FEED HOLD
(NOT) FEED HOLD
(NOT) REDUCTION 1.8. AXIS
OPTIONAL JUMP ON
OPTIONAL STOP
OPTIONAL STOP
PIECE COUNTER ON
POS./NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND 1.8. AXIS
POSITION REACHED
PROGRAM DESELECT
PROGRAM EXISTS
PROGRAM OPTIMIZATION ACTIVE
PROGRAM RUNNING
PROGRAM STOP AT M0 OR M1
4153
(I10.1)
(O5.4)
(I0.0 I1.7)
(O5.3)
(page 4130)
(O5.5)
(O4.0 O4.7)
(O12.1)
(O6.0)
(I11.6)
(O17.3)
(I0.0 I1.7)
(I25.0 I25.7)
(I17.7)
(I11.1)
(I9.7)
(I17.2)
(I8.7)
(I11.0)
DigitalInterface
SignalRegister
CC220
QUADRANT PROGRAMMING
(O20.4)
RAPID (TRAVERSE)
(I8.6)
(I10.3)
(I14.5)
(I17.1)
(page 4125)
(page 4125)
(O18.0 O18.7)
(O18.4 O18.7)
(O16.1)
(I18.0 I18.7)
(I15.0 I15.7)
(I8.5)
(O27.2)
(O3.0 O3.7)
(I8.4)
(O27.7)
(O20.6)
(I16.7)
RAPID 0%
RAPID POT 100% SET
REENTRY ACTIVE
READY 2
READY 2
RECEIPT GEAR RANGE 18
RECEIPT GEAR RANGE 14 2ND SPINDLE
REFERENCE POINT APPROACHED 1.8. AXIS
REFERENCE POINT REACHED 1.8. AXIS
REFERENCE POINT APPROACH CAXIS
REFERENCE POINT APPROACH DIRECTION 1.8. AXIS
REFERENCE POINT APPROACH MODE
REMACHINE THREAD WITHOUT ROUGHING
RETURN TO CONTOUR
REVERS. RANGE REACHED
SEARCH program (MULTIMODE)
(O7.0 O7.7)
SET FEED POT 100%
(O21.1)
SET RAPID POT 100%
(O21.2)
SET SPINDLE POT 100%
(O17.7)
SET SPINDLE POT 100% (2ND SPINDLE)
(O24.4)
SELECT GEAR RANGE 14 (MANUAL) (2ND SPINDLE)
(O20.0 O20.3)
SELECT GEAR RANGE 18 (MANUAL)
(O19.4 O20.3)
SIGN (+/) (L/H)
(O6.7)
SINGLE BLOCK
(O12.5)
(O20.7)
SINGLE BLOCK MODE
(I8.1)
SPINDLE ANTICLOCKWISE M04 (MANUAL)
(O19.1)
SPINDLE ANTICLOCKWISE M04 (MANUAL) (2ND SPINDLE) (O12.5)
SPINDLE CLOCKWISE M03 (MANUAL)
(O19.0)
SPINDLE CLOCKWISE M03 (MANUAL) (2ND SPINDLE)
(O12.4)
SPINDLE IS ORIENTED
(I14.2)
SPINDLE IS ORIENTED (2ND SPINDLE)
(I22.0)
SPINDLE ON REFERENCE POINT
(I16.3)
SPINDLE ON REFERENCE POINT (2ND SPINDLE)
(I22.1)
SPINDLE ORIENT M19 (MANUAL)
(O19.3)
SPINDLE ORIENT M19 (MANUAL) (2ND SPINDLE)
(O12.7)
SPINDLE SET VALUE 0 VOLT (NOT)
(O17.6)
SPINDLE SET VALUE 0 VOLT (NOT) (2ND SPINDLE)
(O24.3)
SPINDLE STOP
(I16.0)
SPINDLE STOP (2ND SPINDLE)
(I22.4)
(O19.2)
SPINDLE STOP M05 (MANUAL) (2ND SPINDLE)
(O12.6)
SPINDLE POT 0 PER CENT
(I16.2)
SPINDLE POT 0 PER CENT (2ND SPINDLE)
(I22.6)
4154
DigitalInterface
SignalRegister
CC220
SPINDLE POT 100% SET

SPINDLE POT 100% SET (2ND SPINDLE)
SPINDLE RESOLUTION SWITCHOVER
SPINDLE REVERSE
SPINDLE REVERSE (2ND SPINDLE)
SPINDLE SPEED REACHED
SPINDLE SPEED REACHED (2ND SPINDLE)
ST AUX
START MILLING HEAD COMPENSATION
SWITCH OVER DRILLING AXIS (MULTIMODE)
(I14.6)
(I22.7)
(page 4129)
(O17.4)
(O24.1)
(I10.2)
(I22.2)
(I4.4 I5.3)
(O27.5)
(O12.3)
(I11.5)
(O7.0 O7.7)
(O27.1)
(O27.0)
T AUX
TAPPING ACTIVE
TANGENTAL TOOL GUIDANCE
TARGET ACHIEVED
TEACH IN SPINDLE
TEACH IN FEED
TEST WITHOUT MOVEMENT
TEST RUN WITHOUT COMP.
THREAD GAUGE / REMACHINE
THREAD CUTTING ACTIVE (G33)
THREAD CYCLE ACTIVE
TOOL LIFE EXPIRED
Transfer position set value of an axis (MULTIMODE)
TRAVEL COMMAND 1.8. AXIS
TRANSFER FEED SET VALUE OF AN AXIS (MULTIMODE)
TRANSFER ALLOW
TRAVEL RANGE 1 ... 16
(I5.4 I6.7)
(I16.5)
(page 4129)
(I14.7)
(O21.7)
(O21.6)
(I9.0)
(I17.5)
(O21.5)
(I11.2)
(I31.5)
(O21.4)
(I14.3)
(O7.0 O7.7)
(O2.0 O2.7)
(O7.0 O7.7)
(O5.0)
(I12.0 I13.7)
ZERO RESET
(O16.2)
4155
DigitalInterface
SignalRegister
4156
CC220
CC220
Partslist
Parts list
Card rack:
NC card rack 1.05
Fan unit 242 (24V=) for NC card rack 1.05
NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 incl. fan
NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7 incl. fan
Assembly kit for card rack rear side assembly
065 610
054 092
066 750
066 860
050 409
Operating panels, keyboard:

12" monochrome operating panel 1.012"
14" colour operating panel 1.014"
Connection cable X22 (CP/MEM panel) 2.5 m
Connection cable X22 (CP/MEM panel) 5 m
Connection cable X21 (CP/MEM5 panel) 2.5 m
Connection cable X21 (CP/MEM5 panel) 10 m
Connection cable X21 (CP/MEM5 panel) 25 m
ASCII keyboard:
Cyrillic ASCII keyboard:
Drawer for ASCII keyboard:
063 547
063 554
048 028
052 265
048 029
048 668
065 617
065 620
065 622
065 624
050 461
062 521
050 910
MTB1 I/O
Connection cable X61 (MTB1 I/O panel)
Connection cable X62 (MTB1 I/O panel)
063 551
065 619
065 618
MTB1 I/O:
Handwheels:
Digital handwheel (100 pulses/rev.):
069 167
Special cable for digital handwheel (max. 14 m): 070/908 558
Analog handwheel (1kOhm, linear):
038 341
Special cable for analog handwheel/potentiometer (max. 30 m): 904 696
Module CP/MEM5:
CP/MEM5 base
Processor module CG16/15F
Processor module CG160/25F
Processor module GX32/30F
Processor module GX32/30F
Graphics module
EEPROM module 32k
EEPROM module 128k
System software Z25 German
Parts1
15/30 MHz
15 MHz, with FPU
25 MHz, with FPU
30 MHz, with FPU
30 MHz, with FPU/2MB RAM
070 991
062 860
071 298
070 423
070 456
064 982
064 971
064 974
066 991
CC220
Partslist
System software Z25 German (E)

System software D25 German
System software D25 German (E)
066 992
066 994
066 995
(E) = COMECON export version
SCP2 module:
Plugin module SCP2 (LSV2DNC), without FPU
EPROM module for SCP2
065 632
063 686
SERVOi module:
SERVO4iS
SERVO6iS
SERVOi EXE3/3S
SERVO4iS 15 analog Out4
SERVOi EXE3/3S 15 analog Out7
SERVOi EXE3/3S 25 analog Out7
Setpoint module analog Out4
Setpoint module analog Out7
Processor module CG16/15
Processor module CG160/25
15 MHz
25 MHz
065 596
063 897
070 476
068 006
068 008
070 740
071 494
070 741
065 599
062 704
062 858
071 296
Measuring system cable (CC220 ROD or CC220 EXE):

Single parts:
Cable 10 x 0.142 + 4 x 0.52
Dplug, 15pin
Metal cover for 15pin Dplug
Socket 12 pin Souriau
Accessory kit for Souriau socket
048 662
048 663
048 664
048 665
048 666
048 667
903 499
904 440
913 724
909 131
909 688
Note:
These cables must not be tightened by chain!
I/O 24/0.2 module (digital I/O), PIC 250:

I/O 24/0.2 without PIC 250
I/O 24/0.2 + PIC250
I/O 24/0.2 + PIC250 + V24/20mA extension card for DNC
Interface cable X11
Interface cable X21
Interface cable X22
PIC 250
Parts2
068 347
068 349
068 357
048 034
048 033
048 032
066 635
Partslist
CC220
NCPLCBit module (bit coupler):

NCPLCBit
NCPLCBit + V24/20 mA extension card for DNC
Cable NCPLCBit 1.8 m (for AG/P)
AG/Z
AG/P
044 339
056 752
041 535
062 970
048 081
041 523
047 944
NCPLCWord3 module (word coupler):

NCPLCWord3
NCPLCWord3 + V24/20MA extended module for DNC
Connection cable 0.7 m to AG/NC3S
Connection cable 1.5 m to AG/NC3S
Connection cable 0.55 m from AG/NC3S to AG/Z_S
AG/NC3S
060 668
060 670
060 742
060 743
064 754
046 800
071 204
PCI/OS module:
PCI/OS + PIC250
PCI/OS + PIC250 + V24/20MA extension card for DNC
PIC 250
Connection cable 0.55 m from PCI/OS to AG/ZS
AG/ZS
071 356
071 358
066 635
064 754
064 719
PS200 / PS75 modules (power supply modules):

PS75
PS200
047 181
052 910
PLC modules:
AG/ZS
AG/NC3S
AG/Z
AG/P
E 24V/DC, 95way
064 719
071 204
041 523
047 944
071 252
Power supply modules to VDE 0551:

24 V=; 6 A / 3*400 V
24 V=; 16 A / 3*400 V
916 535
916 327
Dummy cover for card rack slots:

Dummy cover (CNC section)
Dummy cover (PLC section)
Parts3
050 515
046 208
Partslist
CC220
DNC modules:
Extended module V24/20mA (EDNC + LSV2DNC)
Plugin module SCP2 (LSV2DNC), without FPU
EPROM module for SCP2
056 737
065 632
063 686
DCR cassette player:

DCR cassette player
Blank cassettes (min. qty. 10)
Connection cable CNC DCR (2.5 m)
036 485
037 087
046 266
MiniCass cassette player:

MiniCass
Blank cassettes (min. qty. 10)
Connection cable CNC MiniCass (2.5 m)
044 198
910 749
046 266
PTR punched tape reader:

Punched tape reader
Connection cable CNC PTR (5 m)
Connection cable CNC PTR (10 m)
914 122
050 336
050 337
CC disk
Connection cable CNC CC disk (2.5 m)
Diskettes 3", formatted 720 kByte (min. qty. 10)
Diskettes 3", unformatted 1.44 MByte (min. qty. 10)
062 957
064 785
054 599
915 486
CC disk:
Software XTRANS:
XTRANS on 3" diskette
XTRANS on 5" diskette
V24 transmission cable (CNC PC)
062 625
064 780
054 956
BIBURN software:
Incl. software protection adaptor on 3" diskette
Incl. software protection adaptor on 5" diskette
Without software protection adaptor on 3" diskette (update)
Without software protection adaptor on 5" diskette (update)
Parts4
064 135
064 806
066 728
066 730
CC220
Glossary
Glossary
12"monochrome panel
14"standard colour panel
14"special colour panel
20 mA interface at CP/MEM5
20 mA interface at DNC extended module V24/20mA
20 mA interface at SCP
125
114
134
36
162
347
A
Address distribution CL 300
172
Address distribution PC 600 with bit coupling
174
Address distribution PC 600 with word coupling
175
Address distribution PIC 250
171
AG/NC3S coupling
(see NCPLCWord3)
AG/P coupling
(see NCPLCBit)
AG/ZS coupling
(see NCPLCBit)
Angular position measuring systems
314
Analog setpoint output of SERVOi
329
Analog handwheel, connection to 12" monochrome panel
130
Analog handwheel, connection to 14" colour panel (standard)
12 0
Analog handwheel, connection to 14" colour panel (special)
141
Analog handwheel, connection to MTB1 I/O
157
ASCII keyboard
159
B
Battery for CP/MEM5
229, 33
343
BIBURN, EPROM programmable software
196
Bit coupling, definition
169
Block diagrams and conductor cross sections, voltage connection
217
Brightness, screen
114, 125, 135
C
Cable, panel / MTB1 I/O
Cable for PIC 250 output signals
Cable for PIC 250 input signals
Cable NCPLCBit to AG/ZS
Cable NCPLCWord3 to AG/NC3S
Cable SERVOi measuring system
Cable screening
Cable plug housing
Cable connector, housing
Card rack, installation
Card rack, permissible slot assignment
Card rack, dimensions
Card rack, versions
Gloss1
152
336
337
341
344
318
214
Safety notes/screen connection
Safety notes/screen connection
210
17
21, 22
14
Glossary
Card rack, maintenance

CL 300
CNC digital interface
CNC, conditions for use
Communication memory
Conductor cross sections, voltage connection
Corrosive influences
CP/MEM5
CTS/RTS
Current loop interface at CP/MEM4
Current loop interface at DNC extended module V24/20mA
Current loop interface at SCP
CC220
226
172
(see manual part 2)
222
343
217
222
32
168
36
162
347
D
Data transfer software
Data transfer software, XTRANS
DCR cassette player
Diskette unit CC disk
Distance coded measuring systems
Digital handwheel, connection to SERVOi
Digital handwheel, connection to MTB1 I/O
DNC, LSV2 via SCP
DNC interfaces
Drawer with keyboard, dimensions
Drawer with keyboard, installation
DTR/DSR
196
196
187
195
314
320
158
345
160
25
28
165
E
Earthing stud, 12" monochrome panel
Earthing stud, 14" colour panel (standard)
Earthing stud, 14" colour panel (special)
Earthing stud, card rack
Electrical connections
Encoder power supply
Environmental/operating conditions
EPROM programming software
Equipotential bonding at interfaces
Error message CP/MEM5 BATTERY LOW"
EXE, integrated, connection to
EXE, external, connection to
Extended module V24/20 mA (for DNC)
23
123
147
14
212
314
222
196
Safety notes, 214
33
319
317
160
F, G
Fast inputs/outputs of SERVOi
Fast retract" input, SERVOi
Fast retract" signal input, SERVOi
323
328
328
Grey tones
125
Gloss2
Glossary
CC220
H
Handwheels, analog/digital
159
Handwheel, analog, connection to 12" monochrome panel
130
Handwheel, analog, connection to 14" colour panel (standard)
120
Handwheel, analog, connection to 14" colour panel (special)
141
Handwheel, analog, connection to MTB1 I/O
157
Handwheel, digital, connection to MTB1 I/O
158
Handwheel, digital, connection to SERVOi
320
Handwheel, installation
29
Handwheel, dimensions
26
Hardware handshake
166
High Speed I/O of SERVOi
323
High Speed I/O, signal descriptions
(see manual part 2)
Humidity
222
I
IN 95, module
Interface 20 mA at CP/MEM4
Interface 20 mA at DNC extended module V24/20 mA
Interface 20 mA at SCP
Interface RS422 at SCP
Interface V24 at CP/MEM4
Interface V24 at DNC extended module V24/20 mA
Interface V24 at SCP
Interfaces, required equipotential bonding
Interfaces for DNC
Interference suppression
Installation, panels
Installation, card rack
Installation, electronic handwheel
Installation, MTB1 I/O
Installation, drawer with keyboard
Integrated EXE
Interface cable for PIC 250 output signals
Interface cable for PIC 250 input signals
Interface tables
I/O 24/0.2
184
36
162
347
349
34
160
346
Safety notes, 214
160
215
27
210
29
29
28
319
336
337
(see manual part 2)
331
K
Keyboard, ASCII
Keyboard, MF2, connection
Keyboard with drawer, installation
Keyboard with drawer, dimensions
159
145
28
25
L
Load/logic power supply modules
LSV2DNC with SCP
213
345
Gloss3
Glossary
Linear measuring systems
CC220
314
M
Maintenance, panels
Maintenance, card rack
Maintenance, MEM5
Maintenance, NCPLCWord3
Measuring systems for SERVOi, permissible
Measuring system inputs, SERVOi
MF2 keyboard
Module AG/ZS (PLC)
Module AG/NC3 (PLC)
Module CP/MEM4
Module I/O 24/0.2
Module E 24V/DC, 95way (PLC)
Module MTB1 I/O
Module NCPLCBit
Module PCI/OS
Module NCPLCWord3
Module PS 75
Module SCP
Module SERVOi
MTB1 I/O
MTB1 I/O, dimensions
MTB1 I/O, installation
225
226
229
229
313
312
145
189
189
182
181
32
331
184
151
339
350
342
353
345
310
151
25
29
N, O
NCPLCBit
NCPLCBit to AG/ZS, connection cable
NCPLCWord3
NCPLCWord3, maintenance
NCPLCWord3 to AG/NC3S, connection cable
339
341
342
229
344
Operating conditions
Overview, system configuration
222
11
P
Panel 12" monochrome
Panel 14" colour (standard)
Panel 14" colour (special)
Panels, dimensions
Panels, installation
Panels, maintenance
Panel / MTB1 I/O connection cable
PC 600
PE conductor
125
114
134
23, 24
27
225
152
173
214
Gloss4
CC220
Glossary
PE conductor
PE connection, 12" monochrome panel
PE connection, 14" colour panel
PE connection, card rack
PIC 250
Pin assignment, 20mA interface at CP/MEM4
Pin assignment, 20mA interface at DNC extended module V24/20mA
Pin assignment, 20mA interface at SCP
Pin assignment, RS422 interface at SCP
Pin assignment, V24 interface at CP/MEM4
Pin assignment, V24 interface at DNC extended module V24/20mA
Pin assignment, V24 interface at SCP
Plugin module CP/MEM5
Plugin modules, permissible slot assignment in card rack
PLC couplings
PLC coupling, examples
PLC program generation, limits to
Power supply 230 V / 24 V, general data
Power supply modules for load/logic supply 24V
Potentiometers, connection to 12" monochrome panel
Potentiometers, connection to 14" colour panel (standard)
Potentiometers, connection to 14" colour panel (special)
Potentiometers, connection to MTB1 I/O
Probe inputs, SERVOi
Probes to SERVOi, connection examples
Programming units
Protection standards
PS75
Punched tape reader
214
23
123
14
171
36
162
347
349
34
160
346
32
17
169
178
176
212
213
353
130
120
141
157
325
326
196
222
353
191
R
READY2 contact
READY2 contact
Repairs to CNC components
Retract", fast signal input to SERVOi
RS422 interface at SCP
RTS/CTS
354
354
Safety notes, 224
328
349
166
S
Sceening
Safety notes, 214
SCP
345
SERVOi
310
SERVOi measuring system inputs, terminal assignments
315, 316, 317
SERVOi measuring system inputs (integrated EXE), terminal assignments 319
Setpoint outputs, SERVOi
329
Signal name register
(see manual part 2)
Slot assignment, card rack
17
Slot variations
17
Gloss5
Glossary
Software handshake
Status signals of interfaces, general
Switch cabinet construction, notes
System components, dimensions
CC220
166
165
221
21
11
V
V24 interface at CP/MEM5
V24 interface at DNC extended module V24/20mA
V24 interface at SCP
Ventilation unit, card rack
Voltage connection, block diagrams and conductor cross section
VGA connection
34
160
346
15, 226
217
146
W
Word coupling, definition
Write protection switch PIC 250
169
332
X
Xon/Xoff
XTRANS, data transmission software
166
196
Gloss6
1070 073 301-103 (95.05) GB
HB NC AT/VSP Printed in Germany

Connection Conditions Bosch CC220

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Connection Conditions Bosch CC220

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Antriebs- und Steuerungstechnik

by Robert Bosch GmbH,

Connection conditions part 1

Dimensions, installation and connection conditions

Dimensions card rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1

CP/MEM5 computer/memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2

Connection conditions part 2

Signal register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 150

Danger of battery leakage!

Danger: electrostatic components!

Remove plug before opening!

Bolts only for PE conductor connection!

Only for cable screen connection!

Symbols used in the manual:

To draw your attention to particular safetycritical points or instructions:

The READY2 contact must be networked to the emergency stop circuit!

System components / plugin modules

Screen connection / PE conductor connection

Interfaces / interface modules

Inadequate screening reduces immunity to interference and can lead to sys

This manual is intended for technically qualified personnel.

Configuration, commissioning or maintenance may only be carried out by suitably

System configuration CC 220

System configuration CC 220 with special

A further PC apart from the CNC can be con

An MF2 keyboard is coupled to the panel in

Keyboard cable (max. 25m)

VGA cable (max. 25m)

NC card rack 1.05

NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8

NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7

Please refer to the chapter Dimensions, installation and connection conditions"

NC card rack 1.05

NC card rack 1.05

NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8

NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7

NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8

NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7

NC card rack 1.05

CP/MEM5, computer/memory module

Power supply module PS 75

Servotypes, servo loop modules (servo cards)

NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 or NC/CL3 card rack

CP/MEM5 computer/memory module

Power supply module PS 75 or PS 200

Servotypes, servo loop modules (servo cards)

For NCPLC card rack 1.05/8:

For NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7:

14" standard colour panel

Please refer to the chapter Dimensions, installation and connection conditions"

14" standard colour panel

Colour panel 1.014"

Electrical connections and controls

Controls and ports at a glance

Interface section of the colour panel

Colour panel rear view

Special socket, SubD, 20pin

Special connector, SubD, 20pin

Screen attachment: metal bracket from

Connection cable X22 panel CP/MEM

Connection cable X22

Special socket, SubD, 15pin

Special connector, SubD, 15pin

Screen attachment: metal bracket from